Face Interviews Confidently!

Table of Contents

1. C Aptitude

2. C++ Aptitude and OOPS

3. Quantitative Aptitude

4. RDBMS Concepts

5. SQL

6. Computer Networks

7. Operating Systems

8. Data Structures
9. JAVA
10. Technical Questions

11. UNIX
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

1 C Aptitude

Note :All the programs are tested under Turbo C/C++ compilers.
It is assumed that,
 Programs run under DOS environment,
 The underlying machine is an x86 system,
 Program is compiled using Turbo C/C++ compiler.
The program output may depend on the information based on this assumptions (for example sizeof(int)
== 2 may be assumed).

Predict the output or error(s) for the following:

1. void main()
{
int const * p=5;
printf("%d",++(*p));
}
Answer:
Compiler error: Cannot modify a constant value.
Explanation:
p is a pointer to a "constant integer". But we tried to change the value of the "constant integer".

2. main()
{
char s[ ]="man";
int i;
for(i=0;s[ i ];i++)
printf("\n%c%c%c%c",s[ i ],*(s+i),*(i+s),i[s]);
}
Answer:
mmmm
aaaa
nnnn
Explanation:
s[i], *(i+s), *(s+i), i[s] are all different ways of expressing the same idea. Generally array
name is the base address for that array. Here s is the base address. i is the index number/displacement from the
base address. So, indirecting it with * is same as s[i]. i[s] may be surprising. But in the case of C it is same as
s[i].

3. main()
{
float me = 1.1;
double you = 1.1;
if(me==you)
printf("I love U");
else
printf("I hate U");
}
Answer:
I hate U
Explanation:
For floating point numbers (float, double, long double) the values cannot be predicted exactly.
Depending on the number of bytes, the precession with of the value represented varies. Float takes 4 bytes and
long double takes 10 bytes. So float stores 0.9 with less precision than long double.

2
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Rule of Thumb:
Never compare or at-least be cautious when using floating point numbers with relational
operators (== , >, <, <=, >=,!= ) .

4. main()
{
static int var = 5;
printf("%d ",var--);
if(var)
main();
}
Answer:
54321
Explanation:
When static storage class is given, it is initialized once. The change in the value of a static
variable is retained even between the function calls. Main is also treated like any other ordinary function, which
can be called recursively.

5. main()
{
int c[ ]={2.8,3.4,4,6.7,5};
int j,*p=c,*q=c;
for(j=0;j<5;j++) {
printf(" %d ",*c);
++q; }
for(j=0;j<5;j++){
printf(" %d ",*p);
++p; }
}

Answer:
2222223465
Explanation:
Initially pointer c is assigned to both p and q. In the first loop, since only q is incremented and
not c , the value 2 will be printed 5 times. In second loop p itself is incremented. So the values 2 3 4 6 5 will be
printed.

6. main()
{
extern int i;
i=20;
printf("%d",i);
}

Answer:
Linker Error : Undefined symbol '_i'
Explanation:
extern storage class in the following declaration,
extern int i;
specifies to the compiler that the memory for i is allocated in some other program and that address will be given to
the current program at the time of linking. But linker finds that no other variable of name i is available in any other
program with memory space allocated for it. Hence a linker error has occurred .

7. main()
{
int i=-1,j=-1,k=0,l=2,m;
m=i++&&j++&&k++||l++;
printf("%d %d %d %d %d",i,j,k,l,m);
}
Answer:
00131
Explanation :
Logical operations always give a result of 1 or 0 . And also the logical AND (&&) operator
has higher priority over the logical OR (||) operator. So the expression ‘i++ && j++ && k++’ is executed first.
The result of this expression is 0 (-1 && -1 && 0 = 0). Now the expression is 0 || 2 which evaluates to 1
(because OR operator always gives 1 except for ‘0 || 0’ combination- for which it gives 0). So the value of m is 1.
The values of other variables are also incremented by 1.

3
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

8. main()
{
char *p;
printf("%d %d ",sizeof(*p),sizeof(p));
}

Answer:
12
Explanation:
The sizeof() operator gives the number of bytes taken by its operand. P is a character pointer,
which needs one byte for storing its value (a character). Hence sizeof(*p) gives a value of 1. Since it needs two
bytes to store the address of the character pointer sizeof(p) gives 2.

9. main()
{
int i=3;
switch(i)
{
default:printf("zero");
case 1: printf("one");
break;
case 2:printf("two");
break;
case 3: printf("three");
break;
}
}
Answer :
three
Explanation :
The default case can be placed anywhere inside the loop. It is executed only when all other
cases doesn't match.

10. main()
{
printf("%x",-1<<4);
}
Answer:
fff0
Explanation :
-1 is internally represented as all 1's. When left shifted four times the least significant 4 bits are
filled with 0's.The %x format specifier specifies that the integer value be printed as a hexadecimal value.

11. main()
{
char string[]="Hello World";
display(string);
}
void display(char *string)
{
printf("%s",string);
}
Answer:
Compiler Error : Type mismatch in redeclaration of function display
Explanation :
In third line, when the function display is encountered, the compiler doesn't know anything
about the function display. It assumes the arguments and return types to be integers, (which is the default type).
When it sees the actual function display, the arguments and type contradicts with what it has assumed previously.
Hence a compile time error occurs.

12. main()
{
int c=- -2;
printf("c=%d",c);
}
Answer:
c=2;

4
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Explanation:
Here unary minus (or negation) operator is used twice. Same maths rules applies, ie. minus *
minus= plus.
Note:
However you cannot give like --2. Because -- operator can only be applied to variables as a
decrement operator (eg., i--). 2 is a constant and not a variable.

13. #define int char

main()
{
int i=65;
printf("sizeof(i)=%d",sizeof(i));
}
Answer:
sizeof(i)=1
Explanation:
Since the #define replaces the string int by the macro char

14. main()
{
int i=10;
i=!i>14;
printf("i=%d",i);
}
Answer:
i=0

Explanation:
In the expression !i>14 , NOT (!) operator has more precedence than ‘ >’ symbol. ! is a unary
logical operator. !i (!10) is 0 (not of true is false). 0>14 is false (zero).

15. #include<stdio.h>
main()
{
char s[]={'a','b','c','\n','c','\0'};
char *p,*str,*str1;
p=&s[3];
str=p;
str1=s;
printf("%d",++*p + ++*str1-32);
}
Answer:
77
Explanation:
p is pointing to character '\n'. str1 is pointing to character 'a' ++*p. "p is pointing to '\n' and that is
incremented by one." the ASCII value of '\n' is 10, which is then incremented to 11. The value of ++*p is 11. +
+*str1, str1 is pointing to 'a' that is incremented by 1 and it becomes 'b'. ASCII value of 'b' is 98.
Now performing (11 + 98 – 32), we get 77("M");
So we get the output 77 :: "M" (Ascii is 77).

16. #include<stdio.h>
main()
{
int a[2][2][2] = { {10,2,3,4}, {5,6,7,8} };
int *p,*q;
p=&a[2][2][2];
*q=***a;
printf("%d----%d",*p,*q);
}
Answer:
SomeGarbageValue---1
Explanation:
p=&a[2][2][2] you declare only two 2D arrays, but you are trying to access the third
2D(which you are not declared) it will print garbage values. *q=***a starting address of a is assigned integer
pointer. Now q is pointing to starting address of a. If you print *q, it will print first element of 3D array.

5
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

17. #include<stdio.h>
main()
{
struct xx
{
int x=3;
char name[]="hello";
};
struct xx *s;
printf("%d",s->x);
printf("%s",s->name);
}
Answer:
Compiler Error
Explanation:
You should not initialize variables in declaration

18. #include<stdio.h>
main()
{
struct xx
{
int x;
struct yy
{
char s;
struct xx *p;
};
struct yy *q;
};
}
Answer:
Compiler Error
Explanation:
The structure yy is nested within structure xx. Hence, the elements are of yy are to be accessed
through the instance of structure xx, which needs an instance of yy to be known. If the instance is created after
defining the structure the compiler will not know about the instance relative to xx. Hence for nested structure yy
you have to declare member.

19. main()
{
printf("\nab");
printf("\bsi");
printf("\rha");
}
Answer:
hai
Explanation:
\n - newline
\b - backspace
\r - linefeed

20. main()
{
int i=5;
printf("%d%d%d%d%d%d",i++,i--,++i,--i,i);
}
Answer:
45545
Explanation:
The arguments in a function call are pushed into the stack from left to right. The evaluation is
by popping out from the stack. and the evaluation is from right to left, hence the result.

21. #define square(x) x*x

main()
{
int i;

6
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

i = 64/square(4);
printf("%d",i);
}
Answer:
64
Explanation:
the macro call square(4) will substituted by 4*4 so the expression becomes i = 64/4*4 . Since /
and * has equal priority the expression will be evaluated as (64/4)*4 i.e. 16*4 = 64

22. main()
{
char *p="hai friends",*p1;
p1=p;
while(*p!='\0') ++*p++;
printf("%s %s",p,p1);
}
Answer:
ibj!gsjfoet
Explanation:
++*p++ will be parse in the given order
 *p that is value at the location currently pointed by p will be taken
 ++*p the retrieved value will be incremented
 when ; is encountered the location will be incremented that is p++ will be executed
Hence, in the while loop initial value pointed by p is ‘h’, which is changed to ‘i’ by executing ++*p and pointer
moves to point, ‘a’ which is similarly changed to ‘b’ and so on. Similarly blank space is converted to ‘!’. Thus, we
obtain value in p becomes “ibj!gsjfoet” and since p reaches ‘\0’ and p1 points to p thus p1doesnot print anything.

23. #include <stdio.h>

#define a 10
main()
{
#define a 50
printf("%d",a);
}
Answer:
50
Explanation:
The preprocessor directives can be redefined anywhere in the program. So the most recently
assigned value will be taken.

24. #define clrscr() 100

main()
{
clrscr();
printf("%d\n",clrscr());
}
Answer:
100
Explanation:
Preprocessor executes as a seperate pass before the execution of the compiler. So textual
replacement of clrscr() to 100 occurs.The input program to compiler looks like this :
main()
{
100;
printf("%d\n",100);
}
Note:
100; is an executable statement but with no action. So it doesn't give any problem

25. main()
{
printf("%p",main);
}
Answer:
Some address will be printed.
Explanation:
Function names are just addresses (just like array names are addresses).

7
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

main() is also a function. So the address of function main will be printed. %p in printf specifies that the argument
is an address. They are printed as hexadecimal numbers.

27) main()
{
clrscr();
}
clrscr();

Answer:
No output/error
Explanation:
The first clrscr() occurs inside a function. So it becomes a function call. In the second clrscr();
is a function declaration (because it is not inside any function).

28) enum colors {BLACK,BLUE,GREEN}

main()
{
printf("%d..%d..%d",BLACK,BLUE,GREEN);
return(1);
}
Answer:
0..1..2
Explanation:
enum assigns numbers starting from 0, if not explicitly defined.

29) void main()

{
char far *farther,*farthest;
printf("%d..%d",sizeof(farther),sizeof(farthest));
}
Answer:
4..2
Explanation:
the second pointer is of char type and not a far pointer

30) main()
{
int i=400,j=300;
printf("%d..%d");
}
Answer:
400..300
Explanation:
printf takes the values of the first two assignments of the program. Any number of printf's may
be given. All of them take only the first two values. If more number of assignments given in
the program,then printf will take garbage values.

31) main()
{
char *p;
p="Hello";
printf("%c\n",*&*p);
}
Answer:
H
Explanation:
* is a dereference operator & is a reference operator. They can be applied any number of
times provided it is meaningful. Here p points to the first character in the string "Hello". *p
dereferences it and so its value is H. Again & references it to an address and * dereferences it
to the value H.

32) main()
{
int i=1;
while (i<=5)
{

8
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

printf("%d",i);
if (i>2)
goto here;
i++;
}
}
fun()
{
here:
printf("PP");
}
Answer:
Compiler error: Undefined label 'here' in function main
Explanation:
Labels have functions scope, in other words The scope of the labels is limited to functions .
The label 'here' is available in function fun() Hence it is not visible in function main.

33) main()
{
static char names[5][20]={"pascal","ada","cobol","fortran","perl"};
int i;
char *t;
t=names[3];
names[3]=names[4];
names[4]=t;
for (i=0;i<=4;i++)
printf("%s",names[i]);
}
Answer:
Compiler error: Lvalue required in function main
Explanation:
Array names are pointer constants. So it cannot be modified.

34) void main()

{
int i=5;
printf("%d",i++ + ++i);
}
Answer:
Output Cannot be predicted exactly.
Explanation:
Side effects are involved in the evaluation of i

35) void main()

{
int i=5;
printf("%d",i+++++i);
}
Answer:
Compiler Error
Explanation:
The expression i+++++i is parsed as i ++ ++ + i which is an illegal combination of operators.

36) #include<stdio.h>
main()
{
int i=1,j=2;
switch(i)
{
case 1: printf("GOOD");
break;
case j: printf("BAD");
break;
}
}
Answer:
Compiler Error: Constant expression required in function main.

9
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Explanation:
The case statement can have only constant expressions (this implies that we cannot use
variable names directly so an error).
Note:
Enumerated types can be used in case statements.

37) main()
{
int i;
printf("%d",scanf("%d",&i)); // value 10 is given as input here
}
Answer:
1
Explanation:
Scanf returns number of items successfully read and not 1/0. Here 10 is given as input which
should have been scanned successfully. So number of items read is 1.

38) #define f(g,g2) g##g2

main()
{
int var12=100;
printf("%d",f(var,12));
}
Answer:
100

39) main()
{
int i=0;
for(;i++;printf("%d",i)) ;
printf("%d",i);
}
Answer:
1
Explanation:
before entering into the for loop the checking condition is "evaluated". Here it evaluates to 0
(false) and comes out of the loop, and i is incremented (note the semicolon after the for loop).

40) #include<stdio.h>
main()
{
char s[]={'a','b','c','\n','c','\0'};
char *p,*str,*str1;
p=&s[3];
str=p;
str1=s;
printf("%d",++*p + ++*str1-32);
}
Answer:
M
Explanation:
p is pointing to character '\n'.str1 is pointing to character 'a' ++*p meAnswer:"p is pointing to
'\n' and that is incremented by one." the ASCII value of '\n' is 10. then it is incremented to 11.
the value of ++*p is 11. ++*str1 meAnswer:"str1 is pointing to 'a' that is incremented by 1 and
it becomes 'b'. ASCII value of 'b' is 98. both 11 and 98 is added and result is subtracted from
32.
i.e. (11+98-32)=77("M");

41) #include<stdio.h>
main()
{
struct xx
{
int x=3;
char name[]="hello";
};
struct xx *s=malloc(sizeof(struct xx));

10
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

printf("%d",s->x);
printf("%s",s->name);
}
Answer:
Compiler Error
Explanation:
Initialization should not be done for structure members inside the structure declaration

42) #include<stdio.h>
main()
{
struct xx
{
int x;
struct yy
{
char s;
struct xx *p;
};
struct yy *q;
};
}
Answer:
Compiler Error
Explanation:
in the end of nested structure yy a member have to be declared.

43) main()
{
extern int i;
i=20;
printf("%d",sizeof(i));
}
Answer:
Linker error: undefined symbol '_i'.
Explanation:
extern declaration specifies that the variable i is defined somewhere else. The compiler passes
the external variable to be resolved by the linker. So compiler doesn't find an error. During
linking the linker searches for the definition of i. Since it is not found the linker flags an error.

44) main()
{
printf("%d", out);
}
int out=100;
Answer:
Compiler error: undefined symbol out in function main.
Explanation:
The rule is that a variable is available for use from the point of declaration. Even though a is a
global variable, it is not available for main. Hence an error.

45) main()
{
extern out;
printf("%d", out);
}
int out=100;
Answer:
100
Explanation:
This is the correct way of writing the previous program.

46) main()
{
show();
}
void show()

11
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

{
printf("I'm the greatest");
}
Answer:
Compier error: Type mismatch in redeclaration of show.
Explanation:
When the compiler sees the function show it doesn't know anything about it. So the default
return type (ie, int) is assumed. But when compiler sees the actual definition of show mismatch
occurs since it is declared as void. Hence the error.
The solutions are as follows:
1. declare void show() in main() .
2. define show() before main().
3. declare extern void show() before the use of show().

47) main( )
{
int a[2][3][2] = {{{2,4},{7,8},{3,4}},{{2,2},{2,3},{3,4}}};
printf(“%u %u %u %d \n”,a,*a,**a,***a);
printf(“%u %u %u %d \n”,a+1,*a+1,**a+1,***a+1);
}
Answer:
100, 100, 100, 2
114, 104, 102, 3
Explanation:
The given array is a 3-D one. It can also be viewed as a 1-D array.

2 4 7 8 3 4 2 2 2 3 3 4
100 102 104 106 108 110 112 114 116 118 120 122

thus, for the first printf statement a, *a, **a give address of first element . since the
indirection ***a gives the value. Hence, the first line of the output.
for the second printf a+1 increases in the third dimension thus points to value at 114, *a+1
increments in second dimension thus points to 104, **a +1 increments the first dimension thus
points to 102 and ***a+1 first gets the value at first location and then increments it by 1.
Hence, the output.

48) main( )
{
int a[ ] = {10,20,30,40,50},j,*p;
for(j=0; j<5; j++)
{
printf(“%d” ,*a);
a++;
}
p = a;
for(j=0; j<5; j++)
{
printf(“%d ” ,*p);
p++;
}
}
Answer:
Compiler error: lvalue required.

Explanation:
Error is in line with statement a++. The operand must be an lvalue and may be of any of scalar
type for the any operator, array name only when subscripted is an lvalue. Simply array name is
a non-modifiable lvalue.

49) main( )
{
static int a[ ] = {0,1,2,3,4};
int *p[ ] = {a,a+1,a+2,a+3,a+4};
int **ptr = p;
ptr++;

12
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

printf(“\n %d %d %d”, ptr-p, *ptr-a, **ptr);

*ptr++;
printf(“\n %d %d %d”, ptr-p, *ptr-a, **ptr);
*++ptr;
printf(“\n %d %d %d”, ptr-p, *ptr-a, **ptr);
++*ptr;
printf(“\n %d %d %d”, ptr-p, *ptr-a, **ptr);
}
Answer:
111
222
333
344
Explanation:
Let us consider the array and the two pointers with some address
a
0 1 2 3 4
100 102 104 106 108
p
100 102 104 106 108
1000 1002 1004 1006 1008
ptr
1000
2000
After execution of the instruction ptr++ value in ptr becomes 1002, if scaling factor for integer
is 2 bytes. Now ptr – p is value in ptr – starting location of array p, (1002 – 1000) / (scaling
factor) = 1, *ptr – a = value at address pointed by ptr – starting value of array a, 1002 has a
value 102 so the value is (102 – 100)/(scaling factor) = 1, **ptr is the value stored in the
location pointed by the pointer of ptr = value pointed by value pointed by 1002 = value
pointed by 102 = 1. Hence the output of the firs printf is 1, 1, 1.
After execution of *ptr++ increments value of the value in ptr by scaling factor, so it
becomes1004. Hence, the outputs for the second printf are ptr – p = 2, *ptr – a = 2, **ptr = 2.
After execution of *++ptr increments value of the value in ptr by scaling factor, so it
becomes1004. Hence, the outputs for the third printf are ptr – p = 3, *ptr – a = 3, **ptr = 3.
After execution of ++*ptr value in ptr remains the same, the value pointed by the value is
incremented by the scaling factor. So the value in array p at location 1006 changes from 106
10 108,. Hence, the outputs for the fourth printf are ptr – p = 1006 – 1000 = 3, *ptr – a = 108 –
100 = 4, **ptr = 4.

50) main( )
{
char *q;
int j;
for (j=0; j<3; j++) scanf(“%s” ,(q+j));
for (j=0; j<3; j++) printf(“%c” ,*(q+j));
for (j=0; j<3; j++) printf(“%s” ,(q+j));
}
Explanation:
Here we have only one pointer to type char and since we take input in
the same pointer thus we keep writing over in the same location, each
time shifting the pointer value by 1. Suppose the inputs are MOUSE,
TRACK and VIRTUAL. Then for the first input suppose the pointer
starts at location 100 then the input one is stored as
M O U S E \0

When the second input is given the pointer is incremented as j value

becomes 1, so the input is filled in memory starting from 101.
M T R A C K \0
The third input starts filling from the location 102
M T V I R T U A L \0
This is the final value stored .
The first printf prints the values at the position q, q+1 and q+2 = M T V
The second printf prints three strings starting from locations q, q+1, q+2

13
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

i.e MTVIRTUAL, TVIRTUAL and VIRTUAL.

51) main( )
{
void *vp;
char ch = ‘g’, *cp = “goofy”;
int j = 20;
vp = &ch;
printf(“%c”, *(char *)vp);
vp = &j;
printf(“%d”,*(int *)vp);
vp = cp;
printf(“%s”,(char *)vp + 3);
}
Answer:
g20fy
Explanation:
Since a void pointer is used it can be type casted to any other type pointer. vp = &ch stores
address of char ch and the next statement prints the value stored in vp after type casting it to
the proper data type pointer. the output is ‘g’. Similarly the output from second printf is ‘20’.
The third printf statement type casts it to print the string from the 4 th value hence the output is
‘fy’.

52) main ( )
{
static char *s[ ] = {“black”, “white”, “yellow”, “violet”};
char **ptr[ ] = {s+3, s+2, s+1, s}, ***p;
p = ptr;
**++p;
printf(“%s”,*--*++p + 3);
}
Answer:
ck
Explanation:
In this problem we have an array of char pointers pointing to start of 4 strings. Then we have
ptr which is a pointer to a pointer of type char and a variable p which is a pointer to a pointer
to a pointer of type char. p hold the initial value of ptr, i.e. p = s+3. The next statement
increment value in p by 1 , thus now value of p = s+2. In the printf statement the expression is
evaluated *++p causes gets value s+1 then the pre decrement is executed and we get s+1 – 1 =
s . the indirection operator now gets the value from the array of s and adds 3 to the starting
address. The string is printed starting from this position. Thus, the output is ‘ck’.

53) main()
{
int i, n;
char *x = “girl”;
n = strlen(x);
*x = x[n];
for(i=0; i<n; ++i)
{
printf(“%s\n”,x);
x++;
}
}
Answer:
(blank space)
irl
rl
l

Explanation:
Here a string (a pointer to char) is initialized with a value “girl”. The strlen function returns
the length of the string, thus n has a value 4. The next statement assigns value at the nth
location (‘\0’) to the first location. Now the string becomes “\0irl” . Now the printf statement
prints the string after each iteration it increments it starting position. Loop starts from 0 to 4.
The first time x[0] = ‘\0’ hence it prints nothing and pointer value is incremented. The second

14
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

time it prints from x[1] i.e “irl” and the third time it prints “rl” and the last time it prints “l”
and the loop terminates.
54) int i,j;
for(i=0;i<=10;i++)
{
j+=5;
assert(i<5);
}
Answer:
Runtime error: Abnormal program termination.
assert failed (i<5), <file name>,<line number>
Explanation:
asserts are used during debugging to make sure that certain conditions are satisfied. If assertion
fails, the program will terminate reporting the same. After debugging use,
#undef NDEBUG
and this will disable all the assertions from the source code. Assertion
is a good debugging tool to make use of.

55) main()
{
int i=-1;
+i;
printf("i = %d, +i = %d \n",i,+i);
}
Answer:
i = -1, +i = -1
Explanation:
Unary + is the only dummy operator in C. Where-ever it comes you can just ignore it just
because it has no effect in the expressions (hence the name dummy operator).

56) What are the files which are automatically opened when a C file is executed?
Answer:
stdin, stdout, stderr (standard input,standard output,standard error).

57) what will be the position of the file marker?

a: fseek(ptr,0,SEEK_SET);
b: fseek(ptr,0,SEEK_CUR);

Answer :
a: The SEEK_SET sets the file position marker to the starting of the file.
b: The SEEK_CUR sets the file position marker to the current position
of the file.

58) main()
{
char name[10],s[12];
scanf(" \"%[^\"]\"",s);
}
How scanf will execute?
Answer:
First it checks for the leading white space and discards it.Then it matches with a quotation
mark and then it reads all character upto another quotation mark.

59) What is the problem with the following code segment?

while ((fgets(receiving array,50,file_ptr)) != EOF)
;
Answer & Explanation:
fgets returns a pointer. So the correct end of file check is checking for != NULL.

60) main()
{
main();
}
Answer:
Runtime error : Stack overflow.
Explanation:

15
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

main function calls itself again and again. Each time the function is called its return address is
stored in the call stack. Since there is no condition to terminate the function call, the call stack
overflows at runtime. So it terminates the program and results in an error.

61) main()
{
char *cptr,c;
void *vptr,v;
c=10; v=0;
cptr=&c; vptr=&v;
printf("%c%v",c,v);
}
Answer:
Compiler error (at line number 4): size of v is Unknown.
Explanation:
You can create a variable of type void * but not of type void, since void is an empty type. In
the second line you are creating variable vptr of type void * and v of type void hence an error.

62) main()
{
char *str1="abcd";
char str2[]="abcd";
printf("%d %d %d",sizeof(str1),sizeof(str2),sizeof("abcd"));
}
Answer:
255
Explanation:
In first sizeof, str1 is a character pointer so it gives you the size of the pointer variable. In
second sizeof the name str2 indicates the name of the array whose size is 5 (including the '\0'
termination character). The third sizeof is similar to the second one.

63) main()
{
char not;
not=!2;
printf("%d",not);
}
Answer:
0
Explanation:
! is a logical operator. In C the value 0 is considered to be the boolean value FALSE, and any
non-zero value is considered to be the boolean value TRUE. Here 2 is a non-zero value so
TRUE. !TRUE is FALSE (0) so it prints 0.

64) #define FALSE -1

#define TRUE 1
#define NULL 0
main() {
if(NULL)
puts("NULL");
else if(FALSE)
puts("TRUE");
else
puts("FALSE");
}
Answer:
TRUE
Explanation:
The input program to the compiler after processing by the preprocessor is,
main(){
if(0)
puts("NULL");
else if(-1)
puts("TRUE");
else
puts("FALSE");
}

16
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Preprocessor doesn't replace the values given inside the double quotes. The check by if
condition is boolean value false so it goes to else. In second if -1 is boolean value true hence
"TRUE" is printed.

65) main()
{
int k=1;
printf("%d==1 is ""%s",k,k==1?"TRUE":"FALSE");
}
Answer:
1==1 is TRUE
Explanation:
When two strings are placed together (or separated by white-space) they are concatenated (this
is called as "stringization" operation). So the string is as if it is given as "%d==1 is %s". The
conditional operator( ?: ) evaluates to "TRUE".

66) main()
{
int y;
scanf("%d",&y); // input given is 2000
if( (y%4==0 && y%100 != 0) || y%100 == 0 )
printf("%d is a leap year");
else
printf("%d is not a leap year");
}
Answer:
2000 is a leap year
Explanation:
An ordinary program to check if leap year or not.

67) #define max 5

#define int arr1[max]
main()
{
typedef char arr2[max];
arr1 list={0,1,2,3,4};
arr2 name="name";
printf("%d %s",list[0],name);
}
Answer:
Compiler error (in the line arr1 list = {0,1,2,3,4})
Explanation:
arr2 is declared of type array of size 5 of characters. So it can be used to declare the variable
name of the type arr2. But it is not the case of arr1. Hence an error.
Rule of Thumb:
#defines are used for textual replacement whereas typedefs are used for declaring new types.

68) int i=10;

main()
{
extern int i;
{
int i=20;
{
const volatile unsigned i=30;
printf("%d",i);
}
printf("%d",i);
}
printf("%d",i);
}
Answer:
30,20,10
Explanation:
'{' introduces new block and thus new scope. In the innermost block i is declared as,
const volatile unsigned

17
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

which is a valid declaration. i is assumed of type int. So printf prints 30. In the next block, i
has value 20 and so printf prints 20. In the outermost block, i is declared as extern, so no
storage space is allocated for it. After compilation is over the linker resolves it to global
variable i (since it is the only variable visible there). So it prints i's value as 10.

69) main()
{
int *j;
{
int i=10;
j=&i;
}
printf("%d",*j);
}
Answer:
10
Explanation:
The variable i is a block level variable and the visibility is inside that block only. But the
lifetime of i is lifetime of the function so it lives upto the exit of main function. Since the i is
still allocated space, *j prints the value stored in i since j points i.

70) main()
{
int i=-1;
-i;
printf("i = %d, -i = %d \n",i,-i);
}
Answer:
i = -1, -i = 1
Explanation:
-i is executed and this execution doesn't affect the value of i. In printf first you just print the
value of i. After that the value of the expression -i = -(-1) is printed.

71) #include<stdio.h>
main()
{
const int i=4;
float j;
j = ++i;
printf("%d %f", i,++j);
}
Answer:
Compiler error
Explanation:
i is a constant. you cannot change the value of constant

72) #include<stdio.h>
main()
{
int a[2][2][2] = { {10,2,3,4}, {5,6,7,8} };
int *p,*q;
p=&a[2][2][2];
*q=***a;
printf("%d..%d",*p,*q);
}
Answer:
garbagevalue..1
Explanation:
p=&a[2][2][2] you declare only two 2D arrays. but you are trying to access the third
2D(which you are not declared) it will print garbage values. *q=***a starting address of a is
assigned integer pointer. now q is pointing to starting address of a.if you print *q meAnswer:it
will print first element of 3D array.

73) #include<stdio.h>
main()
{
register i=5;

18
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

char j[]= "hello";

printf("%s %d",j,i);
}
Answer:
hello 5
Explanation:
if you declare i as register compiler will treat it as ordinary integer and it will take integer
value. i value may be stored either in register or in memory.

74) main()
{
int i=5,j=6,z;
printf("%d",i+++j);
}
Answer:
11
Explanation:
the expression i+++j is treated as (i++ + j)

76) struct aaa{

struct aaa *prev;
int i;
struct aaa *next;
};
main()
{
struct aaa abc,def,ghi,jkl;
int x=100;
abc.i=0;abc.prev=&jkl;
abc.next=&def;
def.i=1;def.prev=&abc;def.next=&ghi;
ghi.i=2;ghi.prev=&def;
ghi.next=&jkl;
jkl.i=3;jkl.prev=&ghi;jkl.next=&abc;
x=abc.next->next->prev->next->i;
printf("%d",x);
}
Answer:
2
Explanation:
above all statements form a double circular linked list;
abc.next->next->prev->next->i
this one points to "ghi" node the value of at particular node is 2.

77) struct point

{
int x;
int y;
};
struct point origin,*pp;
main()
{
pp=&origin;
printf("origin is(%d%d)\n",(*pp).x,(*pp).y);
printf("origin is (%d%d)\n",pp->x,pp->y);
}

Answer:
origin is(0,0)
origin is(0,0)
Explanation:
pp is a pointer to structure. we can access the elements of the structure either with arrow mark
or with indirection operator.
Note:
Since structure point is globally declared x & y are initialized as zeroes

78) main()

19
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

{
int i=_l_abc(10);
printf("%d\n",--i);
}
int _l_abc(int i)
{
return(i++);
}
Answer:
9
Explanation:
return(i++) it will first return i and then increments. i.e. 10 will be returned.

79) main()
{
char *p;
int *q;
long *r;
p=q=r=0;
p++;
q++;
r++;
printf("%p...%p...%p",p,q,r);
}
Answer:
0001...0002...0004
Explanation:
++ operator when applied to pointers increments address according to their corresponding
data-types.

80) main()
{
char c=' ',x,convert(z);
getc(c);
if((c>='a') && (c<='z'))
x=convert(c);
printf("%c",x);
}
convert(z)
{
return z-32;
}
Answer:
Compiler error
Explanation:
declaration of convert and format of getc() are wrong.

81) main(int argc, char **argv)

{
printf("enter the character");
getchar();
sum(argv[1],argv[2]);
}
sum(num1,num2)
int num1,num2;
{
return num1+num2;
}
Answer:
Compiler error.
Explanation:
argv[1] & argv[2] are strings. They are passed to the function sum without converting it to
integer values.

82) # include <stdio.h>

int one_d[]={1,2,3};
main()

20
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

{
int *ptr;
ptr=one_d;
ptr+=3;
printf("%d",*ptr);
}
Answer:
garbage value
Explanation:
ptr pointer is pointing to out of the array range of one_d.

83) # include<stdio.h>
aaa() {
printf("hi");
}
bbb(){
printf("hello");
}
ccc(){
printf("bye");
}
main()
{
int (*ptr[3])();
ptr[0]=aaa;
ptr[1]=bbb;
ptr[2]=ccc;
ptr[2]();
}
Answer:
bye
Explanation:
ptr is array of pointers to functions of return type int.ptr[0] is assigned to address of the
function aaa. Similarly ptr[1] and ptr[2] for bbb and ccc respectively. ptr[2]() is in effect of
writing ccc(), since ptr[2] points to ccc.

85) #include<stdio.h>
main()
{
FILE *ptr;
char i;
ptr=fopen("zzz.c","r");
while((i=fgetch(ptr))!=EOF)
printf("%c",i);
}
Answer:
contents of zzz.c followed by an infinite loop
Explanation:
The condition is checked against EOF, it should be checked against NULL.

86) main()
{
int i =0;j=0;
if(i && j++)
printf("%d..%d",i++,j);
printf("%d..%d,i,j);
}
Answer:
0..0
Explanation:
The value of i is 0. Since this information is enough to determine the truth value of the boolean
expression. So the statement following the if statement is not executed. The values of i and j
remain unchanged and get printed.

87) main()
{
int i;

21
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

i = abc();
printf("%d",i);
}
abc()
{
_AX = 1000;
}
Answer:
1000
Explanation:
Normally the return value from the function is through the information from the accumulator.
Here _AH is the pseudo global variable denoting the accumulator. Hence, the value of the
accumulator is set 1000 so the function returns value 1000.

88) int i;
main(){
int t;
for ( t=4;scanf("%d",&i)-t;printf("%d\n",i))
printf("%d--",t--);
}
// If the inputs are 0,1,2,3 find the o/p
Answer:
4--0
3--1
2--2
Explanation:
Let us assume some x= scanf("%d",&i)-t the values during execution
will be,
t i x
4 0 -4
3 1 -2
2 2 0

89) main(){
int a= 0;int b = 20;char x =1;char y =10;
if(a,b,x,y)
printf("hello");
}
Answer:
hello
Explanation:
The comma operator has associativity from left to right. Only the rightmost value is returned
and the other values are evaluated and ignored. Thus the value of last variable y is returned to
check in if. Since it is a non zero value if becomes true so, "hello" will be printed.

90) main(){
unsigned int i;
for(i=1;i>-2;i--)
printf("c aptitude");
}
Explanation:
i is an unsigned integer. It is compared with a signed value. Since the both types doesn't match,
signed is promoted to unsigned value. The unsigned equivalent of -2 is a huge value so
condition becomes false and control comes out of the loop.

91) In the following pgm add a stmt in the function fun such that the address of
'a' gets stored in 'j'.
main(){
int * j;
void fun(int **);
fun(&j);
}
void fun(int **k) {
int a =0;
/* add a stmt here*/
}
Answer:

22
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

*k = &a
Explanation:
The argument of the function is a pointer to a pointer.

92) What are the following notations of defining functions known as?
i. int abc(int a,float b)
{
/* some code */
}
ii. int abc(a,b)
int a; float b;
{
/* some code*/
}
Answer:
i. ANSI C notation
ii. Kernighan & Ritche notation

93) main()
{
char *p;
p="%d\n";
p++;
p++;
printf(p-2,300);
}
Answer:
300
Explanation:
The pointer points to % since it is incremented twice and again decremented by 2, it points to
'%d\n' and 300 is printed.

94) main(){
char a[100];
a[0]='a';a[1]]='b';a[2]='c';a[4]='d';
abc(a);
}
abc(char a[]){
a++;
printf("%c",*a);
a++;
printf("%c",*a);
}
Explanation:
The base address is modified only in function and as a result a points to 'b' then after
incrementing to 'c' so bc will be printed.

95) func(a,b)
int a,b;
{
return( a= (a==b) );
}
main()
{
int process(),func();
printf("The value of process is %d !\n ",process(func,3,6));
}
process(pf,val1,val2)
int (*pf) ();
int val1,val2;
{
return((*pf) (val1,val2));
}
Answer:
The value if process is 0 !
Explanation:

23
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

The function 'process' has 3 parameters - 1, a pointer to another function 2 and 3, integers.
When this function is invoked from main, the following substitutions for formal parameters
take place: func for pf, 3 for val1 and 6 for val2. This function returns the result of the
operation performed by the function 'func'. The function func has two integer parameters. The
formal parameters are substituted as 3 for a and 6 for b. since 3 is not equal to 6, a==b returns
0. therefore the function returns 0 which in turn is returned by the function 'process'.

96) void main()

{
static int i=5;
if(--i){
main();
printf("%d ",i);
}
}
Answer:
0000
Explanation:
The variable "I" is declared as static, hence memory for I will be allocated for only once, as it
encounters the statement. The function main() will be called recursively unless I becomes equal to 0, and
since main() is recursively called, so the value of static I ie., 0 will be printed every time the control is
returned.

97) void main()

{
int k=ret(sizeof(float));
printf("\n here value is %d",++k);
}
int ret(int ret)
{
ret += 2.5;
return(ret);
}
Answer:
Here value is 7
Explanation:
The int ret(int ret), ie., the function name and the argument name can be the same.
Firstly, the function ret() is called in which the sizeof(float) ie., 4 is passed, after the first
expression the value in ret will be 6, as ret is integer hence the value stored in ret will have implicit type
conversion from float to int. The ret is returned in main() it is printed after and preincrement.

98) void main()

{
char a[]="12345\0";
int i=strlen(a);
printf("here in 3 %d\n",++i);
}
Answer:
here in 3 6
Explanation:
The char array 'a' will hold the initialized string, whose length will be counted from 0 till the
null character. Hence the 'I' will hold the value equal to 5, after the pre-increment in the printf statement,
the 6 will be printed.

99) void main()

{
unsigned giveit=-1;
int gotit;
printf("%u ",++giveit);
printf("%u \n",gotit=--giveit);
}
Answer:
0 65535
Explanation:

100) void main()

{

24
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

int i;
char a[]="\0";
if(printf("%s\n",a))
printf("Ok here \n");
else
printf("Forget it\n");
}
Answer:
Ok here
Explanation:
Printf will return how many characters does it print. Hence printing a null character
returns 1 which makes the if statement true, thus "Ok here" is printed.

101) void main()

{
void *v;
int integer=2;
int *i=&integer;
v=i;
printf("%d",(int*)*v);
}
Answer:
Compiler Error. We cannot apply indirection on type void*.
Explanation:
Void pointer is a generic pointer type. No pointer arithmetic can be done on it. Void
pointers are normally used for,
1. Passing generic pointers to functions and returning such pointers.
2. As a intermediate pointer type.
3. Used when the exact pointer type will be known at a later point of time.

102) void main()

{
int i=i++,j=j++,k=k++;
printf(“%d%d%d”,i,j,k);
}
Answer:
Garbage values.
Explanation:
An identifier is available to use in program code from the point of its declaration.
So expressions such as i = i++ are valid statements. The i, j and k are automatic variables and
so they contain some garbage value. Garbage in is garbage out (GIGO).

103) void main()

{
static int i=i++, j=j++, k=k++;
printf(“i = %d j = %d k = %d”, i, j, k);
}
Answer:
i=1j=1k=1
Explanation:
Since static variables are initialized to zero by default.

104) void main()

{
while(1){
if(printf("%d",printf("%d")))
break;
else
continue;
}
}
Answer:
Garbage values
Explanation:
The inner printf executes first to print some garbage value. The printf returns no of characters
printed and this value also cannot be predicted. Still the outer printf prints something and so

25
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

returns a non-zero value. So it encounters the break statement and comes out of the while
statement.

104) main()
{
unsigned int i=10;
while(i-->=0)
printf("%u ",i);

}
Answer:
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 65535 65534…..
Explanation:
Since i is an unsigned integer it can never become negative. So the expression i-- >=0 will
always be true, leading to an infinite loop.

105) #include<conio.h>
main()
{
int x,y=2,z,a;
if(x=y%2) z=2;
a=2;
printf("%d %d ",z,x);
}
Answer:
Garbage-value 0
Explanation:
The value of y%2 is 0. This value is assigned to x. The condition reduces to if (x) or in other
words if(0) and so z goes uninitialized.
Thumb Rule: Check all control paths to write bug free code.

106) main()
{
int a[10];
printf("%d",*a+1-*a+3);
}
Answer:
4
Explanation:
*a and -*a cancels out. The result is as simple as 1 + 3 = 4 !

107) #define prod(a,b) a*b

main()
{
int x=3,y=4;
printf("%d",prod(x+2,y-1));
}
Answer:
10
Explanation:
The macro expands and evaluates to as:
x+2*y-1 => x+(2*y)-1 => 10

108) main()
{
unsigned int i=65000;
while(i++!=0);
printf("%d",i);
}
Answer:
1
Explanation:
Note the semicolon after the while statement. When the value of i becomes 0 it comes out of
while loop. Due to post-increment on i the value of i while printing is 1.

109) main()
{

26
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

int i=0;
while(+(+i--)!=0)
i-=i++;
printf("%d",i);
}
Answer:
-1
Explanation:
Unary + is the only dummy operator in C. So it has no effect on the expression and now the
while loop is, while(i--!=0) which is false and so breaks out of while loop. The value –1
is printed due to the post-decrement operator.

113) main()
{
float f=5,g=10;
enum{i=10,j=20,k=50};
printf("%d\n",++k);
printf("%f\n",f<<2);
printf("%lf\n",f%g);
printf("%lf\n",fmod(f,g));
}
Answer:
Line no 5: Error: Lvalue required
Line no 6: Cannot apply leftshift to float
Line no 7: Cannot apply mod to float
Explanation:
Enumeration constants cannot be modified, so you cannot apply ++.
Bit-wise operators and % operators cannot be applied on float values.
fmod() is to find the modulus values for floats as % operator is for ints.

110) main()
{
int i=10;
void pascal f(int,int,int);
f(i++,i++,i++);
printf(" %d",i);
}
void pascal f(integer :i,integer:j,integer :k)
{
write(i,j,k);
}
Answer:
Compiler error: unknown type integer
Compiler error: undeclared function write
Explanation:
Pascal keyword doesn’t mean that pascal code can be used. It means that the function follows
Pascal argument passing mechanism in calling the functions.

111) void pascal f(int i,int j,int k)

{
printf(“%d %d %d”,i, j, k);
}
void cdecl f(int i,int j,int k)
{
printf(“%d %d %d”,i, j, k);
}
main()
{
int i=10;
f(i++,i++,i++);
printf(" %d\n",i);
i=10;
f(i++,i++,i++);
printf(" %d",i);
}
Answer:
10 11 12 13

27
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

12 11 10 13
Explanation:
Pascal argument passing mechanism forces the arguments to be called from left to right. cdecl
is the normal C argument passing mechanism where the arguments are passed from right to left.

112). What is the output of the program given below

main()
{
signed char i=0;
for(;i>=0;i++) ;
printf("%d\n",i);
}
Answer
-128
Explanation
Notice the semicolon at the end of the for loop. THe initial value of the i is set to 0.
The inner loop executes to increment the value from 0 to 127 (the positive range of
char) and then it rotates to the negative value of -128. The condition in the for loop
fails and so comes out of the for loop. It prints the current value of i that is -128.

113) main()
{
unsigned char i=0;
for(;i>=0;i++) ;
printf("%d\n",i);
}
Answer
infinite loop
Explanation
The difference between the previous question and this one is that the char is declared to be
unsigned. So the i++ can never yield negative value and i>=0 never becomes false so that it can come
out of the for loop.

114) main()
{
char i=0;
for(;i>=0;i++) ;
printf("%d\n",i);

}
Answer:
Behavior is implementation dependent.
Explanation:
The detail if the char is signed/unsigned by default is implementation dependent. If
the implementation treats the char to be signed by default the program will print –128 and
terminate. On the other hand if it considers char to be unsigned by default, it goes to infinite
loop.
Rule:
You can write programs that have implementation dependent behavior. But dont
write programs that depend on such behavior.

115) Is the following statement a declaration/definition. Find what does it mean?

int (*x)[10];
Answer
Definition.
x is a pointer to array of(size 10) integers.

Apply clock-wise rule to find the meaning of this definition.

116). What is the output for the program given below

typedef enum errorType{warning, error, exception,}error;

main()
{
error g1;

28
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

g1=1;
printf("%d",g1);
}
Answer
Compiler error: Multiple declaration for error
Explanation
The name error is used in the two meanings. One means that it is a enumerator
constant with value 1. The another use is that it is a type name (due to typedef) for enum
errorType. Given a situation the compiler cannot distinguish the meaning of error to know in
what sense the error is used:
error g1;
g1=error;
// which error it refers in each case?
When the compiler can distinguish between usages then it will not issue error (in
pure technical terms, names can only be overloaded in different namespaces).
Note: the extra comma in the declaration,
enum errorType{warning, error, exception,}
is not an error. An extra comma is valid and is provided just for programmer’s convenience.

117) typedef struct error{int warning, error, exception;}error;

main()
{
error g1;
g1.error =1;
printf("%d",g1.error);
}

Answer
1
Explanation
The three usages of name errors can be distinguishable by the compiler at any instance, so
valid (they are in different namespaces).
Typedef struct error{int warning, error, exception;}error;
This error can be used only by preceding the error by struct kayword as in:
struct error someError;
typedef struct error{int warning, error, exception;}error;
This can be used only after . (dot) or -> (arrow) operator preceded by the variable name as in :
g1.error =1;
printf("%d",g1.error);
typedef struct error{int warning, error, exception;}error;
This can be used to define variables without using the preceding struct keyword as in:
error g1;
Since the compiler can perfectly distinguish between these three usages, it is perfectly legal and valid.

Note
This code is given here to just explain the concept behind. In real programming don’t use such
overloading of names. It reduces the readability of the code. Possible doesn’t mean that we should use it!

118) #ifdef something

int some=0;
#endif

main()
{
int thing = 0;
printf("%d %d\n", some ,thing);
}

Answer:
Compiler error : undefined symbol some
Explanation:
This is a very simple example for conditional compilation. The name something is
not already known to the compiler making the declaration
int some = 0;
effectively removed from the source code.

29
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

119) #if something == 0

int some=0;
#endif

main()
{
int thing = 0;
printf("%d %d\n", some ,thing);
}

Answer
00
Explanation
This code is to show that preprocessor expressions are not the same as the ordinary
expressions. If a name is not known the preprocessor treats it to be equal to zero.

120). What is the output for the following program

main()
{
int arr2D[3][3];
printf("%d\n", ((arr2D==* arr2D)&&(* arr2D == arr2D[0])) );
}
Answer
1
Explanation
This is due to the close relation between the arrays and pointers. N dimensional
arrays are made up of (N-1) dimensional arrays.
arr2D is made up of a 3 single arrays that contains 3 integers each .

arr2D
arr2D[1]
arr2D[2]
arr2D[3]

The name arr2D refers to the beginning of all the 3 arrays. *arr2D refers to the start
of the first 1D array (of 3 integers) that is the same address as arr2D. So the
expression (arr2D == *arr2D) is true (1).
Similarly, *arr2D is nothing but *(arr2D + 0), adding a zero doesn’t change the
value/meaning. Again arr2D[0] is the another way of telling *(arr2D + 0). So the
expression (*(arr2D + 0) == arr2D[0]) is true (1).
Since both parts of the expression evaluates to true the result is true(1) and the same
is printed.

121) void main()

{
if(~0 == (unsigned int)-1)
printf(“You can answer this if you know how values are represented in memory”);
}
Answer
You can answer this if you know how values are represented in memory
Explanation
~ (tilde operator or bit-wise negation operator) operates on 0 to produce all ones to
fill the space for an integer. –1 is represented in unsigned value as all 1’s and so both
are equal.

122) int swap(int *a,int *b)

{
*a=*a+*b;*b=*a-*b;*a=*a-*b;
}
main()
{
int x=10,y=20;
swap(&x,&y);
printf("x= %d y = %d\n",x,y);

30
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

}
Answer
x = 20 y = 10
Explanation
This is one way of swapping two values. Simple checking will help understand this.

123) main()
{
char *p = “ayqm”;
printf(“%c”,++*(p++));
}
Answer:
b

124) main()
{
int i=5;
printf("%d",++i++);
}
Answer:
Compiler error: Lvalue required in function main
Explanation:
++i yields an rvalue. For postfix ++ to operate an lvalue is required.

125) main()
{
char *p = “ayqm”;
char c;
c = ++*p++;
printf(“%c”,c);
}
Answer:
b
Explanation:
There is no difference between the expression ++*(p++) and ++*p++. Parenthesis
just works as a visual clue for the reader to see which expression is first evaluated.

126)
int aaa() {printf(“Hi”);}
int bbb(){printf(“hello”);}
iny ccc(){printf(“bye”);}

main()
{
int ( * ptr[3]) ();
ptr[0] = aaa;
ptr[1] = bbb;
ptr[2] =ccc;
ptr[2]();
}
Answer:
bye
Explanation:
int (* ptr[3])() says that ptr is an array of pointers to functions that takes no arguments and
returns the type int. By the assignment ptr[0] = aaa; it means that the first function pointer in
the array is initialized with the address of the function aaa. Similarly, the other two array
elements also get initialized with the addresses of the functions bbb and ccc. Since ptr[2]
contains the address of the function ccc, the call to the function ptr[2]() is same as calling
ccc(). So it results in printing "bye".

127)
main()
{
int i=5;
printf(“%d”,i=++i ==6);
}

31
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Answer:
1
Explanation:
The expression can be treated as i = (++i==6), because == is of higher precedence than =
operator. In the inner expression, ++i is equal to 6 yielding true(1). Hence the result.

128) main()
{
char p[ ]="%d\n";
p[1] = 'c';
printf(p,65);
}
Answer:
A
Explanation:
Due to the assignment p[1] = ‘c’ the string becomes, “%c\n”. Since this string becomes the
format string for printf and ASCII value of 65 is ‘A’, the same gets printed.

129) void ( * abc( int, void ( *def) () ) ) ();

Answer::
abc is a ptr to a function which takes 2 parameters .(a). an integer variable.(b). a ptrto a
funtion which returns void. the return type of the function is void.
Explanation:
Apply the clock-wise rule to find the result.

130) main()
{
while (strcmp(“some”,”some\0”))
printf(“Strings are not equal\n”);
}
Answer:
No output
Explanation:
Ending the string constant with \0 explicitly makes no difference. So “some” and “some\0” are
equivalent. So, strcmp returns 0 (false) hence breaking out of the while loop.

131) main()
{
char str1[] = {‘s’,’o’,’m’,’e’};
char str2[] = {‘s’,’o’,’m’,’e’,’\0’};
while (strcmp(str1,str2))
printf(“Strings are not equal\n”);
}
Answer:
“Strings are not equal”
“Strings are not equal”
….
Explanation:
If a string constant is initialized explicitly with characters, ‘\0’ is not appended automatically
to the string. Since str1 doesn’t have null termination, it treats whatever the values that are in
the following positions as part of the string until it randomly reaches a ‘\0’. So str1 and str2 are
not the same, hence the result.

132) main()
{
int i = 3;
for (;i++=0;) printf(“%d”,i);
}

Answer:
Compiler Error: Lvalue required.
Explanation:
As we know that increment operators return rvalues and hence it cannot appear on
the left hand side of an assignment operation.

32
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

133) void main()

{
int *mptr, *cptr;
mptr = (int*)malloc(sizeof(int));
printf(“%d”,*mptr);
int *cptr = (int*)calloc(sizeof(int),1);
printf(“%d”,*cptr);
}
Answer:
garbage-value 0
Explanation:
The memory space allocated by malloc is uninitialized, whereas calloc returns the allocated
memory space initialized to zeros.

134) void main()

{
static int i;
while(i<=10)
(i>2)?i++:i--;
printf(“%d”, i);
}
Answer:
32767
Explanation:
Since i is static it is initialized to 0. Inside the while loop the conditional operator evaluates to
false, executing i--. This continues till the integer value rotates to positive value (32767). The
while condition becomes false and hence, comes out of the while loop, printing the i value.

135) main()
{
int i=10,j=20;
j = i, j?(i,j)?i:j:j;
printf("%d %d",i,j);
}

Answer:
10 10
Explanation:
The Ternary operator ( ? : ) is equivalent for if-then-else statement. So the question can be
written as:
if(i,j)
{
if(i,j)
j = i;
else
j = j;
}
else
j = j;

136) 1. const char *a;

2. char* const a;
3. char const *a;
-Differentiate the above declarations.

Answer:
1. 'const' applies to char * rather than 'a' ( pointer to a constant char )
*a='F' : illegal
a="Hi" : legal

2. 'const' applies to 'a' rather than to the value of a (constant pointer to char )
*a='F' : legal
a="Hi" : illegal

3. Same as 1.

33
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

137) main()
{
int i=5,j=10;
i=i&=j&&10;
printf("%d %d",i,j);
}

Answer:
1 10
Explanation:
The expression can be written as i=(i&=(j&&10)); The inner expression (j&&10) evaluates to
1 because j==10. i is 5. i = 5&1 is 1. Hence the result.

138) main()
{
int i=4,j=7;
j = j || i++ && printf("YOU CAN");
printf("%d %d", i, j);
}

Answer:
41
Explanation:
The boolean expression needs to be evaluated only till the truth value of the expression is not
known. j is not equal to zero itself means that the expression’s truth value is 1. Because it is
followed by || and true || (anything) => true where (anything) will not be evaluated. So the
remaining expression is not evaluated and so the value of i remains the same.
Similarly when && operator is involved in an expression, when any of the operands become
false, the whole expression’s truth value becomes false and hence the remaining expression
will not be evaluated.
false && (anything) => false where (anything) will not be evaluated.

139) main()
{
register int a=2;
printf("Address of a = %d",&a);
printf("Value of a = %d",a);
}
Answer:
Compier Error: '&' on register variable
Rule to Remember:
& (address of ) operator cannot be applied on register variables.

140) main()
{
float i=1.5;
switch(i)
{
case 1: printf("1");
case 2: printf("2");
default : printf("0");
}
}
Answer:
Compiler Error: switch expression not integral
Explanation:
Switch statements can be applied only to integral types.

141) main()
{
extern i;
printf("%d\n",i);
{
int i=20;
printf("%d\n",i);
}
}

34
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Answer:
Linker Error : Unresolved external symbol i
Explanation:
The identifier i is available in the inner block and so using extern has no use in resolving it.

142) main()
{
int a=2,*f1,*f2;
f1=f2=&a;
*f2+=*f2+=a+=2.5;
printf("\n%d %d %d",a,*f1,*f2);
}
Answer:
16 16 16
Explanation:
f1 and f2 both refer to the same memory location a. So changes through f1 and f2 ultimately
affects only the value of a.

143) main()
{
char *p="GOOD";
char a[ ]="GOOD";
printf("\n sizeof(p) = %d, sizeof(*p) = %d, strlen(p) = %d", sizeof(p), sizeof(*p), strlen(p));
printf("\n sizeof(a) = %d, strlen(a) = %d", sizeof(a), strlen(a));
}
Answer:
sizeof(p) = 2, sizeof(*p) = 1, strlen(p) = 4
sizeof(a) = 5, strlen(a) = 4
Explanation:
sizeof(p) => sizeof(char*) => 2
sizeof(*p) => sizeof(char) => 1
Similarly,
sizeof(a) => size of the character array => 5
When sizeof operator is applied to an array it returns the sizeof the array and it is not the same
as the sizeof the pointer variable. Here the sizeof(a) where a is the character array and the size
of the array is 5 because the space necessary for the terminating NULL character should also
be taken into account.

144) #define DIM( array, type) sizeof(array)/sizeof(type)

main()
{
int arr[10];
printf(“The dimension of the array is %d”, DIM(arr, int));
}
Answer:
10
Explanation:
The size of integer array of 10 elements is 10 * sizeof(int). The macro expands to
sizeof(arr)/sizeof(int) => 10 * sizeof(int) / sizeof(int) => 10.

145) int DIM(int array[])

{
return sizeof(array)/sizeof(int );
}
main()
{
int arr[10];
printf(“The dimension of the array is %d”, DIM(arr));
}
Answer:
1
Explanation:
Arrays cannot be passed to functions as arguments and only the pointers can be passed. So the
argument is equivalent to int * array (this is one of the very few places where [] and * usage
are equivalent). The return statement becomes, sizeof(int *)/ sizeof(int) that happens to be
equal in this case.

35
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

146) main()
{
static int a[3][3]={1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9};
int i,j;
static *p[]={a,a+1,a+2};
for(i=0;i<3;i++)
{
for(j=0;j<3;j++)
printf("%d\t%d\t%d\t%d\n",*(*(p+i)+j),
*(*(j+p)+i),*(*(i+p)+j),*(*(p+j)+i));
}
}
Answer:
1 1 1 1
2 4 2 4
3 7 3 7
4 2 4 2
5 5 5 5
6 8 6 8
7 3 7 3
8 6 8 6
9 9 9 9
Explanation:
*(*(p+i)+j) is equivalent to p[i][j].

147) main()
{
void swap();
int x=10,y=8;
swap(&x,&y);
printf("x=%d y=%d",x,y);
}
void swap(int *a, int *b)
{
*a ^= *b, *b ^= *a, *a ^= *b;
}
Answer:
x=10 y=8
Explanation:
Using ^ like this is a way to swap two variables without using a temporary variable and that
too in a single statement.
Inside main(), void swap(); means that swap is a function that may take any number of
arguments (not no arguments) and returns nothing. So this doesn’t issue a compiler error by
the call swap(&x,&y); that has two arguments.
This convention is historically due to pre-ANSI style (referred to as Kernighan and Ritchie
style) style of function declaration. In that style, the swap function will be defined as follows,
void swap()
int *a, int *b
{
*a ^= *b, *b ^= *a, *a ^= *b;
}
where the arguments follow the (). So naturally the declaration for swap will look like, void
swap() which means the swap can take any number of arguments.

148) main()
{
int i = 257;
int *iPtr = &i;
printf("%d %d", *((char*)iPtr), *((char*)iPtr+1) );
}
Answer:
11
Explanation:
The integer value 257 is stored in the memory as, 00000001 00000001, so the individual bytes
are taken by casting it to char * and get printed.

36
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

149) main()
{
int i = 258;
int *iPtr = &i;
printf("%d %d", *((char*)iPtr), *((char*)iPtr+1) );
}
Answer:
21
Explanation:
The integer value 257 can be represented in binary as, 00000001 00000001. Remember that
the INTEL machines are ‘small-endian’ machines. Small-endian means that the lower order
bytes are stored in the higher memory addresses and the higher order bytes are stored in
lower addresses. The integer value 258 is stored in memory as: 00000001 00000010.

150) main()
{
int i=300;
char *ptr = &i;
*++ptr=2;
printf("%d",i);
}
Answer:
556
Explanation:
The integer value 300 in binary notation is: 00000001 00101100. It is stored in memory
(small-endian) as: 00101100 00000001. Result of the expression *++ptr = 2 makes the
memory representation as: 00101100 00000010. So the integer corresponding to it is
00000010 00101100 => 556.

151) #include <stdio.h>

main()
{
char * str = "hello";
char * ptr = str;
char least = 127;
while (*ptr++)
least = (*ptr<least ) ?*ptr :least;
printf("%d",least);
}
Answer:
0
Explanation:
After ‘ptr’ reaches the end of the string the value pointed by ‘str’ is ‘\0’. So the value of ‘str’ is
less than that of ‘least’. So the value of ‘least’ finally is 0.

152) Declare an array of N pointers to functions returning pointers to functions returning pointers to
characters?
Answer:
(char*(*)( )) (*ptr[N])( );

153) main()
{
struct student
{
char name[30];
struct date dob;
}stud;
struct date
{
int day,month,year;
};
scanf("%s%d%d%d", stud.rollno, &student.dob.day, &student.dob.month,
&student.dob.year);
}
Answer:
Compiler Error: Undefined structure date

37
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Explanation:
Inside the struct definition of ‘student’ the member of type struct date is given. The compiler
doesn’t have the definition of date structure (forward reference is not allowed in C in this
case) so it issues an error.

154) main()
{
struct date;
struct student
{
char name[30];
struct date dob;
}stud;
struct date
{
int day,month,year;
};
scanf("%s%d%d%d", stud.rollno, &student.dob.day, &student.dob.month, &student.dob.year);
}
Answer:
Compiler Error: Undefined structure date
Explanation:
Only declaration of struct date is available inside the structure definition of ‘student’ but to
have a variable of type struct date the definition of the structure is required.

155) There were 10 records stored in “somefile.dat” but the following program printed 11 names. What went
wrong?
void main()
{
struct student
{
char name[30], rollno[6];
}stud;
FILE *fp = fopen(“somefile.dat”,”r”);
while(!feof(fp))
{
fread(&stud, sizeof(stud), 1 , fp);
puts(stud.name);
}
}
Explanation:
fread reads 10 records and prints the names successfully. It will return EOF only
when fread tries to read another record and fails reading EOF (and returning EOF).
So it prints the last record again. After this only the condition feof(fp) becomes false,
hence comes out of the while loop.

156) Is there any difference between the two declarations,

1. int foo(int *arr[]) and
2. int foo(int *arr[2])
Answer:
No
Explanation:
Functions can only pass pointers and not arrays. The numbers that are allowed inside the [] is
just for more readability. So there is no difference between the two declarations.

157) What is the subtle error in the following code segment?

void fun(int n, int arr[])
{
int *p=0;
int i=0;
while(i++<n)
p = &arr[i];
*p = 0;
}
Answer & Explanation:

38
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

If the body of the loop never executes p is assigned no address. So p remains NULL
where *p =0 may result in problem (may rise to runtime error “NULL pointer
assignment” and terminate the program).

158) What is wrong with the following code?

int *foo()
{
int *s = malloc(sizeof(int)100);
assert(s != NULL);
return s;
}
Answer & Explanation:
assert macro should be used for debugging and finding out bugs. The check s != NULL is for
error/exception handling and for that assert shouldn’t be used. A plain if and the corresponding
remedy statement has to be given.

159) What is the hidden bug with the following statement?

assert(val++ != 0);
Answer & Explanation:
Assert macro is used for debugging and removed in release version. In assert, the experssion
involves side-effects. So the behavior of the code becomes different in case of debug version
and the release version thus leading to a subtle bug.
Rule to Remember:
Don’t use expressions that have side-effects in assert statements.

160) void main()

{
int *i = 0x400; // i points to the address 400
*i = 0; // set the value of memory location pointed by i;
}
Answer:
Undefined behavior
Explanation:
The second statement results in undefined behavior because it points to some location whose
value may not be available for modification. This type of pointer in which the non-availability
of the implementation of the referenced location is known as 'incomplete type'.

161) #define assert(cond) if(!(cond)) \

(fprintf(stderr, "assertion failed: %s, file %s, line %d \n",#cond,\
__FILE__,__LINE__), abort())

void main()
{
int i = 10;
if(i==0)
assert(i < 100);
else
printf("This statement becomes else for if in assert macro");
}
Answer:
No output
Explanation:
The else part in which the printf is there becomes the else for if in the assert macro. Hence nothing is
printed.
The solution is to use conditional operator instead of if statement,
#define assert(cond) ((cond)?(0): (fprintf (stderr, "assertion failed: \ %s, file %s, line %d \n",#cond,
__FILE__,__LINE__), abort()))

Note:
However this problem of “matching with nearest else” cannot be solved by the usual method
of placing the if statement inside a block like this,
#define assert(cond) { \
if(!(cond)) \
(fprintf(stderr, "assertion failed: %s, file %s, line %d \n",#cond,\
__FILE__,__LINE__), abort()) \
}

39
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

162) Is the following code legal?

struct a
{
int x;
struct a b;
}
Answer:
No
Explanation:
Is it not legal for a structure to contain a member that is of the same
type as in this case. Because this will cause the structure declaration to be recursive without
end.

163) Is the following code legal?

struct a
{
int x;
struct a *b;
}
Answer:
Yes.
Explanation:
*b is a pointer to type struct a and so is legal. The compiler knows, the size of the pointer to a
structure even before the size of the structure
is determined(as you know the pointer to any type is of same size). This type of structures is
known as ‘self-referencing’ structure.

164) Is the following code legal?

typedef struct a
{
int x;
aType *b;
}aType
Answer:
No
Explanation:
The typename aType is not known at the point of declaring the structure (forward references
are not made for typedefs).

165) Is the following code legal?

typedef struct a aType;
struct a
{
int x;
aType *b;
};
Answer:
Yes
Explanation:
The typename aType is known at the point of declaring the structure, because it is already
typedefined.

166) Is the following code legal?

void main()
{
typedef struct a aType;
aType someVariable;
struct a
{
int x;
aType *b;
};
}
Answer:
No
Explanation:
When the declaration,

40
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

typedef struct a aType;

is encountered body of struct a is not known. This is known as ‘incomplete types’.

167) void main()

{
printf(“sizeof (void *) = %d \n“, sizeof( void *));
printf(“sizeof (int *) = %d \n”, sizeof(int *));
printf(“sizeof (double *) = %d \n”, sizeof(double *));
printf(“sizeof(struct unknown *) = %d \n”, sizeof(struct unknown *));
}
Answer :
sizeof (void *) = 2
sizeof (int *) = 2
sizeof (double *) = 2
sizeof(struct unknown *) = 2
Explanation:
The pointer to any type is of same size.

168) char inputString[100] = {0};

To get string input from the keyboard which one of the following is better?
1) gets(inputString)
2) fgets(inputString, sizeof(inputString), fp)
Answer & Explanation:
The second one is better because gets(inputString) doesn't know the size of the string passed
and so, if a very big input (here, more than 100 chars) the charactes will be written past the
input string. When fgets is used with stdin performs the same operation as gets but is safe.

169) Which version do you prefer of the following two,

1) printf(“%s”,str); // or the more curt one
2) printf(str);
Answer & Explanation:
Prefer the first one. If the str contains any format characters like %d then it will result in a
subtle bug.

170) void main()

{
int i=10, j=2;
int *ip= &i, *jp = &j;
int k = *ip/*jp;
printf(“%d”,k);
}
Answer:
Compiler Error: “Unexpected end of file in comment started in line 5”.
Explanation:
The programmer intended to divide two integers, but by the “maximum munch” rule,
the compiler treats the operator sequence / and * as /* which happens to be the
starting of comment. To force what is intended by the programmer,
int k = *ip/ *jp;
// give space explicity separating / and *
//or
int k = *ip/(*jp);
// put braces to force the intention
will solve the problem.

171) void main()

{
char ch;
for(ch=0;ch<=127;ch++)
printf(“%c %d \n“, ch, ch);
}
Answer:
Implementaion dependent
Explanation:
The char type may be signed or unsigned by default. If it is signed then ch++ is executed after
ch reaches 127 and rotates back to -128. Thus ch is always smaller than 127.

172) Is this code legal?

41
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

int *ptr;
ptr = (int *) 0x400;
Answer:
Yes
Explanation:
The pointer ptr will point at the integer in the memory location 0x400.

173) main()
{
char a[4]="HELLO";
printf("%s",a);
}
Answer:
Compiler error: Too many initializers
Explanation:
The array a is of size 4 but the string constant requires 6 bytes to get stored.

174) main()
{
char a[4]="HELL";
printf("%s",a);
}
Answer:
HELL%@!~@!@???@~~!
Explanation:
The character array has the memory just enough to hold the string “HELL” and doesnt have
enough space to store the terminating null character. So it prints the HELL correctly and
continues to print garbage values till it accidentally comes across a NULL character.

175) main()
{
int a=10,*j;
void *k;
j=k=&a;
j++;
k++;
printf("\n %u %u ",j,k);
}
Answer:
Compiler error: Cannot increment a void pointer
Explanation:
Void pointers are generic pointers and they can be used only when the type is not known and
as an intermediate address storage type. No pointer arithmetic can be done on it and you
cannot apply indirection operator (*) on void pointers.

176) main()
{
extern int i;
{ int i=20;
{
const volatile unsigned i=30; printf("%d",i);
}
printf("%d",i);
}
printf("%d",i);
}
int i;

177) Printf can be implemented by using __________ list.

Answer:
Variable length argument lists
178) char *someFun()
{
char *temp = “string constant";
return temp;
}
int main()

42
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

{
puts(someFun());
}
Answer:
string constant
Explanation:
The program suffers no problem and gives the output correctly because the character constants are stored
in code/data area and not allocated in stack, so this doesn’t lead to dangling pointers.

179) char *someFun1()

{
char temp[ ] = “string";
return temp;
}
char *someFun2()
{
char temp[ ] = {‘s’, ‘t’,’r’,’i’,’n’,’g’};
return temp;
}
int main()
{
puts(someFun1());
puts(someFun2());
}
Answer:
Garbage values.
Explanation:
Both the functions suffer from the problem of dangling pointers. In someFun1() temp is a character array
and so the space for it is allocated in heap and is initialized with character string “string”. This is created
dynamically as the function is called, so is also deleted dynamically on exiting the function so the string data is not
available in the calling function main() leading to print some garbage values. The function someFun2() also suffers
from the same problem but the problem can be easily identified in this case.

C++ Aptitude and

2 OOPS

++ Aptitude and OOPS

Note : All the programs are tested under Turbo C++ 3.0, 4.5 and Microsoft VC++ 6.0 compilers.
It is assumed that,
 Programs run under Windows environment,
 The underlying machine is an x86 based system,
 Program is compiled using Turbo C/C++ compiler.
The program output may depend on the information based on this assumptions (for example sizeof(int)
== 2 may be assumed).

1) class Sample
{
public:
int *ptr;
Sample(int i)
{
ptr = new int(i);
}
~Sample()
{
delete ptr;
}
void PrintVal()

43
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

{
cout << "The value is " << *ptr;
}
};
void SomeFunc(Sample x)
{
cout << "Say i am in someFunc " << endl;
}
int main()
{
Sample s1= 10;
SomeFunc(s1);
s1.PrintVal();
}
Answer:
Say i am in someFunc
Null pointer assignment(Run-time error)
Explanation:
As the object is passed by value to SomeFunc the destructor of the object is called when the control
returns from the function. So when PrintVal is called it meets up with ptr that has been freed.The solution is to
pass the Sample object by reference to SomeFunc:

void SomeFunc(Sample &x)

{
cout << "Say i am in someFunc " << endl;
}
because when we pass objects by refernece that object is not destroyed. while returning from the function.

2) Which is the parameter that is added to every non-static member function when it is called?
Answer:
‘this’ pointer

3) class base
{
public:
int bval;
base(){ bval=0;}
};

class deri:public base

{
public:
int dval;
deri(){ dval=1;}
};
void SomeFunc(base *arr,int size)
{
for(int i=0; i<size; i++,arr++)
cout<<arr->bval;
cout<<endl;
}

int main()
{
base BaseArr[5];
SomeFunc(BaseArr,5);
deri DeriArr[5];
SomeFunc(DeriArr,5);
}

Answer:
00000
01010
Explanation:
The function SomeFunc expects two arguments.The first one is a pointer to an array of base class objects
and the second one is the sizeof the array.The first call of someFunc calls it with an array of bae objects, so it
works correctly and prints the bval of all the objects. When Somefunc is called the second time the argument

44
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

passed is the pointeer to an array of derived class objects and not the array of base class objects. But that is what
the function expects to be sent. So the derived class pointer is promoted to base class pointer and the address is
sent to the function. SomeFunc() knows nothing about this and just treats the pointer as an array of base class
objects. So when arr++ is met, the size of base class object is taken into consideration and is incremented by
sizeof(int) bytes for bval (the deri class objects have bval and dval as members and so is of size >= sizeof(int)
+sizeof(int) ).

4) class base
{
public:
void baseFun(){ cout<<"from base"<<endl;}
};
class deri:public base
{
public:
void baseFun(){ cout<< "from derived"<<endl;}
};
void SomeFunc(base *baseObj)
{
baseObj->baseFun();
}
int main()
{
base baseObject;
SomeFunc(&baseObject);
deri deriObject;
SomeFunc(&deriObject);
}
Answer:
from base
from base
Explanation:
As we have seen in the previous case, SomeFunc expects a pointer to a base class. Since a pointer to a
derived class object is passed, it treats the argument only as a base class pointer and the corresponding base
function is called.

5) class base
{
public:
virtual void baseFun(){ cout<<"from base"<<endl;}
};
class deri:public base
{
public:
void baseFun(){ cout<< "from derived"<<endl;}
};
void SomeFunc(base *baseObj)
{
baseObj->baseFun();
}
int main()
{
base baseObject;
SomeFunc(&baseObject);
deri deriObject;
SomeFunc(&deriObject);
}
Answer:
from base
from derived
Explanation:
Remember that baseFunc is a virtual function. That means that it supports run-time polymorphism. So
the function corresponding to the derived class object is called.

void main()
{

45
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

int a, *pa, &ra;

pa = &a;
ra = a;
cout <<"a="<<a <<"*pa="<<*pa <<"ra"<<ra ;
}
/*
Answer :
Compiler Error: 'ra',reference must be initialized
Explanation :
Pointers are different from references. One of the main
differences is that the pointers can be both initialized and assigned,
whereas references can only be initialized. So this code issues an error.
*/

const int size = 5;

void print(int *ptr)
{
cout<<ptr[0];
}

void print(int ptr[size])

{
cout<<ptr[0];
}

void main()
{
int a[size] = {1,2,3,4,5};
int *b = new int(size);
print(a);
print(b);
}
/*
Answer:
Compiler Error : function 'void print(int *)' already has a body

Explanation:
Arrays cannot be passed to functions, only pointers (for arrays, base addresses)
can be passed. So the arguments int *ptr and int prt[size] have no difference
as function arguments. In other words, both the functoins have the same signature and
so cannot be overloaded.
*/

class some{
public:
~some()
{
cout<<"some's destructor"<<endl;
}
};

void main()
{
some s;
s.~some();
}
/*
Answer:
some's destructor
some's destructor
Explanation:
Destructors can be called explicitly. Here 's.~some()' explicitly calls the
destructor of 's'. When main() returns, destructor of s is called again,
hence the result.
*/

#include <iostream.h>

46
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

class fig2d
{
int dim1;
int dim2;

public:
fig2d() { dim1=5; dim2=6;}

virtual void operator<<(ostream & rhs);

};

void fig2d::operator<<(ostream &rhs)

{
rhs <<this->dim1<<" "<<this->dim2<<" ";
}

/*class fig3d : public fig2d

{
int dim3;
public:
fig3d() { dim3=7;}
virtual void operator<<(ostream &rhs);
};
void fig3d::operator<<(ostream &rhs)
{
fig2d::operator <<(rhs);
rhs<<this->dim3;
}
*/

void main()
{
fig2d obj1;
// fig3d obj2;

obj1 << cout;

// obj2 << cout;
}
/*
Answer :
56
Explanation:
In this program, the << operator is overloaded with ostream as argument.
This enables the 'cout' to be present at the right-hand-side. Normally, 'cout'
is implemented as global function, but it doesn't mean that 'cout' is not possible
to be overloaded as member function.
Overloading << as virtual member function becomes handy when the class in which
it is overloaded is inherited, and this becomes available to be overrided. This is as opposed
to global friend functions, where friend's are not inherited.
*/

class opOverload{
public:
bool operator==(opOverload temp);
};

bool opOverload::operator==(opOverload temp){

if(*this == temp ){
cout<<"The both are same objects\n";
return true;
}
else{
cout<<"The both are different\n";
return false;
}
}

47
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

void main(){
opOverload a1, a2;
a1= =a2;
}

Answer :
Runtime Error: Stack Overflow
Explanation :
Just like normal functions, operator functions can be called recursively. This program just illustrates that
point, by calling the operator == function recursively, leading to an infinite loop.

class complex{
double re;
double im;
public:
complex() : re(1),im(0.5) {}
bool operator==(complex &rhs);
operator int(){}
};

bool complex::operator == (complex &rhs){

if((this->re == rhs.re) && (this->im == rhs.im))
return true;
else
return false;
}

int main(){
complex c1;
cout<< c1;
}

Answer : Garbage value

Explanation:
The programmer wishes to print the complex object using output
re-direction operator,which he has not defined for his lass.But the compiler instead of giving an error sees the
conversion function
and converts the user defined object to standard object and prints
some garbage value.

class complex{
double re;
double im;
public:
complex() : re(0),im(0) {}
complex(double n) { re=n,im=n;};
complex(int m,int n) { re=m,im=n;}
void print() { cout<<re; cout<<im;}
};

void main(){
complex c3;
double i=5;
c3 = i;
c3.print();
}

Answer:
5,5
Explanation:
Though no operator= function taking complex, double is defined, the double on the rhs is converted into
a temporary object using the single argument constructor taking double and assigned to the lvalue.

48
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

void main()
{
int a, *pa, &ra;
pa = &a;
ra = a;
cout <<"a="<<a <<"*pa="<<*pa <<"ra"<<ra ;
}

Answer :
Compiler Error: 'ra',reference must be initialized
Explanation :
Pointers are different from references. One of the main
differences is that the pointers can be both initialized and assigned,
whereas references can only be initialized. So this code issues an error.

Try it Yourself

1) Determine the output of the 'C++' Codelet.

class base
{
public :
out()
{
cout<<"base ";
}
};
class deri{
public : out()
{
cout<<"deri ";
}
};
void main()
{ deri dp[3];
base *bp = (base*)dp;
for (int i=0; i<3;i++)
(bp++)->out();
}

2) Justify the use of virtual constructors and destructors in C++.

3) Each C++ object possesses the 4 member fns,(which can be declared by the programmer explicitly or by
the implementation if they are not available). What are those 4 functions?

4) What is wrong with this class declaration?

class something
{
char *str;
public:
something(){
st = new char[10]; }
~something()
{
delete str;
}
};

5) Inheritance is also known as -------- relationship. Containership as ________ relationship.

6) When is it necessary to use member-wise initialization list (also known as header initialization list) in C++?

7) Which is the only operator in C++ which can be overloaded but NOT inherited.
= Assignment operator

8) Is there anything wrong with this C++ class declaration?

class temp

49
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

{
int value1;
mutable int value2;
public :
void fun(int val)
const{
((temp*) this)->value1 = 10;
value2 = 10;
}
};

2. What is an accessor?
Answer:An accessor is a class operation that does not modify the state of an object. The accessor functions need to
be declared as const operations

5. Define namespace.
Answer: It is a feature in c++ to minimize name collisions in the global name space. This namespace keyword
assigns a distinct name to a library that allows other libraries to use the same identifier names without creating any
name collisions. Furthermore, the compiler uses the namespace signature for differentiating the definitions.

6. What is the use of ‘using’ declaration.

Answer:A using declaration makes it possible to use a name from a namespace without the scope operator.

7. What is an Iterator class?

Answer: A class that is used to traverse through the objects maintained by a container class. There are five
categories of iterators:
 input iterators,
 output iterators,
 forward iterators,
 bidirectional iterators,
 random access.
An iterator is an entity that gives access to the contents of a container object without violating
encapsulation constraints. Access to the contents is granted on a one-at-a-time basis in order. The order can be
storage order (as in lists and queues) or some arbitrary order (as in array indices) or according to some ordering
relation (as in an ordered binary tree). The iterator is a construct, which provides an interface that, when called,
yields either the next element in the container, or some value denoting the fact that there are no more elements to
examine. Iterators hide the details of access to and update of the elements of a container class.
The simplest and safest iterators are those that permit read-only access to the contents of a container
class. The following code fragment shows how an iterator might appear in code:
cont_iter:=new cont_iterator();
x:=cont_iter.next();
while x/=none do
...
s(x);
...
x:=cont_iter.next();
end;
In this example, cont_iter is the name of the iterator. It is created on the first line by instantiation of
cont_iterator class, an iterator class defined to iterate over some container class, cont. Succesive elements from the
container are carried to x. The loop terminates when x is bound to some empty value. (Here, none)In the middle of
the loop, there is s(x) an operation on x, the current element from the container. The next element of the container
is obtained at the bottom of the loop.

11. What is an incomplete type?

Answer:Incomplete types refers to pointers in which there is non availability of the implementation of the
referenced location or it points to some location whose value is not available for modification.
Example:
int *i=0x400 // i points to address 400
*i=0; //set the value of memory location pointed by i.
Incomplete types are otherwise called uninitialized pointers.

13. Differentiate between the message and method.

Answer:
Message Method
Objects communicate by sending messages Provides response to a message.
to each other.
A message is sent to invoke a method. It is an implementation of an operation.

50
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

15. What is a Null object?

Answer:It is an object of some class whose purpose is to indicate that a real object of that class does not exist. One
common use for a null object is a return value from a member function that is supposed to return an object with
some specified properties but cannot find such an object.

16. What is class invariant?

Answer:A class invariant is a condition that defines all valid states for an object. It is a logical condition to ensure
the correct working of a class. Class invariants must hold when an object is created, and they must be preserved
under all operations of the class. In particular all class invariants are both preconditions and post-conditions for all
operations or member functions of the class.

17. What do you mean by Stack unwinding?

Answer:It is a process during exception handling when the destructor is called for all local objects between the
place where the exception was thrown and where it is caught.

18. Define precondition and post-condition to a member function.

Answer:
Precondition:A precondition is a condition that must be true on entry to a member function. A class is used
correctly if preconditions are never false. An operation is not responsible for doing anything sensible if its
precondition fails to hold.
For example, the interface invariants of stack class say nothing about pushing yet another element on a
stack that is already full. We say that isful() is a precondition of the push operation.

Post-condition:A post-condition is a condition that must be true on exit from a member function if the
precondition was valid on entry to that function. A class is implemented correctly if post-conditions are never
false.
For example, after pushing an element on the stack, we know that isempty() must necessarily hold. This
is a post-condition of the push operation.

19. What are the conditions that have to be met for a condition to be an invariant of the class?
Answer:
 The condition should hold at the end of every constructor.
 The condition should hold at the end of every mutator(non-const) operation.

22. Name the operators that cannot be overloaded.

Answer: sizeof . .* .-> :: ?:

23. What is a node class?

Answer:A node class is a class that,
 relies on the base class for services and implementation,
 provides a wider interface to te users than its base class,
 relies primarily on virtual functions in its public interface
 depends on all its direct and indirect base class
 can be understood only in the context of the base class
 can be used as base for further derivation
 can be used to create objects.
A node class is a class that has added new services or functionality beyond the services inherited from its base
class.

24. What is an orthogonal base class?

Answer:If two base classes have no overlapping methods or data they are said to be independent of, or orthogonal
to each other. Orthogonal in the sense means that two classes operate in different dimensions and do not interfere
with each other in any way. The same derived class may inherit such classes with no difficulty.

25. What is a container class? What are the types of container classes?
Answer:A container class is a class that is used to hold objects in memory or external storage. A container class
acts as a generic holder. A container class has a predefined behavior and a well-known interface. A container class
is a supporting class whose purpose is to hide the topology used for maintaining the list of objects in memory.
When a container class contains a group of mixed objects, the container is called a heterogeneous container; when
the container is holding a group of objects that are all the same, the container is called a homogeneous container.

26. What is a protocol class?

Answer:An abstract class is a protocol class if:
 it neither contains nor inherits from classes that contain member data, non-virtual functions, or private
(or protected) members of any kind.
 it has a non-inline virtual destructor defined with an empty implementation,

51
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

 all member functions other than the destructor including inherited functions, are declared pure virtual
functions and left undefined.

27. What is a mixin class?

Answer:A class that provides some but not all of the implementation for a virtual base class is often called mixin.
Derivation done just for the purpose of redefining the virtual functions in the base classes is often called mixin
inheritance. Mixin classes typically don't share common bases.

28. What is a concrete class?

Answer:A concrete class is used to define a useful object that can be instantiated as an automatic variable on the
program stack. The implementation of a concrete class is defined. The concrete class is not intended to be a base
class and no attempt to minimize dependency on other classes in the implementation or behavior of the class.

29.What is the handle class?

Answer:A handle is a class that maintains a pointer to an object that is programmatically accessible through the
public interface of the handle class.

Explanation:In case of abstract classes, unless one manipulates the objects of these classes through pointers and
references, the benefits of the virtual functions are lost. User code may become dependent on details of
implementation classes because an abstract type cannot be allocated statistically or on the stack without its size
being known. Using pointers or references implies that the burden of memory management falls on the user.
Another limitation of abstract class object is of fixed size. Classes however are used to represent concepts that
require varying amounts of storage to implement them.
A popular technique for dealing with these issues is to separate what is used as a single object in two parts: a
handle providing the user interface and a representation holding all or most of the object's state. The connection
between the handle and the representation is typically a pointer in the handle. Often, handles have a bit more data
than the simple representation pointer, but not much more. Hence the layout of the handle is typically stable, even
when the representation changes and also that handles are small enough to move around relatively freely so that
the user needn’t use the pointers and the references.

30. What is an action class?

Answer:The simplest and most obvious way to specify an action in C++ is to write a function. However, if the
action has to be delayed, has to be transmitted 'elsewhere' before being performed, requires its own data, has to be
combined with other actions, etc then it often becomes attractive to provide the action in the form of a class that
can execute the desired action and provide other services as well. Manipulators used with iostreams is an obvious
example.
Explanation:A common form of action class is a simple class containing just one virtual function.
class Action
{
public:
virtual int do_it( int )=0;
virtual ~Action( );
}
Given this, we can write code say a member that can store actions for later execution without using
pointers to functions, without knowing anything about the objects involved, and without even knowing the name
of the operation it invokes. For example:
class write_file : public Action
{
File& f;
public:
int do_it(int)
{
return fwrite( ).suceed( );
}
};
class error_message: public Action
{
response_box db(message.cstr( ),"Continue","Cancel","Retry");
switch (db.getresponse( ))
{
case 0: return 0;
case 1: abort();
case 2: current_operation.redo( );return 1;
}
};

52
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

A user of the Action class will be completely isolated from any knowledge of derived classes such as
write_file and error_message.

31. When can you tell that a memory leak will occur?
Answer:A memory leak occurs when a program loses the ability to free a block of dynamically allocated memory.

32.What is a parameterized type?

Answer:A template is a parameterized construct or type containing generic code that can use or manipulate any
type. It is called parameterized because an actual type is a parameter of the code body. Polymorphism may be
achieved through parameterized types. This type of polymorphism is called parameteric polymorphism.
Parameteric polymorphism is the mechanism by which the same code is used on different types passed as
parameters.

33. Differentiate between a deep copy and a shallow copy?

Answer:Deep copy involves using the contents of one object to create another instance of the same class. In a deep
copy, the two objects may contain ht same information but the target object will have its own buffers and
resources. the destruction of either object will not affect the remaining object. The overloaded assignment operator
would create a deep copy of objects.
Shallow copy involves copying the contents of one object into another instance of the same class thus
creating a mirror image. Owing to straight copying of references and pointers, the two objects will share the same
externally contained contents of the other object to be unpredictable.
Explanation:Using a copy constructor we simply copy the data values member by member. This method of
copying is called shallow copy. If the object is a simple class, comprised of built in types and no pointers this
would be acceptable. This function would use the values and the objects and its behavior would not be altered with
a shallow copy, only the addresses of pointers that are members are copied and not the value the address is
pointing to. The data values of the object would then be inadvertently altered by the function. When the function
goes out of scope, the copy of the object with all its data is popped off the stack.
If the object has any pointers a deep copy needs to be executed. With the deep copy of an object,
memory is allocated for the object in free store and the elements pointed to are copied. A deep copy is used for
objects that are returned from a function.

34. What is an opaque pointer?

Answer:A pointer is said to be opaque if the definition of the type to which it points to is not included in the
current translation unit. A translation unit is the result of merging an implementation file with all its headers and
header files.

35. What is a smart pointer?

Answer:A smart pointer is an object that acts, looks and feels like a normal pointer but offers more functionality.
In C++, smart pointers are implemented as template classes that encapsulate a pointer and override standard
pointer operators. They have a number of advantages over regular pointers. They are guaranteed to be initialized as
either null pointers or pointers to a heap object. Indirection through a null pointer is checked. No delete is ever
necessary. Objects are automatically freed when the last pointer to them has gone away. One significant problem
with these smart pointers is that unlike regular pointers, they don't respect inheritance. Smart pointers are
unattractive for polymorphic code. Given below is an example for the implementation of smart pointers.
Example:
template <class X>
class smart_pointer
{
public:
smart_pointer(); // makes a null pointer
smart_pointer(const X& x) // makes pointer to copy of x

X& operator *( );
const X& operator*( ) const;
X* operator->() const;

smart_pointer(const smart_pointer <X> &);

const smart_pointer <X> & operator =(const smart_pointer<X>&);
~smart_pointer();
private:
//...
};
This class implement a smart pointer to an object of type X. The object itself is located on the heap. Here is how to
use it:
smart_pointer <employee> p= employee("Harris",1333);
Like other overloaded operators, p will behave like a regular pointer,
cout<<*p;

53
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

p->raise_salary(0.5);

36. What is reflexive association?

Answer: The 'is-a' is called a reflexive association because the reflexive association permits classes to bear the is-a
association not only with their super-classes but also with themselves. It differs from a 'specializes-from' as
'specializes-from' is usually used to describe the association between a super-class and a sub-class. For example:
Printer is-a printer.

37. What is slicing?

Answer:Slicing means that the data added by a subclass are discarded when an object of the subclass is passed or
returned by value or from a function expecting a base class object.
Explanation:
Consider the following class declaration:
class base
{
...
base& operator =(const base&);
base (const base&);
}
void fun( )
{
base e=m;
e=m;
}
As base copy functions don't know anything about the derived only the base part of the derived is copied.
This is commonly referred to as slicing. One reason to pass objects of classes in a hierarchy is to avoid slicing.
Other reasons are to preserve polymorphic behavior and to gain efficiency.

38. What is name mangling?

Answer:
Name mangling is the process through which your c++ compilers give each function in your program a
unique name. In C++, all programs have at-least a few functions with the same name. Name mangling is a
concession to the fact that linker always insists on all function names being unique.
Example:
In general, member names are made unique by concatenating the name of the member with that of the
class e.g. given the declaration:
class Bar
{
public:
int ival;
...
};
ival becomes something like:
// a possible member name mangling
ival__3Bar
Consider this derivation:
class Foo : public Bar
{
public:
int ival;
...
}
The internal representation of a Foo object is the concatenation of its base and derived class members.
// Pseudo C++ code
// Internal representation of Foo
class Foo
{
public:
int ival__3Bar;
int ival__3Foo;
...
};
Unambiguous access of either ival members is achieved through name mangling. Member functions,
because they can be overloaded, require an extensive mangling to provide each with a unique name. Here the
compiler generates the same name for the two overloaded instances(Their argument lists make their instances
unique).

54
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

39. What are proxy objects?

Answer:
Objects that points to other objects are called proxy objects or surrogates. Its an object that provides the
same interface as its server object but does not have any functionality. During a method invocation, it routes data
to the true server object and sends back the return value to the object.

40. Differentiate between declaration and definition in C++.

Answer:
A declaration introduces a name into the program; a definition provides a unique description of an entity
(e.g. type, instance, and function). Declarations can be repeated in a given scope, it introduces a name in a given
scope. There must be exactly one definition of every object, function or class used in a C++ program.
A declaration is a definition unless:
 it declares a function without specifying its body,
 it contains an extern specifier and no initializer or function body,
 it is the declaration of a static class data member without a class definition,
 it is a class name definition,
 it is a typedef declaration.
A definition is a declaration unless:
 it defines a static class data member,
 it defines a non-inline member function.

41. What is cloning?

Answer:
An object can carry out copying in two ways i.e. it can set itself to be a copy of another object, or it can
return a copy of itself. The latter process is called cloning.

42. Describe the main characteristics of static functions.

Answer:
The main characteristics of static functions include,
 It is without the a this pointer,
 It can't directly access the non-static members of its class
 It can't be declared const, volatile or virtual.
 It doesn't need to be invoked through an object of its class, although for convenience, it may.

43. Will the inline function be compiled as the inline function always? Justify.
Answer:
An inline function is a request and not a command. Hence it won't be compiled as an inline function
always.
Explanation:
Inline-expansion could fail if the inline function contains loops, the address of an inline function is used,
or an inline function is called in a complex expression. The rules for inlining are compiler dependent.

44. Define a way other than using the keyword inline to make a function inline.
Answer:
The function must be defined inside the class.

45. How can a '::' operator be used as unary operator?

Answer:
The scope operator can be used to refer to members of the global namespace. Because the global
namespace doesn’t have a name, the notation :: member-name refers to a member of the global namespace. This
can be useful for referring to members of global namespace whose names have been hidden by names declared in
nested local scope. Unless we specify to the compiler in which namespace to search for a declaration, the compiler
simple searches the current scope, and any scopes in which the current scope is nested, to find the declaration for
the name.

46. What is placement new?

Answer:
When you want to call a constructor directly, you use the placement new. Sometimes you have some raw
memory that's already been allocated, and you need to construct an object in the memory you have. Operator new's
special version placement new allows you to do it.
class Widget
{
public :
Widget(int widgetsize);
...
Widget* Construct_widget_int_buffer(void *buffer,int widgetsize)
{

55
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

return new(buffer) Widget(widgetsize);

}
};
This function returns a pointer to a Widget object that's constructed within the buffer passed to the
function. Such a function might be useful for applications using shared memory or memory-mapped I/O, because
objects in such applications must be placed at specific addresses or in memory allocated by special routines.

47.Why does the function arguments are called as "signatures"?

The arguments distinguish functions with the same name (functional polymorphism). The name alone
does not necessarily identify a unique function. However, the name and its arguments (signatures) will uniquely
identify a function.
In real life we see suppose, in class there are two guys with same name, but they can be easily
identified by their signatures. The same concept is applied here.
ex:
class person
{
public:
char getsex();
void setsex(char);
void setsex(int);
};
In the above example we see that there is a function setsex() with same name but with different
signature.

Does a class inherit the constructors of its superclass?

A class does not inherit constructors from any of its super classes.

If a class is declared without any access modifiers, where may the class be accessed?

A class that is declared without any access modifiers is said to have package access. This means that the
class can only be accessed by other classes and interfaces that are defined within the same package.

What is Python and what is scope of Python?

Python is an interpreted, interactive, object-oriented programming language. It is often compared to Tcl,

P e r l, Scheme or Java.

Python combines remarkable power with very clear syntax. It has modules, classes, exceptions, very
high level dynamic data types, and dynamic typing. There are interfaces to many system calls and libraries, as well
as to various windowing systems (X11, Motif, Tk, Mac, MFC, wxWidgets). New built-in modules are easily
written in C or C++. Python is also usable as an extension language for applications that need a programmable
interface.

The Python implementation is portable: it runs on many brands of UNIX, on Windows, OS/2, Mac,
Amiga, and many other platforms.

The Python implementation is copyrighted but freely usable and distributable, even for commercial use.

Scope of Python :

A scope is a textual region of a Python program where a name space is directly accessible. “Directly
accessible'’ here means that an unqualified reference to a name attempts to find the name in the name space.

Although scopes are determined statically, they are used dynamically. At any time during execution,
exactly three nested scopes are in use (i.e., exactly three name spaces are directly accessible): the innermost scope,
which is searched first, contains the local names, the middle scope, searched next, contains the current module’s
global names, and the outermost scope (searched last) is the name space containing built-in names.

Usually, the local scope references the local names of the (textually) current function. Outside of
functions, the local scope references the same name space as the global scope: the module’s name space. Class
definitions place yet another name space in the local scope.

It is important to realize that scopes are determined textually: the global scope of a function defined in a
module is that module’s name space, no matter from where or by what alias the function is called. On the other
hand, the actual search for names is done dynamically, at run time — however, the language definition is evolving

56
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

towards static name resolution, at “compile'’ time, so don’t rely on dynamic name resolution! (In fact, local
variables are already determined statically.)

A special quirk of Python is that assignments always go into the innermost scope. Assignments do not
copy data — they just bind names to objects. The same is true for deletions: the statement “del x” removes the
binding of x from the name space referenced by the local scope. In fact, all operations that introduce new names
use the local scope: in particular, import statements and function definitions bind the module or function name in
the local scope. (The global statement can be used to indicate that particular variables live in the global scope.)

What is the difference between shadow and override?

Overriding is used to redefines only the methods, but shadowing redefines the entire element.

What are inner class and anonymous class?

Inner class : classes defined in other classes, including those defined in methods are called inner classes.
An inner class can have any accessibility including private. Anonymous class : Anonymous class is a class defined
inside a method without a name and is instantiated and declared in the same place and cannot have explicit
constructors.

What is the difference between superclass and subclass?

A super class is a class that is inherited whereas sub class is a class that does the inheriting.

What is difference between overloading and overriding?

a) In overloading, there is a relationship between methods available in the same class whereas in
overriding, there is relationship between a superclass method and subclass method.

b) Overloading does not block inheritance from the superclass whereas overriding blocks inheritance
from the superclass.

c) In overloading, separate methods share the same name whereas in overriding, subclass method
replaces the superclass.

d) Overloading must have different method signatures whereas overriding must have same signature.

How many ways can an argument be passed to a subroutine?

An argument can be passed in two ways. They are Pass by Value and Passing by Reference.

Passing by value: This method copies the value of an argument into the formal parameter of the
subroutine.

Passing by reference: In this method, a reference to an argument (not the value of the argument) is
passed to the parameter.

What is the difference between procedural and object-oriented programs?

1. In procedural program, programming logic follows certain procedures and the instructions are
executed one after another. In OOP program, unit of program is object, which is nothing but combination of data
and code.

2. In procedural program, data is exposed to the whole program whereas in OOPs program, it is
accessible with in the object and which in turn assures the security of the code.

What are the advantages of OOPL?

Object oriented programming languages directly represent the real life objects. The features of OOPL as
inheritance, polymorphism, encapsulation makes it powerful.

Can a method be overloaded based on different return type but same argument type ?

No, because the methods can be called without using their return type in which case there is ambiguity
for the compiler.

What is Downcasting ?

57
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Downcasting is the casting from a general to a more specific type, i.e. casting down the hierarchy.

Who were the three famous amigos and what was their contribution to the object community?

The Three amigos namely,

James Rumbaugh (OMT): A veteran in analysis who came up with an idea about the objects and their
Relationships (in particular Associations).
Grady Booch: A veteran in design who came up with an idea about partitioning of systems into subsystems.
Ivar Jacobson (Objectory): The father of USECASES, who described about the user and system interaction.

Differentiate Aggregation and containment?

Aggregation is the relationship between the whole and a part. We can add/subtract some properties in the
part (slave) side. It won’t affect the whole part.
Best example is Car, which contains the wheels and some extra parts. Even though the parts are not there we can
call it as car.
But, in the case of containment the whole part is affected when the part within that got affected. The human body
is an apt example for this relationship. When the whole body dies the parts (heart etc) are died.

Differentiate persistent & non-persistent objects?

Persistent refers to an object’s ability to transcend time or space. A persistent object stores/saves its state
in a permanent storage system with out losing the information represented by the object.

A non-persistent object is said to be transient or ephemeral. By default objects are considered as non-
persistent.

List out some of the object-oriented methodologies.

Object Oriented Development (OOD) (Booch 1991,1994).

Object Oriented Analysis and Design (OOA/D) (Coad and Yourdon 1991).
Object Modeling Techniques (OMT) (Rumbaugh 1991).
Object Oriented Software Engineering (Objectory) (Jacobson 1992).
Object Oriented Analysis (OOA) (Shlaer and Mellor 1992).
The Fusion Method (Coleman 1991).

When does a name clash occur?

A name clash occurs when a name is defined in more than one place. For example., two different class
libraries could give two different classes the same name. If you try to use many class libraries at the same time,
there is a fair chance that you will be unable to compile or link the program because of name clashes.

Object Oriented : Essentials and History

An object-oriented programming language (also called an OO language) is one that allows or

encourages, to some degree, object-oriented programming methods.

Simula (1967) is generally accepted as the first language to have the primary features of an object-
oriented language. It was created for making simulation programs, in which what came to be called objects were
the most important information representation. Smalltalk (1972 to 1980) is arguably the canonical example, and
the one with which much of the theory of object-oriented programming was developed.

OO languages can be grouped into several broad classes, determined by the extent to which they support
all features and functionality of object-orientation and objects: classes, methods, polymorphism, inheritance, and
reusability.

* Languages called “pure” OO languages, because everything in them is treated consistently as an

object, from primitives such as characters and punctuation, all the way up to whole classes, prototypes, blocks,
modules, etc. They were designed specifically to facilitate, even enforce, OO methods. Examples: Smalltalk,
Eiffel, Ruby.

* Languages designed mainly for OO programming, but with some procedural

elements. Examples: Java, Python.

* Languages that are historically procedural languages, but have been extended with some OO features.
Examples: C++, Fortran 2003, Perl.

58
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

* Languages with most of the features of objects (classes, methods, inheritance, reusability), but in a
distinctly original, even elegant, form. Examples: Oberon, and successor Oberon-2.

* Languages with abstract data type support, but not all features of object-orientation, sometimes called
object-based languages. Examples: Modula-2 (with excellent encapsulation and information hiding), Pliant.

Inheritance and polymorphism are usually used to reduce code bloat. Abstraction and encapsulation are
used to increase code clarity, quite independent of the other two traits.

What is a dangling pointer?

A dangling pointer arises when you use the address of an object after
its lifetime is over. This may occur in situations like returning
addresses of the automatic variables from a function or using the
address of the memory block after it is freed. The following
code snippet shows this:

class Sample
{
public:
int *ptr;
Sample(int i)
{
ptr = new int(i);
}

~Sample()
{
delete ptr;
}
void PrintVal()
{
cout << "The value is " << *ptr;
}
};

void SomeFunc(Sample x)
{
cout << "Say i am in someFunc " << endl;
}

int main()
{
Sample s1 = 10;
SomeFunc(s1);
s1.PrintVal();
}

In the above example when PrintVal() function is

called it is called by the pointer that has been freed by the
destructor in SomeFunc.

Differentiate between a template class and class template.

Template class: A generic definition or a parameterized class not

instantiated until the client provides the needed information. It’s
jargon for plain templates.

Class template: A class template specifies

How individual classes can be constructed much like the way a class
specifies how individual objects can be constructed. It’s jargon for
plain classes.

What is a modifier?

59
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

A modifier, also called a modifying function is a member function that changes the value of at least one
data member. In other words, an operation that modifies the state of an object. Modifiers are also known as
‘mutators’. Example: The function mod is a modifier in the following code snippet:

class test
{
int x,y;
public:
test()
{
x=0; y=0;
}
void mod()
{
x=10;
y=15;
}
};

What do u meant by “SBI” of an object?

SBI stands for State, Behavior and Identity. Since every object has the above three.

State: It is just a value to the attribute of an object at a particular time.

Behaviour:It describes the actions and their reactions of that object.Identity:

An object has an identity that characterizes its own existence. The identity makes it possible to
distinguish any object in an unambiguous way, and independently from its state.

Differentiate the class representation of Booch, Rumbaugh and UML?

If you look at the class representation of Rumbaugh and UML, It is some what similar and both are very
easy to draw.

Whether unified method and unified modeling language are same or different?

Unified method is convergence of the Rumbaugh and Booch. Unified modeling lang. is the fusion of
Rumbaugh, Booch and Jacobson as well as Betrand Meyer (whose contribution is “sequence diagram”). Its’ the
superset of all the methodologies.

What is meant by “method-wars”?

Before 1994 there were different methodologies like Rumbaugh, Booch, Jacobson, Meyer etc who
followed their own notations to model the systems. The developers were in a dilemma to choose the method which
best accomplishes their needs. This particular span was called as “method-wars”

Why generalization is very strong?

Even though Generalization satisfies Structural, Interface, Behaviour properties. It is mathematically

very strong, as it is Antisymmetric and Transitive. Antisymmetric: employee is a person, but not all persons are
employees. Mathematically all As’ are B, but all Bs’ not A.

What do you meant by static and dynamic modeling?

Static modeling is used to specify structure of the objects that exist in the problem domain. These are
expressed using class, object and USECASE diagrams. But Dynamic modeling refers representing the object
interactions during runtime. It is represented by sequence, activity, collaboration and statechart diagrams

What is meant by software development method?

Software development method describes how to model and build software systems in a reliable and
reproducible way. To put it simple, methods that are used to represent ones’ thinking using graphical notations.

What do you meant by active and passive objects?

Active objects are one which instigate an interaction which owns a thread and they are responsible for
handling control to other objects. In simple words it can be referred as client.

60
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Passive objects are one, which passively waits for the message to be processed. It waits for another
object that requires its services. In simple words it can be referred as server.

Differentiate persistent & non-persistent objects?

Persistent refers to an object’s ability to transcend time or space. A persistent object stores/saves its state
in a permanent storage system with out losing the information represented by the object.

A non-persistent object is said to be transient or ephemeral. By default objects are considered as non-
persistent.

What are the steps involved in designing?

Before getting into the design the designer should go through the SRS prepared by the System Analyst.
The main tasks of design are Architectural Design and Detailed Design. In Architectural Design we find what are
the main modules in the problem domains Detailed Design we find what should be done within each module.

What do you mean by analysis and design?

Analysis: It is the process of determining what needs to be done before how it should be done. In order
to accomplish this, the developer refers the existing systems and documents. So, simply it is an art of discovery.

Design:It is the process of adopting/choosing the one among the many, which best accomplishes the
users needs. So, simply, it is compromising mechanism.

Question: What is the difference between Big C++ and Computing Concepts with C++ Essentials?
Answer:

The first 16 chapters, and the chapter on GUI programming (chapter 27 of Big C++ = chapter 18 of C++
Essentials) are identical.

Big C++ has expanded C++ coverage on operator overloading, memory management, exception
handling, name scope management, polymorphism, multiple inheritance, templates, and STL (8 chapters). C++
Essentials has a one-chapter summary that briefly discusses operator overloading, exception handling, name scope
management, and templates.

Big C++ has chapters on UML, design patterns, database programming, and XML. (The XML chapter is
available on the web.)

Question: What are the differences between the second and third edition of Computing Concepts
with C++ Essentials?
Answer:

The coverage of the third edition is more object-oriented, with class design appearing earlier and a
chapter on OO design Recursion is now covered in a separate chapter The chapter on data structures has expanded
coverage of STL There are new chapters on advanced C++ topics and GUI programming There is expanded
coverage of pointers and C-style arrays

Question: Which compiler should I use?

Answer: The following compilers should work:

g++ version 2.95 and later

Borland C++ 5.5 and later

Microsoft Visual C++ 6 and later. (If you use Visual C++ 6, be sure to install the latest patches after
installing from the CD ROM. The CD ROM version is very buggy.)

The following compilers will definitely not work:

Microsoft Visual C++ 5 or earlier

Turbo C++

Borland C++ 4 or earlier

Question: Why do I get an error message: "std does not exist or is not a namespace"?

61
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Answer: Your compiler (Microsoft Visual C++ 6) does not conform to the C++ standard. A remedy is to
add a line namespace std {}above the using namespace std; directive.

Question: Why do I get an error message: "redefinition: multiple initialization" when I have two separate
for loops with the same index variable?

Answer: Your compiler (Microsoft Visual C++ 6) does not conform to the C++ standard. A remedy is to
rename the index variable in the second loop.

Question: Why do I get an error message: "max undefined" even though I include the <algorithm> header?

Answer: Your compiler (Microsoft Visual C++ 6 or g++ 2.9x) does not conform to the C++ standard. A
remedy is to add the line
double max(double x, double y) { if (x > y) return x; else return y; }

Question: Why do the matrix1.cpp and matrix2.cpp programs not compile?

Answer: Your compiler (Microsoft Visual C++) does not conform to the C++ standard. A remedy is to
replace

   static const int ROWS = 3;

   static const int COLUMNS = 3; with enum { ROWS = 3, COLUMNS = 3 };

Question: Why do I get an error message: "no sstream header"?

Answer: Your compiler (g++ 2.9x) does not conform to the C++ standard. A remedy is to change

#include <sstream>
...
istringstream instr(s);
...
ostringstream outstr;
...
s = outstr.str();

to
#include <strstream>
...
istrstream instr(s.c_str())
...
ostrstream outstr;
...
s = string(outstr.str());

Question: Why do I get an error message: "fixed undefined" even though I include the <iomanip> header?

Answer: Your compiler (g++ 2.9x) does not conform to the C++ standard. A remedy is to replace fixed
with setiosflags(ios::fixed)

Question: Why do you teach doubly-linked lists in the chapter on data structures? Aren't singly linked lists
easier?

Answer: (1) STL uses doubly-linked lists. (2) It is actually easier to implement insertion and deletion in
a doubly-linked list.
Question: Why doesn't the book teach more about char* strings? Doesn't every C++ programmer need to
know them?

Answer:

This is a book about computing concepts, not about C++. Strings are a concept. ANSI C++ supports two
implementations of strings: the string class and char* pointers. There is no doubt that many C++ programmers will
need to learn both implementations, but I do not believe they should learn all details of both of them in their first
programming course. The string class is safe and convenient. Students master it quickly and can move on to
learning more computing concepts.

62
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Question: My compiler doesn't support #include <iostream> and using namespace std. What is happening?

Answer: The <iostream> header and the std namespace were introduced in 1996 and approved in the
international standard in 1998. If your compiler does not support these constructs, you will need to upgrade your
compiler. g++, Borland C++ 5.5 and Microsoft Visual C++ 6 are reasonably standard compliant.

Question: What platforms does the CCC graphics library support?

Answer: Here is a list of currently supported platforms.

Any system, with "ASCII art" (#define CCC_ASC)
Windows 95/NT (i.e. 32-bit Windows)
Unix with X11 (uses Xlib only and runs with any window manager)
Any system that runs wxWidgets

Question: I'd like to display color, but all your shapes show up in black only.

Answer: The CCC graphics library has been purposefully kept simple so that students don't fritter away
endless time with color and fancy fonts. Use wxWidgets if you want fancier graphics

Question: Why do you call an accessors get_seconds() instead of just seconds()?

Answer: There are many different schemes to name accessors, mutators and data fields. The C++ library
uses overloaded pairsseconds() and seconds(int) for accessors and mutators, which I think is a bit too confusing. I
felt the get/set terminology makes it really clear that the accessor is a function call. And, of course, that is the
convention used in Java.

Question: Why do you use all those underscores in function names? What is wrong with mixed case?

Answer: The standard C++ library uses no uppercase letters at all, and it uses underscores to make names more
readable (bad_cast, push_back). There is nothing wrong with mixed case (getSeconds, readInt); I just wanted to be
consistent.

Quatitative
3 Ability
titative Aptitude
Exercise 1
Solve the following and check with the answers given at the end.

1. It was calculated that 75 men could complete a piece of work in 20 days. When work was scheduled to
commence, it was found necessary to send 25 men to another project. How much longer will it take to
complete the work?

2. A student divided a number by 2/3 when he required to multiply by 3/2. Calculate the percentage of error
in his result.

3. A dishonest shopkeeper professes to sell pulses at the cost price, but he uses a false weight of 950gm. for
a kg. His gain is …%.

4. A software engineer has the capability of thinking 100 lines of code in five minutes and can type 100
lines of code in 10 minutes. He takes a break for five minutes after every ten minutes. How many lines
of codes will he complete typing after an hour?

5. A man was engaged on a job for 30 days on the condition that he would get a wage of Rs. 10 for the day
he works, but he have to pay a fine of Rs. 2 for each day of his absence. If he gets Rs. 216 at the end, he
was absent for work for ... days.

63
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

6. A contractor agreeing to finish a work in 150 days, employed 75 men each working 8 hours daily. After
90 days, only 2/7 of the work was completed. Increasing the number of men by ________ each working
now for 10 hours daily, the work can be completed in time.

7. what is a percent of b divided by b percent of a?

(a) a (b) b (c) 1 (d) 10 (d) 100

8. A man bought a horse and a cart. If he sold the horse at 10 % loss and the cart at 20 % gain, he would
not lose anything; but if he sold the horse at 5% loss and the cart at 5% gain, he would lose Rs. 10 in the
bargain. The amount paid by him was Rs._______ for the horse and Rs.________ for the cart.

9. A tennis marker is trying to put together a team of four players for a tennis tournament out of seven
available. males - a, b and c; females – m, n, o and p. All players are of equal ability and there must be at
least two males in the team. For a team of four, all players must be able to play with each other under the
following restrictions:
b should not play with m,
c should not play with p, and
a should not play with o.
Which of the following statements must be false?
1. b and p cannot be selected together
2. c and o cannot be selected together
3. c and n cannot be selected together.

10-12. The following figure depicts three views of a cube. Based on this, answer questions 10-12.

6 5 4

1 22 3 6

2 2 3
10. The number on the face opposite to the face carrying 1 is _______ .

11. The number on the faces adjacent to the face marked 5 are _______ .

12. Which of the following pairs does not correctly give the numbers on the opposite faces.
(1) 6,5 (2) 4,1 (3) 1,3 (4) 4,2

13. Five farmers have 7, 9, 11, 13 & 14 apple trees, respectively in their orchards. Last year, each of them
discovered that every tree in their own orchard bore exactly the same number of apples. Further, if the
third farmer gives one apple to the first, and the fifth gives three to each of the second and the fourth,
they would all have exactly the same number of apples. What were the yields per tree in the orchards of
the third and fourth farmers?

14. Five boys were climbing a hill. J was following H. R was just ahead of G. K was between G & H. They
were climbing up in a column. Who was the second?

15-18 John is undecided which of the four novels to buy. He is considering a spy
thriller, a Murder mystery, a Gothic romance and a science fiction novel. The books are written by
Rothko, Gorky, Burchfield and Hopper, not necessary in that order, and published by Heron, Piegon,
Blueja and sparrow, not necessary in that order.
1 (1) The book by Rothko is published by Sparrow.
2 (2) The Spy thriller is published by Heron.
(3) The science fiction novel is by Burchfield and is not published by Blueja.
3 (4)The Gothic romance is by Hopper.
4
15. Pigeon publishes ____________.

16. The novel by Gorky ________________.

17. John purchases books by the authors whose names come first and third in alphabetical order. He does not
buy the books ______.

18. On the basis of the first paragraph and statement (2), (3) and (4) only, it is possible to deduce that
1. Rothko wrote the murder mystery or the spy thriller
2. Sparrow published the murder mystery or the spy thriller
3. The book by Burchfield is published by Sparrow.

64
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

19. If a light flashes every 6 seconds, how many times will it flash in ¾ of an hour?

20. If point P is on line segment AB, then which of the following is always true?
(1) AP = PB (2) AP > PB (3) PB > AP (4) AB > AP (5) AB > AP + PB

21. All men are vertebrates. Some mammals are vertebrates. Which of the following conclusions drawn
from the above statement is correct.
All men are mammals
All mammals are men
Some vertebrates are mammals.
None

22. Which of the following statements drawn from the given statements are correct?
Given:
All watches sold in that shop are of high standard. Some of the HMT watches are sold in that shop.
a) All watches of high standard were manufactured by HMT.
b) Some of the HMT watches are of high standard.
c) None of the HMT watches is of high standard.
d) Some of the HMT watches of high standard are sold in that shop.

23-27.
1. Ashland is north of East Liverpool and west of Coshocton.
2. Bowling green is north of Ashland and west of Fredericktown.
3. Dover is south and east of Ashland.
4. East Liverpool is north of Fredericktown and east of Dover.
5. Fredericktown is north of Dover and west of Ashland.
6. Coshocton is south of Fredericktown and west of Dover.

23. Which of the towns mentioned is furthest of the north – west

(a) Ashland (b) Bowling green (c) Coshocton
(d) East Liverpool (e) Fredericktown

24. Which of the following must be both north and east of Fredericktown?
(a) Ashland (b) Coshocton (c) East Liverpool
I a only II b only III c only IV a & b V a & c

25. Which of the following towns must be situated both south and west of at least one other town?
A. Ashland only
B. Ashland and Fredericktown
C. Dover and Fredericktown
D. Dover, Coshocton and Fredericktown
E. Coshocton, Dover and East Liverpool.

26. Which of the following statements, if true, would make the information in the numbered statements more
specific?
(a) Coshocton is north of Dover.
(b) East Liverpool is north of Dover
(c) Ashland is east of Bowling green.
(d) Coshocton is east of Fredericktown
(e) Bowling green is north of Fredericktown

27. Which of the numbered statements gives information that can be deduced from one or more of the other
statements?
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 (E) 6

28. Eight friends Harsha, Fakis, Balaji, Eswar, Dhinesh, Chandra, Geetha, and Ahmed are sitting in a circle
facing the center. Balaji is sitting between Geetha and Dhinesh. Harsha is third to the left of Balaji and
second to the right of Ahmed. Chandra is sitting between Ahmed and Geetha and Balaji and Eshwar are
not sitting opposite to each other. Who is third to the left of Dhinesh?

29. If every alternative letter starting from B of the English alphabet is written in small letter, rest all are
written in capital letters, how the month “ September” be written.
(1) SeptEMbEr (2) SEpTeMBEr (3) SeptembeR
(4) SepteMber (5) None of the above.

65
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

30. The length of the side of a square is represented by x+2. The length of the side of an equilateral triangle
is 2x. If the square and the equilateral triangle have equal perimeter, then the value of x is _______.

31. It takes Mr. Karthik y hours to complete typing a manuscript. After 2 hours, he was called away. What
fractional part of the assignment was left incomplete?

32. Which of the following is larger than 3/5?

(1) ½ (2) 39/50 (3) 7/25 (4) 3/10 (5) 59/100

33. The number that does not have a reciprocal is ____________.

34. There are 3 persons Sudhir, Arvind, and Gauri. Sudhir lent cars to Arvind and Gauri as many as they had
already. After some time Arvind gave as many cars to Sudhir and Gauri as many as they have. After
sometime Gauri did the same thing. At the end of this transaction each one of them had 24. Find the cars
each originally had.

35. A man bought a horse and a cart. If he sold the horse at 10 % loss and the cart at 20 % gain, he would
not lose anything; but if he sold the horse at 5% loss and the cart at 5% gain, he would lose Rs. 10 in the
bargain. The amount paid by him was Rs._______ for the horse and Rs.________ for the cart.

Answers:

1. Answer:
30 days.
Explanation:
Before:
One day work = 1 / 20
One man’s one day work = 1 / ( 20 * 75)
Now:
No. Of workers = 50
One day work = 50 * 1 / ( 20 * 75)

The total no. of days required to complete the work = (75 * 20) / 50 = 30

2. Answer:
0%
Explanation:
Since 3x / 2 = x / (2 / 3)

3. Answer:
5.3 %
Explanation:
He sells 950 grams of pulses and gains 50 grams.
If he sells 100 grams of pulses then he will gain (50 / 950) *100 = 5.26

4. Answer:
250 lines of codes

5. Answer:
7 days
Explanation:
The equation portraying the given problem is:
10 * x – 2 * (30 – x) = 216 where x is the number of working days.
Solving this we get x = 23
Number of days he was absent was 7 (30-23) days.

6. Answer:
150 men.
Explanation:
One day’s work = 2 / (7 * 90)
One hour’s work = 2 / (7 * 90 * 8)
One man’s work = 2 / (7 * 90 * 8 * 75)

The remaining work (5/7) has to be completed within 60 days, because the total number of
days allotted for the project is 150 days.

So we get the equation

66
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

(2 * 10 * x * 60) / (7 * 90 * 8 * 75) = 5/7 where x is the number of men working after the
90th day.

We get x = 225
Since we have 75 men already, it is enough to add only 150 men.

7. Answer:
(c) 1
Explanation:
a percent of b : (a/100) * b
b percent of a : (b/100) * a
a percent of b divided by b percent of a : ((a / 100 )*b) / (b/100) * a )) = 1

8. Answer:
Cost price of horse = Rs. 400 & the cost price of cart = 200.
Explanation:-
Let x be the cost price of the horse and y be the cost price of the cart.
In the first sale there is no loss or profit. (i.e.) The loss obtained is equal to the gain.

Therefore(10/100) * x = (20/100) * y

X = 2 * y -----------------(1)
In the second sale, he lost Rs. 10. (i.e.) The loss is greater than the profit by Rs. 10.

Therefore(5 / 100) * x = (5 / 100) * y + 10 -------(2)

Substituting (1) in (2) we get
(10 / 100) * y = (5 / 100) * y + 10
(5 / 100) * y = 10
y = 200
From (1) 2 * 200 = x = 400

9. Answer:
3.
Explanation:
Since inclusion of any male player will reject a female from the team. Since there should be
four member in the team and only three males are available, the girl, n should included in the team
always irrespective of others selection.

10. Answer:
5

11. Answer:
1,2,3 & 4

12. Answer:
B

13. Answer:
11 & 9 apples per tree.
Explanation:
Let a, b, c, d & e be the total number of apples bored per year in A, B, C, D & E ‘s orchard.
Given that a+1=b+3=c–1=d+3=e–6
But the question is to find the number of apples bored per tree in C and D ‘s orchard. If is enough to
consider c – 1 = d + 3.
Since the number of trees in C’s orchard is 11 and that of D’s orchard is 13. Let x and y be the
number of apples bored per tree in C & d ‘s orchard respectively.
Therefore 11 x – 1 = 13 y + 3
By trial and error method, we get the value for x and y as 11 and 9

14. Answer:
G.
Explanation:
The order in which they are climbing is R – G – K – H – J

15 – 18
Answer:

67
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Novel Name Author Publisher

Spy thriller Rathko Heron
Murder mystery Gorky Piegon
Gothic romance Burchfield Blueja
Science fiction Hopper Sparrow

Explanation:
Given
Novel Name Author Publisher
Spy thriller Rathko Heron
Murder mystery Gorky Piegon
Gothic romance Burchfield Blueja
Science fiction Hopper Sparrow

Since Blueja doesn’t publish the novel by Burchfield and Heron publishes the novel spy
thriller, Piegon publishes the novel by Burchfield.
Since Hopper writes Gothic romance and Heron publishes the novel spy thriller, Blueja
publishes the novel by Hopper.
Since Heron publishes the novel spy thriller and Heron publishes the novel by Gorky, Gorky
writes Spy thriller and Rathko writes Murder mystery.

19. Answer:
451 times.
Explanation:
There are 60 minutes in an hour.
In ¾ of an hour there are (60 * ¾) minutes = 45 minutes.
In ¾ of an hour there are (60 * 45) seconds = 2700 seconds.
Light flashed for every 6 seconds.
In 2700 seconds 2700/6 = 450 times.
The count start after the first flash, the light will flashes 451 times in ¾ of an hour.

20. Answer:
(4)
Explanation:
P
A B
Since p is a point on the line segment AB, AB > AP

21. Answer: (c)

22. Answer: (b) & (d).

Ahmed
23 - 27.Answer:
Fakis Chandra
28. Answer: Fakis
Explanation: Harsha Geetha

Eswar Balaji

Dhinesh

29. Answer:
(5).
Explanation:
Since every alternative letter starting from B of the English alphabet is written in small letter,
the letters written in small letter are b, d, f...
In the first two answers the letter E is written in both small & capital letters, so they are not the
correct answers. But in third and fourth answers the letter is written in small letter instead capital letter,
so they are not the answers.

68
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

30. Answer:
x=4
Explanation:
Since the side of the square is x + 2, its perimeter = 4 (x + 2) = 4x + 8
Since the side of the equilateral triangle is 2x, its perimeter = 3 * 2x = 6x
Also, the perimeters of both are equal.
(i.e.) 4x + 8 = 6x
(i.e.) 2x = 8  x = 4.

31. Answer:
5 (y – 2) / y.
Explanation:
To type a manuscript karthik took y hours.
Therefore his speed in typing = 1/y.
He was called away after 2 hours of typing.
Therefore the work completed = 1/y * 2.
Therefore the remaining work to be completed = 1 – 2/y.
(i.e.) work to be completed = (y-2)/y

32. Answer:
(2)

33. Answer:
1
Explanation:
One is the only number exists without reciprocal because the reciprocal of one is one itself.

34. Answer:
Sudhir had 39 cars, Arvind had 21 cars and Gauri had 12 cars.
Explanation:
Sudhir Arvind Gauri

Finally 24 24 24
Before Gauri’s transaction 12 12 48
Before Arvind’s transaction 6 42 24
Before Sudhir’ s transaction 39 21 12

35. Answer:
Cost price of horse: Rs. 400 &
Cost price of cart: Rs. 200
Explanation:
Let x be the cost of horse & y be the cost of the cart.
10 % of loss in selling horse = 20 % of gain in selling the cart
Therefore(10 / 100) * x = (20 * 100) * y
 x = 2y -----------(1)
5 % of loss in selling the horse is 10 more than the 5 % gain in selling the cart.
Therefore (5 / 100) * x - 10 = (5 / 100) * y
 5x - 1000 = 5y
Substituting (1)
10y - 1000 = 5y
5y = 1000
y = 200
x = 400 from (1)

Exercise 2.1
For the following, find the next term in the series

1. 6, 24, 60,120, 210

a) 336 b) 366 c) 330 d) 660

Answer : a) 336
Explanation : The series is 1.2.3, 2.3.4, 3.4.5, 4.5.6, 5.6.7, ..... ( '.' means product)

2. 1, 5, 13, 25

Answer : 41

69
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Explanation : The series is of the form 0^2+1^2, 1^2+2^2,...

3. 0, 5, 8, 17

Answer : 24
Explanation : 1^2-1, 2^2+1, 3^2-1, 4^2+1, 5^2-1

4. 1, 8, 9, 64, 25 (Hint : Every successive terms are related)

Answer : 216
Explanation : 1^2, 2^3, 3^2, 4^3, 5^2, 6^3

5. 8,24,12,36,18,54

Answer : 27

6. 71,76,69,74,67,72
Answer : 67

7. 5,9,16,29,54
Answer : 103
Explanation : 5*2-1=9; 9*2-2=16; 16*2-3=29; 29*2-4=54; 54*2-5=103

8. 1,2,4,10,16,40,64 (Successive terms are related)

Answer : 200
Explanation : The series is powers of 2 (2^0,2^1,..).
All digits are less than 8. Every second number is in octal number system.
128 should follow 64. 128 base 10 = 200 base 8.

Exercise 2.2

Find the odd man out.

1. 3,5,7,12,13,17,19
Answer : 12
Explanation : All but 12 are odd numbers

2. 2,5,10,17,26,37,50,64
Answer : 64
Explanation : 2+3=5; 5+5=10; 10+7=17; 17+9=26; 26+11=37; 37+13=50; 50+15=65;

3. 105,85,60,30,0,-45,-90
Answer : 0
Explanation : 105-20=85; 85-25=60; 60-30=30; 30-35=-5; -5-40=-45; -45-45=-90;

Exercise 3
Solve the following.

1. What is the number of zeros at the end of the product of the numbers from 1 to 100?
Answer : 127
2. A fast typist can type some matter in 2 hours and a slow typist can type the same in 3 hours. If both type
combinely, in how much time will they finish?
Answer : 1 hr 12 min
Explanation : The fast typist's work done in 1 hr = 1/2
The slow typist's work done in 1 hr = 1/3
If they work combinely, work done in 1 hr = 1/2+1/3 = 5/6
So, the work will be completed in 6/5 hours. i.e., 1+1/5 hours = 1hr 12 min

3. Gavaskar's average in his first 50 innings was 50. After the 51st innings, his average was 51. How many runs
did he score in his 51st innings. (supposing that he lost his wicket in his 51st innings)
Answer : 101
Explanation : Total score after 50 innings = 50*50 = 2500
Total score after 51 innings = 51*51 = 2601
So, runs made in the 51st innings = 2601-2500 = 101
If he had not lost his wicket in his 51st innings, he would have scored an unbeaten 50 in his
51st innings.

70
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

4. Out of 80 coins, one is counterfeit. What is the minimum number of weighings needed to find out the counterfeit
coin?
Answer : 4

5. What can you conclude from the statement : All green are blue, all blue are red. ?
(i) some blue are green
(ii) some red are green
(iii) some green are not red
(iv) all red are blue
(a) i or ii but not both
(b) i & ii only
(c) iii or iv but not both
(d) iii & iv

Answer : (b)

6. A rectangular plate with length 8 inches, breadth 11 inches and thickness 2 inches is available. What is the
length of the circular rod with diameter 8 inches and equal to the volume of the rectangular plate?
Answer : 3.5 inches
Explanation : Volume of the circular rod (cylinder) = Volume of the rectangular plate
(22/7)*4*4*h = 8*11*2
h = 7/2 = 3.5

7. What is the sum of all numbers between 100 and 1000 which are divisible by 14 ?
Answer : 35392
Explanation : The number closest to 100 which is greater than 100 and divisible by 14 is 112, which is
the first term of the series which has to be summed.
The number closest to 1000 which is less than 1000 and divisible by 14 is 994, which is the last
term of the series.
112 + 126 + .... + 994 = 14(8+9+ ... + 71) = 35392

8. If s(a) denotes square root of a, find the value of s(12+s(12+s(12+ ...... upto infinity.
Answer : 4
Explanation : Let x = s(12+s(12+s(12+.....
We can write x = s(12+x). i.e., x^2 = 12 + x. Solving this quadratic equation, we get x = -3 or x=4. Sum
cannot be -ve and hence sum = 4.

9. A cylindrical container has a radius of eight inches with a height of three inches. Compute how many inches
should be added to either the radius or height to give the same increase in volume?
Answer : 16/3 inches
Explanation : Let x be the amount of increase. The volume will increase by the same amount if the
radius increased or the height is increased.
So, the effect on increasing height is equal to the effect on increasing the radius.
i.e., (22/7)*8*8*(3+x) = (22/7)*(8+x)*(8+x)*3
Solving the quadratic equation we get the x = 0 or 16/3. The possible increase would be by 16/3 inches.

10. With just six weights and a balance scale, you can weigh any unit number of kgs from 1 to 364. What could be
the six weights?
Answer : 1, 3, 9, 27, 81, 243 (All powers of 3)

11. Diophantus passed one sixth of his life in childhood, one twelfth in youth, and one seventh more as a bachelor;
five years after his marriage a son was born who died four years before his father at half his final age. How old is
Diophantus?
Answer : 84 years
Explanation : x/6 + x/12 + x/7 + 5 + x/2 + 4 = x

12 . If time at this moment is 9 P.M., what will be the time 23999999992 hours later?
Answer : 1 P.M.
Explanation : 24 billion hours later, it would be 9 P.M. and 8 hours before that it would be 1 P.M.

13. How big will an angle of one and a half degree look through a glass that magnifies things three times?
Answer : 1 1/2 degrees
Explanation : The magnifying glass cannot increase the magnitude of an angle.

14. Divide 45 into four parts such that when 2 is added to the first part, 2 is subtracted from the second part, 2 is
multiplied by the third part and the fourth part is divided by two, all result in the same number.

71
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Answer: 8, 12, 5, 20
Explanation: a + b + c + d =45; a+2 = b-2 = 2c = d/2; a=b-4; c = (b-2)/2; d = 2(b-2);
b-4 + b + (b-2)/2 + 2(b-2) = 45;

15. I drove 60 km at 30 kmph and then an additional 60 km at 50 kmph. Compute my average speed over my 120
km.
Answer : 37 1/2
Explanation : Time reqd for the first 60 km = 120 min.; Time reqd for the second 60 km = 72 min.;
Total time reqd = 192 min
Avg speed = (60*120)/192 = 37 1/2

Questions 16 and 17 are based on the following :

Five executives of European Corporation hold a Conference in Rome
Mr. A converses in Spanish & Italian
Mr. B, a spaniard, knows English also
Mr. C knows English and belongs to Italy
Mr. D converses in French and Spanish
Mr. E , a native of Italy knows French

16. Which of the following can act as interpreter if Mr. C & Mr. D wish to converse
a) only Mr. A b) Only Mr. B c) Mr. A & Mr. B d) Any of the other three

Answer : d) Any of the other three.

Explanation : From the data given, we can infer the following.
A knows Spanish, Italian
B knows Spanish, English
C knows Italian, English
D knows Spanish, French
E knows Italian, French
To act as an interpreter between C and D, a person has to know one of the combinations
Italian&Spanish, Italian&French, English&Spanish, English&French
A, B, and E know atleast one of the combinations.

17. If a 6th executive is brought in, to be understood by maximum number of original five he should be fluent in
a) English & French b) Italian & Spanish c) English & French d) French &
Italian
Answer : b) Italian & Spanish
Explanation : No of executives who know
i) English is 2
ii) Spanish is 3
iii) Italian is 3
iv) French is 2
Italian & Spanish are spoken by the maximum no of executives. So, if the 6th executive is fluent in Italian &
Spanish, he can communicate with all the original five because everybody knows either Spanish or Italian.

18. What is the sum of the first 25 natural odd numbers?

Answer : 625
Explanation : The sum of the first n natural odd nos is square(n).
1+3 = 4 = square(2) 1+3+5 = 9 = square(3)

19. The sum of any seven consecutive numbers is divisible by

a) 2 b) 7 c) 3 d) 11

Exercise 3
Try the following.

1. There are seventy clerks working in a company, of which 30 are females. Also, 30 clerks are married;
24 clerks are above 25 years of age; 19 married clerks are above 25 years, of which 7 are males; 12
males are above 25 years of age; and 15 males are married. How many bachelor girls are there and how
many of these are above 25?

2. A man sailed off from the North Pole. After covering 2,000 miles in one direction he turned West, sailed
2,000 miles, turned North and sailed ahead another 2,000 miles till he met his friend. How far was he
from the North Pole and in what direction?

72
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

3. Here is a series of comments on the ages of three persons J, R, S by themselves.

S : The difference between R's age and mine is three years.
J : R is the youngest.
R : Either I am 24 years old or J 25 or S 26.
J : All are above 24 years of age.
S : I am the eldest if and only if R is not the youngest.
R : S is elder to me.
J : I am the eldest.
R : S is not 27 years old.
S : The sum of my age and J's is two more than twice R's age.
One of the three had been telling a lie throughout whereas others had spoken the truth. Determine the
ages of S,J,R.

4. In a group of five people, what is the probability of finding two persons with the same month of birth?

5. A father and his son go out for a 'walk-and-run' every morning around a track formed by an equilateral
triangle. The father's walking speed is 2 mph and his running speed is 5 mph. The son's walking and
running speeds are twice that of his father. Both start together from one apex of the triangle, the son
going clockwise and the father anti-clockwise. Initially the father runs and the son walks for a certain
period of time. Thereafter, as soon as the father starts walking, the son starts running. Both complete
the course in 45 minutes. For how long does the father run? Where do the two cross each other?

6. The Director of Medical Services was on his annual visit to the ENT Hospital. While going through the
out patients' records he came across the following data for a particular day : " Ear consultations 45;
Nose 50; Throat 70; Ear and Nose 30; Nose and Throat 20; Ear and Throat 30; Ear, Nose and Throat 10;
Total patients 100." Then he came to the conclusion that the records were bogus. Was he right?

7. Amongst Ram, Sham and Gobind are a doctor, a lawyer and a police officer. They are married to Radha,
Gita and Sita (not in order). Each of the wives have a profession. Gobind's wife is an artist. Ram is not
married to Gita. The lawyer's wife is a teacher. Radha is married to the police officer. Sita is an expert
cook. Who's who?

8. What should come next?

1, 2, 4, 10, 16, 40, 64,

Questions 9-12 are based on the following :

Three adults – Roberto, Sarah and Vicky – will be traveling in a van with five children – Freddy, Hillary,
Jonathan, Lupe, and Marta. The van has a driver’s seat and one passenger seat in the front, and two
benches behind the front seats, one beach behind the other. Each bench has room for exactly three
people. Everyone must sit in a seat or on a bench, and seating is subject to the following restrictions:
An adult must sit on each bench.
Either Roberto or Sarah must sit in the driver’s seat.
Jonathan must sit immediately beside Marta.

9. Of the following, who can sit in the front passenger seat ?

(a) Jonathan (b) Lupe (c) Roberto (d) Sarah (e) Vicky

10. Which of the following groups of three can sit together on a bench?
(a) Freddy, Jonathan and Marta (b) Freddy, Jonathan and Vicky
(c) Freddy, Sarah and Vicky (d) Hillary, Lupe and Sarah
(e) Lupe, Marta and Roberto

11. If Freddy sits immediately beside Vicky, which of the following cannot be true ?
a. Jonathan sits immediately beside Sarah
b. Lupe sits immediately beside Vicky
c. Hillary sits in the front passenger seat
d. Freddy sits on the same bench as Hillary
e. Hillary sits on the same bench as Roberto

12. If Sarah sits on a bench that is behind where Jonathan is sitting, which of the following must be true ?
a. Hillary sits in a seat or on a bench that is in front of where Marta is sitting
b. Lupe sits in a seat or on a bench that is in front of where Freddy is sitting
c. Freddy sits on the same bench as Hillary
d. Lupe sits on the same bench as Sarah

73
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

e. Marta sits on the same bench as Vicky

13. Make six squares of the same size using twelve match-sticks. (Hint : You will need an adhesive to
arrange the required figure)

14. A farmer has two rectangular fields. The larger field has twice the length and 4 times the width of the
smaller field. If the smaller field has area K, then the are of the larger field is greater than the area of the
smaller field by what amount?
(a) 6K (b) 8K (c) 12K (d) 7K

15. Nine equal circles are enclosed in a square whose area is 36sq units. Find the area of each circle.

16. There are 9 cards. Arrange them in a 3*3 matrix. Cards are of 4 colors. They are red, yellow, blue, green.
Conditions for arrangement: one red card must be in first row or second row. 2 green cards should be in
3rd column. Yellow cards must be in the 3 corners only. Two blue cards must be in the 2nd row. At least
one green card in each row.
17. Is z less than w? z and w are real numbers.
(I) z2 = 25
(II) w = 9
To answer the question,
a) Either I or II is sufficient
b) Both I and II are sufficient but neither of them is alone sufficient
c) I & II are sufficient
d) Both are not sufficient
18. A speaks truth 70% of the time; B speaks truth 80% of the time. What is the probability that both are
contradicting each other?

19. In a family 7 children don't eat spinach, 6 don't eat carrot, 5 don't eat beans, 4 don't eat spinach & carrots,
3 don't eat carrot & beans, 2 don't eat beans & spinach. One doesn't eat all 3. Find the no. of children.
20. Anna, Bena, Catherina and Diana are at their monthly business meeting. Their occupations are author,
biologist, chemist and doctor, but not necessarily in that order. Diana just told the neighbour, who is a
biologist that Catherina was on her way with doughnuts. Anna is sitting across from the doctor and next
to the chemist. The doctor was thinking that Bena was a good name for parent's to choose, but didn't say
anything. What is each person's occupation?

4 RDBMS Concepts
IX CRDBMS Concepts
1. What is database?
A database is a logically coherent collection of data with some inherent meaning, representing some
aspect of real world and which is designed, built and populated with data for a specific purpose.

2. What is DBMS?
It is a collection of programs that enables user to create and maintain a database. In other words it is
general-purpose software that provides the users with the processes of defining, constructing and manipulating the
database for various applications.

3. What is a Database system?

The database and DBMS software together is called as Database system.

4. Advantages of DBMS?
 Redundancy is controlled.
 Unauthorised access is restricted.
 Providing multiple user interfaces.
 Enforcing integrity constraints.
 Providing backup and recovery.

5. Disadvantage in File Processing System?

 Data redundancy & inconsistency.

74
 Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

 Difficult in accessing data.

 Data isolation.
 Data integrity.
 Concurrent access is not possible.
 Security Problems.

6. Describe the three levels of data abstraction?

The are three levels of abstraction:
 Physical level: The lowest level of abstraction describes how data are stored.
 Logical level: The next higher level of abstraction, describes what data are stored in database and what
relationship among those data.
 View level: The highest level of abstraction describes only part of entire database.

7. Define the "integrity rules"

There are two Integrity rules.
 Entity Integrity: States that “Primary key cannot have NULL value”
 Referential Integrity: States that “Foreign Key can be either a NULL value or should be
Primary Key value of other relation.

8. What is extension and intension?

Extension -
It is the number of tuples present in a table at any instance. This is time dependent.
Intension -
It is a constant value that gives the name, structure of table and the constraints laid on it.

9. What is System R? What are its two major subsystems?

System R was designed and developed over a period of 1974-79 at IBM San Jose Research Center. It is a
prototype and its purpose was to demonstrate that it is possible to build a Relational System that can be used in a
real life environment to solve real life problems, with performance at least comparable to that of existing system.
Its two subsystems are
 Research Storage
 System Relational Data System.

10. How is the data structure of System R different from the relational structure?
Unlike Relational systems in System R
 Domains are not supported
 Enforcement of candidate key uniqueness is optional
 Enforcement of entity integrity is optional
 Referential integrity is not enforced

11. What is Data Independence?

Data independence means that “the application is independent of the storage structure and access
strategy of data”. In other words, The ability to modify the schema definition in one level should not affect the
schema definition in the next higher level.
Two types of Data Independence:
 Physical Data Independence: Modification in physical level should not affect the logical level.
 Logical Data Independence: Modification in logical level should affect the view level.
NOTE: Logical Data Independence is more difficult to achieve

12. What is a view? How it is related to data independence?

A view may be thought of as a virtual table, that is, a table that does not really exist in its own right but
is instead derived from one or more underlying base table. In other words, there is no stored file that direct
represents the view instead a definition of view is stored in data dictionary.
Growth and restructuring of base tables is not reflected in views. Thus the view can insulate users from
the effects of restructuring and growth in the database. Hence accounts for logical data independence.

13. What is Data Model?

A collection of conceptual tools for describing data, data relationships, data semantics and constraints.

14. What is E-R model?

This data model is based on real world that consists of basic objects called entities and of relationship
among these objects. Entities are described in a database by a set of attributes.

15. What is Object Oriented model?

75
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

This model is based on collection of objects. An object contains values stored in instance variables with
in the object. An object also contains bodies of code that operate on the object. These bodies of code are called
methods. Objects that contain same types of values and the same methods are grouped together into classes.

16. What is an Entity?

It is a 'thing' in the real world with an independent existence.

17. What is an Entity type?

It is a collection (set) of entities that have same attributes.

18. What is an Entity set?

It is a collection of all entities of particular entity type in the database.

19. What is an Extension of entity type?

The collections of entities of a particular entity type are grouped together into an entity set.

20. What is Weak Entity set?

An entity set may not have sufficient attributes to form a primary key, and its primary key compromises
of its partial key and primary key of its parent entity, then it is said to be Weak Entity set.

21. What is an attribute?

It is a particular property, which describes the entity.

22. What is a Relation Schema and a Relation?

A relation Schema denoted by R(A1, A2, …, An) is made up of the relation name R and the list of
attributes Ai that it contains. A relation is defined as a set of tuples. Let r be the relation which contains set tuples
(t1, t2, t3, ..., tn). Each tuple is an ordered list of n-values t=(v1,v2, ..., vn).

23. What is degree of a Relation?

It is the number of attribute of its relation schema.

24. What is Relationship?

It is an association among two or more entities.

25. What is Relationship set?

The collection (or set) of similar relationships.

26. What is Relationship type?

Relationship type defines a set of associations or a relationship set among a given set of entity types.

27. What is degree of Relationship type?

It is the number of entity type participating.

25. What is DDL (Data Definition Language)?

A data base schema is specifies by a set of definitions expressed by a special language called DDL.

26. What is VDL (View Definition Language)?

It specifies user views and their mappings to the conceptual schema.

27. What is SDL (Storage Definition Language)?

This language is to specify the internal schema. This language may specify the mapping between two
schemas.

28. What is Data Storage - Definition Language?

The storage structures and access methods used by database system are specified by a set of definition in
a special type of DDL called data storage-definition language.

29. What is DML (Data Manipulation Language)?

This language that enable user to access or manipulate data as organised by appropriate data model.
 Procedural DML or Low level: DML requires a user to specify what data are needed and how to get those
data.
 Non-Procedural DML or High level: DML requires a user to specify what data are needed without
specifying how to get those data.

31. What is DML Compiler?

It translates DML statements in a query language into low-level instruction that the query evaluation
engine can understand.

76
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

32. What is Query evaluation engine?

It executes low-level instruction generated by compiler.

33. What is DDL Interpreter?

It interprets DDL statements and record them in tables containing metadata.

34. What is Record-at-a-time?

The Low level or Procedural DML can specify and retrieve each record from a set of records. This
retrieve of a record is said to be Record-at-a-time.

35. What is Set-at-a-time or Set-oriented?

The High level or Non-procedural DML can specify and retrieve many records in a single DML
statement. This retrieve of a record is said to be Set-at-a-time or Set-oriented.

36. What is Relational Algebra?

It is procedural query language. It consists of a set of operations that take one or two relations as input
and produce a new relation.

37. What is Relational Calculus?

It is an applied predicate calculus specifically tailored for relational databases proposed by E.F. Codd.
E.g. of languages based on it are DSL ALPHA, QUEL.

38. How does Tuple-oriented relational calculus differ from domain-oriented relational calculus
The tuple-oriented calculus uses a tuple variables i.e., variable whose only permitted values are tuples of
that relation. E.g. QUEL
The domain-oriented calculus has domain variables i.e., variables that range over the underlying domains instead
of over relation. E.g. ILL, DEDUCE.

39. What is normalization?

It is a process of analysing the given relation schemas based on their Functional Dependencies (FDs) and
primary key to achieve the properties
 Minimizing redundancy
 Minimizing insertion, deletion and update anomalies.

40. What is Functional Dependency?

A Functional dependency is denoted by X Y between two sets of attributes X and Y that are subsets of
R specifies a constraint on the possible tuple that can form a relation state r of R. The constraint is for any two
tuples t1 and t2 in r if t1[X] = t2[X] then they have t1[Y] = t2[Y]. This means the value of X component of a tuple
uniquely determines the value of component Y.

41. When is a functional dependency F said to be minimal?

 Every dependency in F has a single attribute for its right hand side.
 We cannot replace any dependency X A in F with a dependency Y A where Y is a proper subset of X and
still have a set of dependency that is equivalent to F.
 We cannot remove any dependency from F and still have set of dependency that is equivalent to F.

42. What is Multivalued dependency?

Multivalued dependency denoted by X Y specified on relation schema R, where X and Y are both
subsets of R, specifies the following constraint on any relation r of R: if two tuples t1 and t2 exist in r such that
t1[X] = t2[X] then t3 and t4 should also exist in r with the following properties
 t3[x] = t4[X] = t1[X] = t2[X]
 t3[Y] = t1[Y] and t4[Y] = t2[Y]
 t3[Z] = t2[Z] and t4[Z] = t1[Z]
where [Z = (R-(X U Y)) ]

43. What is Lossless join property?

It guarantees that the spurious tuple generation does not occur with respect to relation schemas after
decomposition.

44. What is 1 NF (Normal Form)?

The domain of attribute must include only atomic (simple, indivisible) values.

45. What is Fully Functional dependency?

It is based on concept of full functional dependency. A functional dependency X Y is full functional
dependency if removal of any attribute A from X means that the dependency does not hold any more.

77
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

46. What is 2NF?

A relation schema R is in 2NF if it is in 1NF and every non-prime attribute A in R is fully functionally
dependent on primary key.

47. What is 3NF?

A relation schema R is in 3NF if it is in 2NF and for every FD X A either of the following is true
 X is a Super-key of R.
 A is a prime attribute of R.
In other words, if every non prime attribute is non-transitively dependent on primary key.

48. What is BCNF (Boyce-Codd Normal Form)?

A relation schema R is in BCNF if it is in 3NF and satisfies an additional constraint that for every FD X
A, X must be a candidate key.

49. What is 4NF?

A relation schema R is said to be in 4NF if for every Multivalued dependency X Y that holds
over R, one of following is true
 X is subset or equal to (or) XY = R.
 X is a super key.

50. What is 5NF?

A Relation schema R is said to be 5NF if for every join dependency {R1, R2, ..., Rn} that holds R, one
the following is true
 Ri = R for some i.
 The join dependency is implied by the set of FD, over R in which the left side is key of R.
51. What is Domain-Key Normal Form?
A relation is said to be in DKNF if all constraints and dependencies that should hold on the the constraint
can be enforced by simply enforcing the domain constraint and key constraint on the relation.

52. What are partial, alternate,, artificial, compound and natural key?
Partial Key:
It is a set of attributes that can uniquely identify weak entities and that are related to same owner
entity. It is sometime called as Discriminator.
Alternate Key:
All Candidate Keys excluding the Primary Key are known as Alternate Keys.
Artificial Key:
If no obvious key, either stand alone or compound is available, then the last resort is to simply
create a key, by assigning a unique number to each record or occurrence. Then this is known as developing an
artificial key.
Compound Key:
If no single data element uniquely identifies occurrences within a construct, then combining
multiple elements to create a unique identifier for the construct is known as creating a compound key.
Natural Key:
When one of the data elements stored within a construct is utilized as the primary key, then it
is called the natural key.

53. What is indexing and what are the different kinds of indexing?
Indexing is a technique for determining how quickly specific data can be found.
Types:
 Binary search style indexing
 B-Tree indexing
 Inverted list indexing
 Memory resident table
 Table indexing

54. What is system catalog or catalog relation? How is better known as?
A RDBMS maintains a description of all the data that it contains, information about every relation and
index that it contains. This information is stored in a collection of relations maintained by the system called
metadata. It is also called data dictionary.
55. What is meant by query optimization?
The phase that identifies an efficient execution plan for evaluating a query that has the least estimated
cost is referred to as query optimization.

56. What is join dependency and inclusion dependency?

Join Dependency:

78
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

A Join dependency is generalization of Multivalued dependency.A JD {R1, R2, ...,

Rn} is said to hold over a relation R if R1, R2, R3, ..., Rn is a lossless-join decomposition of R . There is no set of
sound and complete inference rules for JD.
Inclusion Dependency:
An Inclusion Dependency is a statement of the form that some columns of a relation are
contained in other columns. A foreign key constraint is an example of inclusion dependency.

57. What is durability in DBMS?

Once the DBMS informs the user that a transaction has successfully completed, its effects should persist
even if the system crashes before all its changes are reflected on disk. This property is called durability.

58. What do you mean by atomicity and aggregation?

Atomicity:
Either all actions are carried out or none are. Users should not have to worry about the effect of
incomplete transactions. DBMS ensures this by undoing the actions of incomplete transactions.

Aggregation:
A concept which is used to model a relationship between a collection of entities and
relationships. It is used when we need to express a relationship among relationships.

59. What is a Phantom Deadlock?

In distributed deadlock detection, the delay in propagating local information might cause the deadlock
detection algorithms to identify deadlocks that do not really exist. Such situations are called phantom deadlocks
and they lead to unnecessary aborts.

60. What is a checkpoint and When does it occur?

A Checkpoint is like a snapshot of the DBMS state. By taking checkpoints, the DBMS can reduce the
amount of work to be done during restart in the event of subsequent crashes.

61. What are the different phases of transaction?

Different phases are
 Analysis phase
 Redo Phase
 Undo phase

62. What do you mean by flat file database?

It is a database in which there are no programs or user access languages. It has no cross-file capabilities
but is user-friendly and provides user-interface management.

63. What is "transparent DBMS"?

It is one, which keeps its Physical Structure hidden from user.

64. Brief theory of Network, Hierarchical schemas and their properties

Network schema uses a graph data structure to organize records example for such a database
management system is CTCG while a hierarchical schema uses a tree data structure example for such a system is
IMS.

65. What is a query?

A query with respect to DBMS relates to user commands that are used to interact with a data base. The
query language can be classified into data definition language and data manipulation language.

66. What do you mean by Correlated subquery?

Subqueries, or nested queries, are used to bring back a set of rows to be used by the parent query.
Depending on how the subquery is written, it can be executed once for the parent query or it can be executed once
for each row returned by the parent query. If the subquery is executed for each row of the parent, this is called a
correlated subquery.
A correlated subquery can be easily identified if it contains any references to the parent subquery
columns in its WHERE clause. Columns from the subquery cannot be referenced anywhere else in the parent
query. The following example demonstrates a non-correlated subquery.
E.g. Select * From CUST Where '10/03/1990' IN (Select ODATE From ORDER Where CUST.CNUM =
ORDER.CNUM)

67. What are the primitive operations common to all record management systems?
Addition, deletion and modification.

68. Name the buffer in which all the commands that are typed in are stored
‘Edit’ Buffer

79
 Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

69. What are the unary operations in Relational Algebra?

PROJECTION and SELECTION.

70. Are the resulting relations of PRODUCT and JOIN operation the same?
No.
PRODUCT: Concatenation of every row in one relation with every row in another.
JOIN: Concatenation of rows from one relation and related rows from another.

71. What is RDBMS KERNEL?

Two important pieces of RDBMS architecture are the kernel, which is the software, and the data
dictionary, which consists of the system-level data structures used by the kernel to manage the database
You might think of an RDBMS as an operating system (or set of subsystems), designed specifically for
controlling data access; its primary functions are storing, retrieving, and securing data. An RDBMS maintains its
own list of authorized users and their associated privileges; manages memory caches and paging; controls locking
for concurrent resource usage; dispatches and schedules user requests; and manages space usage within its table-
space structures
.
72. Name the sub-systems of a RDBMS
I/O, Security, Language Processing, Process Control, Storage Management, Logging and Recovery,
Distribution Control, Transaction Control, Memory Management, Lock Management

73. Which part of the RDBMS takes care of the data dictionary? How
Data dictionary is a set of tables and database objects that is stored in a special area of the database and
maintained exclusively by the kernel.

74. What is the job of the information stored in data-dictionary?

The information in the data dictionary validates the existence of the objects, provides access to them, and
maps the actual physical storage location.

75. Not only RDBMS takes care of locating data it also

determines an optimal access path to store or retrieve the data

76. How do you communicate with an RDBMS?

You communicate with an RDBMS using Structured Query Language (SQL)

77. Define SQL and state the differences between SQL and other conventional programming Languages
SQL is a nonprocedural language that is designed specifically for data access operations on normalized
relational database structures. The primary difference between SQL and other conventional programming
languages is that SQL statements specify what data operations should be performed rather than how to perform
them.

78. Name the three major set of files on disk that compose a database in Oracle
There are three major sets of files on disk that compose a database. All the files are binary. These are
 Database files
 Control files
 Redo logs
The most important of these are the database files where the actual data resides. The control files and the
redo logs support the functioning of the architecture itself.
All three sets of files must be present, open, and available to Oracle for any data on the database to be
useable. Without these files, you cannot access the database, and the database administrator might have to recover
some or all of the database using a backup, if there is one.

79. What is an Oracle Instance?

The Oracle system processes, also known as Oracle background processes, provide functions for the user
processes—functions that would otherwise be done by the user processes themselves
Oracle database-wide system memory is known as the SGA, the system global area or shared global
area. The data and control structures in the SGA are shareable, and all the Oracle background processes and user
processes can use them.
The combination of the SGA and the Oracle background processes is known as an Oracle instance

80. What are the four Oracle system processes that must always be up and running for the database to be
useable
The four Oracle system processes that must always be up and running for the database to be useable
include DBWR (Database Writer), LGWR (Log Writer), SMON (System Monitor), and PMON (Process Monitor).

80
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

81. What are database files, control files and log files. How many of these files should a database have at
least? Why?
Database Files
The database files hold the actual data and are typically the largest in size. Depending on their
sizes, the tables (and other objects) for all the user accounts can go in one database file—but that's not an ideal
situation because it does not make the database structure very flexible for controlling access to storage for different
users, putting the database on different disk drives, or backing up and restoring just part of the database.
You must have at least one database file but usually, more than one files are used. In terms of
accessing and using the data in the tables and other objects, the number (or location) of the files is immaterial.
The database files are fixed in size and never grow bigger than the size at which they were
created
Control Files
The control files and redo logs support the rest of the architecture. Any database must have at
least one control file, although you typically have more than one to guard against loss. The control file records the
name of the database, the date and time it was created, the location of the database and redo logs, and the
synchronization information to ensure that all three sets of files are always in step. Every time you add a new
database or redo log file to the database, the information is recorded in the control files.
Redo Logs
Any database must have at least two redo logs. These are the journals for the database; the
redo logs record all changes to the user objects or system objects. If any type of failure occurs, the changes
recorded in the redo logs can be used to bring the database to a consistent state without losing any committed
transactions. In the case of non-data loss failure, Oracle can apply the information in the redo logs automatically
without intervention from the DBA.
The redo log files are fixed in size and never grow dynamically from the size at which they
were created.

82. What is ROWID?

The ROWID is a unique database-wide physical address for every row on every table. Once assigned
(when the row is first inserted into the database), it never changes until the row is deleted or the table is dropped.
The ROWID consists of the following three components, the combination of which uniquely identifies
the physical storage location of the row.
 Oracle database file number, which contains the block with the rows
 Oracle block address, which contains the row
 The row within the block (because each block can hold many rows)
The ROWID is used internally in indexes as a quick means of retrieving rows with a particular key
value. Application developers also use it in SQL statements as a quick way to access a row once they know the
ROWID

83. What is Oracle Block? Can two Oracle Blocks have the same address?
Oracle "formats" the database files into a number of Oracle blocks when they are first created—making
it easier for the RDBMS software to manage the files and easier to read data into the memory areas.
The block size should be a multiple of the operating system block size. Regardless of the block size, the
entire block is not available for holding data; Oracle takes up some space to manage the contents of the block. This
block header has a minimum size, but it can grow.
These Oracle blocks are the smallest unit of storage. Increasing the Oracle block size can improve
performance, but it should be done only when the database is first created.
Each Oracle block is numbered sequentially for each database file starting at 1. Two blocks can have the
same block address if they are in different database files.

84. What is database Trigger?

A database trigger is a PL/SQL block that can defined to automatically execute for insert, update, and
delete statements against a table. The trigger can e defined to execute once for the entire statement or once for
every row that is inserted, updated, or deleted. For any one table, there are twelve events for which you can define
database triggers. A database trigger can call database procedures that are also written in PL/SQL.

85. Name two utilities that Oracle provides, which are use for backup and recovery.
Along with the RDBMS software, Oracle provides two utilities that you can use to back up and restore
the database. These utilities are Export and Import.
The Export utility dumps the definitions and data for the specified part of the database to an operating
system binary file. The Import utility reads the file produced by an export, recreates the definitions of objects, and
inserts the data
If Export and Import are used as a means of backing up and recovering the database, all the changes
made to the database cannot be recovered since the export was performed. The best you can do is recover the
database to the time when the export was last performed.

86. What are stored-procedures? And what are the advantages of using them.

81
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Stored procedures are database objects that perform a user defined operation. A stored procedure can
have a set of compound SQL statements. A stored procedure executes the SQL commands and returns the result to
the client. Stored procedures are used to reduce network traffic.

87. How are exceptions handled in PL/SQL? Give some of the internal exceptions' name
PL/SQL exception handling is a mechanism for dealing with run-time errors encountered during
procedure execution. Use of this mechanism enables execution to continue if the error is not severe enough to
cause procedure termination.
The exception handler must be defined within a subprogram specification. Errors cause the program to
raise an exception with a transfer of control to the exception-handler block. After the exception handler executes,
control returns to the block in which the handler was defined. If there are no more executable statements in the
block, control returns to the caller.
User-Defined Exceptions
PL/SQL enables the user to define exception handlers in the declarations area of subprogram
specifications. User accomplishes this by naming an exception as in the following example:
ot_failure EXCEPTION;
In this case, the exception name is ot_failure. Code associated with this handler is written in the EXCEPTION
specification area as follows:
EXCEPTION
when OT_FAILURE then
out_status_code := g_out_status_code;
out_msg := g_out_msg;
The following is an example of a subprogram exception:
EXCEPTION
when NO_DATA_FOUND then
g_out_status_code := 'FAIL';
RAISE ot_failure;
Within this exception is the RAISE statement that transfers control back to the ot_failure exception handler. This
technique of raising the exception is used to invoke all user-defined exceptions.
System-Defined Exceptions
Exceptions internal to PL/SQL are raised automatically upon error. NO_DATA_FOUND is a
system-defined exception. Table below gives a complete list of internal exceptions.

PL/SQL internal exceptions.

Exception Name Oracle Error

CURSOR_ALREADY_OPEN ORA-06511
DUP_VAL_ON_INDEX ORA-00001
INVALID_CURSOR ORA-01001
INVALID_NUMBER ORA-01722
LOGIN_DENIED ORA-01017
NO_DATA_FOUND ORA-01403
NOT_LOGGED_ON ORA-01012
PROGRAM_ERROR ORA-06501
STORAGE_ERROR ORA-06500
TIMEOUT_ON_RESOURCE ORA-00051
TOO_MANY_ROWS ORA-01422
TRANSACTION_BACKED_OUT ORA-00061
VALUE_ERROR ORA-06502
ZERO_DIVIDE ORA-01476

In addition to this list of exceptions, there is a catch-all exception named OTHERS that traps all errors
for which specific error handling has not been established.

88. Does PL/SQL support "overloading"? Explain

The concept of overloading in PL/SQL relates to the idea that you can define procedures and functions
with the same name. PL/SQL does not look only at the referenced name, however, to resolve a procedure or
function call. The count and data types of formal parameters are also considered.
PL/SQL also attempts to resolve any procedure or function calls in locally defined packages before
looking at globally defined packages or internal functions. To further ensure calling the proper procedure, you can
use the dot notation. Prefacing a procedure or function name with the package name fully qualifies any procedure
or function reference.

89. Tables derived from the ERD

a) Are totally unnormalised
b) Are always in 1NF
c) Can be further denormalised

82
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

d) May have multi-valued attributes

(b) Are always in 1NF

90. Spurious tuples may occur due to

i. Bad normalization
ii. Theta joins
iii. Updating tables from join
a) i & ii b) ii & iii
c) i & iii d) ii & iii

(a) i & iii because theta joins are joins made on keys that are not primary keys.

91. A B C is a set of attributes. The functional dependency is as follows

AB -> B
AC -> C
C -> B
a) is in 1NF
b) is in 2NF
c) is in 3NF
d) is in BCNF

(a) is in 1NF since (AC)+ = { A, B, C} hence AC is the primary key. Since C B is a FD given,
where neither C is a Key nor B is a prime attribute, this it is not in 3NF. Further B is not functionally dependent on
key AC thus it is not in 2NF. Thus the given FDs is in 1NF.

92. In mapping of ERD to DFD

a) entities in ERD should correspond to an existing entity/store in DFD
b) entity in DFD is converted to attributes of an entity in ERD
c) relations in ERD has 1 to 1 correspondence to processes in DFD
d) relationships in ERD has 1 to 1 correspondence to flows in DFD

(a) entities in ERD should correspond to an existing entity/store in DFD

93. A dominant entity is the entity

a) on the N side in a 1 : N relationship
b) on the 1 side in a 1 : N relationship
c) on either side in a 1 : 1 relationship
d) nothing to do with 1 : 1 or 1 : N relationship

(b) on the 1 side in a 1 : N relationship

94. Select 'NORTH', CUSTOMER From CUST_DTLS Where REGION = 'N' Order By
CUSTOMER Union Select 'EAST', CUSTOMER From CUST_DTLS Where REGION = 'E' Order By
CUSTOMER
The above is
a) Not an error
b) Error - the string in single quotes 'NORTH' and 'SOUTH'
c) Error - the string should be in double quotes
d) Error - ORDER BY clause

(d) Error - the ORDER BY clause. Since ORDER BY clause cannot be used in UNIONS

95. What is Storage Manager?

It is a program module that provides the interface between the low-level data stored in database,
application programs and queries submitted to the system.

96. What is Buffer Manager?

It is a program module, which is responsible for fetching data from disk storage into main memory and
deciding what data to be cache in memory.

97. What is Transaction Manager?

It is a program module, which ensures that database, remains in a consistent state despite system failures
and concurrent transaction execution proceeds without conflicting.

98. What is File Manager?

83
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

It is a program module, which manages the allocation of space on disk storage and data structure used to
represent information stored on a disk.

99. What is Authorization and Integrity manager?

It is the program module, which tests for the satisfaction of integrity constraint and checks the authority
of user to access data.

100. What are stand-alone procedures?

Procedures that are not part of a package are known as stand-alone because they independently defined.
A good example of a stand-alone procedure is one written in a SQL*Forms application. These types of procedures
are not available for reference from other Oracle tools. Another limitation of stand-alone procedures is that they
are compiled at run time, which slows execution.

101. What are cursors give different types of cursors.

PL/SQL uses cursors for all database information accesses statements. The language supports the
use two types of cursors
 Implicit
 Explicit

102. What is cold backup and hot backup (in case of Oracle)?
 Cold Backup:
It is copying the three sets of files (database files, redo logs, and control file) when the
instance is shut down. This is a straight file copy, usually from the disk directly to tape. You must shut down the
instance to guarantee a consistent copy.
If a cold backup is performed, the only option available in the event of data file loss is
restoring all the files from the latest backup. All work performed on the database since the last backup is lost.
 Hot Backup:
Some sites (such as worldwide airline reservations systems) cannot shut down the
database while making a backup copy of the files. The cold backup is not an available option.
So different means of backing up database must be used — the hot backup. Issue a SQL
command to indicate to Oracle, on a tablespace-by-tablespace basis, that the files of the tablespace are to backed
up. The users can continue to make full use of the files, including making changes to the data. Once the user has
indicated that he/she wants to back up the tablespace files, he/she can use the operating system to copy those files
to the desired backup destination.
The database must be running in ARCHIVELOG mode for the hot backup option.
If a data loss failure does occur, the lost database files can be restored using the hot
backup and the online and offline redo logs created since the backup was done. The database is restored to the
most consistent state without any loss of committed transactions.

103. What are Armstrong rules? How do we say that they are complete and/or sound
The well-known inference rules for FDs
 Reflexive rule :
If Y is subset or equal to X then X Y.
 Augmentation rule:
If X Y then XZ YZ.
 Transitive rule:
If {X Y, Y Z} then X Z.
 Decomposition rule :
If X YZ then X Y.
 Union or Additive rule:
If {X Y, X Z} then X YZ.
 Pseudo Transitive rule :
If {X Y, WY Z} then WX Z.
Of these the first three are known as Amstrong Rules. They are sound because it is enough if a set of
FDs satisfy these three. They are called complete because using these three rules we can generate the rest all
inference rules.

104. How can you find the minimal key of relational schema?
Minimal key is one which can identify each tuple of the given relation schema uniquely. For finding the
minimal key it is required to find the closure that is the set of all attributes that are dependent on any given set of
attributes under the given set of functional dependency.
Algo. I Determining X+, closure for X, given set of FDs F
1. Set X+ = X
2. Set Old X+ = X+
3. For each FD Y Z in F and if Y belongs to X+ then add Z to X+
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until Old X+ = X+

84
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Algo.II Determining minimal K for relation schema R, given set of FDs F

1. Set K to R that is make K a set of all attributes in R
2. For each attribute A in K
a. Compute (K – A)+ with respect to F
b. If (K – A)+ = R then set K = (K – A)+

105. What do you understand by dependency preservation?

Given a relation R and a set of FDs F, dependency preservation states that the closure of the
union of the projection of F on each decomposed relation Ri is equal to the closure of F. i.e.,
((R1(F)) U … U (Rn(F)))+ = F+
if decomposition is not dependency preserving, then some dependency is lost in the decomposition.

106. What is meant by Proactive, Retroactive and Simultaneous Update.

Proactive Update:
The updates that are applied to database before it becomes effective in real world .
Retroactive Update:
The updates that are applied to database after it becomes effective in real world .
Simulatneous Update:
The updates that are applied to database at the same time when it becomes effective
in real world .

107. What are the different types of JOIN operations?

Equi Join: This is the most common type of join which involves only equality comparisions.
The disadvantage in this type of join is that there

5 SQL

1. Which is the subset of SQL commands used to manipulate Oracle Database structures, including tables?
Data Definition Language (DDL)
2. What operator performs pattern matching?
LIKE operator
3. What operator tests column for the absence of data?
IS NULL operator
4. Which command executes the contents of a specified file?
START <filename> or @<filename>
5. What is the parameter substitution symbol used with INSERT INTO command?
&
6. Which command displays the SQL command in the SQL buffer, and then executes it?
RUN
7. What are the wildcards used for pattern matching?
_ for single character substitution and % for multi-character substitution
8. State true or false. EXISTS, SOME, ANY are operators in SQL.
True
9. State true or false. !=, <>, ^= all denote the same operation.
True
10. What are the privileges that can be granted on a table by a user to others?
Insert, update, delete, select, references, index, execute, alter, all

85
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

11. What command is used to get back the privileges offered by the GRANT command?
REVOKE
12. Which system tables contain information on privileges granted and privileges obtained?
USER_TAB_PRIVS_MADE, USER_TAB_PRIVS_RECD
13. Which system table contains information on constraints on all the tables created?
USER_CONSTRAINTS
14. TRUNCATE TABLE EMP;
DELETE FROM EMP;
Will the outputs of the above two commands differ?
Both will result in deleting all the rows in the table EMP.
15. What is the difference between TRUNCATE and DELETE commands?
TRUNCATE is a DDL command whereas DELETE is a DML command. Hence DELETE operation
can be rolled back, but TRUNCATE operation cannot be rolled back. WHERE clause can be used with DELETE
and not with TRUNCATE.
16. What command is used to create a table by copying the structure of another table?
Answer :
CREATE TABLE .. AS SELECT command
Explanation :
To copy only the structure, the WHERE clause of the SELECT command should contain a FALSE
statement as in the following.
CREATE TABLE NEWTABLE AS SELECT * FROM EXISTINGTABLE WHERE 1=2;
If the WHERE condition is true, then all the rows or rows satisfying the condition will be copied to the
new table.
17. What will be the output of the following query?
SELECT REPLACE(TRANSLATE(LTRIM(RTRIM('!! ATHEN !!','!'), '!'), 'AN', '**'),'*','TROUBLE') FROM
DUAL;
TROUBLETHETROUBLE
18. What will be the output of the following query?
SELECT DECODE(TRANSLATE('A','1234567890','1111111111'), '1','YES', 'NO' );
Answer :NO
Explanation :
The query checks whether a given string is a numerical digit.
19. What does the following query do?
SELECT SAL + NVL(COMM,0) FROM EMP;
This displays the total salary of all employees. The null values in the commission column will be
replaced by 0 and added to salary.
20. Which date function is used to find the difference between two dates?
MONTHS_BETWEEN
21. Why does the following command give a compilation error?
DROP TABLE &TABLE_NAME;
Variable names should start with an alphabet. Here the table name starts with an '&' symbol.
22. What is the advantage of specifying WITH GRANT OPTION in the GRANT command?
The privilege receiver can further grant the privileges he/she has obtained from the owner to any other
user.
23. What is the use of the DROP option in the ALTER TABLE command?

86
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

It is used to drop constraints specified on the table.

24. What is the value of ‘comm’ and ‘sal’ after executing the following query if the initial value of ‘sal’ is
10000?
UPDATE EMP SET SAL = SAL + 1000, COMM = SAL*0.1;
sal = 11000, comm = 1000
25. What is the use of DESC in SQL?
Answer : DESC has two purposes. It is used to describe a schema as well as to retrieve rows from table in
descending order.
Explanation :
The query SELECT * FROM EMP ORDER BY ENAME DESC will display the output sorted on
ENAME in descending order.
26. What is the use of CASCADE CONSTRAINTS?
When this clause is used with the DROP command, a parent table can be dropped even when a child
table exists.
27. Which function is used to find the largest integer less than or equal to a specific value?
FLOOR
28. What is the output of the following query?
SELECT TRUNC(1234.5678,-2) FROM DUAL;
1200

SQL – QUERIES
I. SCHEMAS
Table 1 : STUDIES
PNAME (VARCHAR), SPLACE (VARCHAR), COURSE (VARCHAR), CCOST (NUMBER)

Table 2 : SOFTWARE
PNAME (VARCHAR), TITLE (VARCHAR), DEVIN (VARCHAR), SCOST (NUMBER), DCOST (NUMBER),
SOLD (NUMBER)

Table 3 : PROGRAMMER
PNAME (VARCHAR), DOB (DATE), DOJ (DATE), SEX (CHAR), PROF1 (VARCHAR), PROF2
(VARCHAR), SAL (NUMBER)

LEGEND :
PNAME – Programmer Name, SPLACE – Study Place, CCOST – Course Cost, DEVIN – Developed in, SCOST
– Software Cost, DCOST – Development Cost, PROF1 – Proficiency 1

QUERIES :
1. Find out the selling cost average for packages developed in Oracle.
2. Display the names, ages and experience of all programmers.
3. Display the names of those who have done the PGDCA course.
4. What is the highest number of copies sold by a package?
5. Display the names and date of birth of all programmers born in April.
6. Display the lowest course fee.
7. How many programmers have done the DCA course.

87
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

8. How much revenue has been earned through the sale of packages developed in C.
9. Display the details of software developed by Rakesh.
10. How many programmers studied at Pentafour.
11. Display the details of packages whose sales crossed the 5000 mark.
12. Find out the number of copies which should be sold in order to recover the development cost of each
package.
13. Display the details of packages for which the development cost has been recovered.
14. What is the price of costliest software developed in VB?
15. How many packages were developed in Oracle ?
16. How many programmers studied at PRAGATHI?
17. How many programmers paid 10000 to 15000 for the course?
18. What is the average course fee?
19. Display the details of programmers knowing C.
20. How many programmers know either C or Pascal?
21. How many programmers don’t know C and C++?
22. How old is the oldest male programmer?
23. What is the average age of female programmers?
24. Calculate the experience in years for each programmer and display along with their names in
descending order.
25. Who are the programmers who celebrate their birthdays during the current month?
26. How many female programmers are there?
27. What are the languages known by the male programmers?
28. What is the average salary?
29. How many people draw 5000 to 7500?
30. Display the details of those who don’t know C, C++ or Pascal.
31. Display the costliest package developed by each programmer.
32. Produce the following output for all the male programmers
Programmer
Mr. Arvind – has 15 years of experience

KEYS:

1. SELECT AVG(SCOST) FROM SOFTWARE WHERE DEVIN = 'ORACLE';

2. SELECT PNAME,TRUNC(MONTHS_BETWEEN(SYSDATE,DOB)/12) "AGE",
TRUNC(MONTHS_BETWEEN(SYSDATE,DOJ)/12) "EXPERIENCE" FROM PROGRAMMER;
3. SELECT PNAME FROM STUDIES WHERE COURSE = 'PGDCA';
4. SELECT MAX(SOLD) FROM SOFTWARE;
5. SELECT PNAME, DOB FROM PROGRAMMER WHERE DOB LIKE '%APR%';
6. SELECT MIN(CCOST) FROM STUDIES;
7. SELECT COUNT(*) FROM STUDIES WHERE COURSE = 'DCA';
8. SELECT SUM(SCOST*SOLD-DCOST) FROM SOFTWARE GROUP BY DEVIN HAVING DEVIN
= 'C';
9. SELECT * FROM SOFTWARE WHERE PNAME = 'RAKESH';
10. SELECT * FROM STUDIES WHERE SPLACE = 'PENTAFOUR';
11. SELECT * FROM SOFTWARE WHERE SCOST*SOLD-DCOST > 5000;

88
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

12. SELECT CEIL(DCOST/SCOST) FROM SOFTWARE;

13. SELECT * FROM SOFTWARE WHERE SCOST*SOLD >= DCOST;
14. SELECT MAX(SCOST) FROM SOFTWARE GROUP BY DEVIN HAVING DEVIN = 'VB';
15. SELECT COUNT(*) FROM SOFTWARE WHERE DEVIN = 'ORACLE';
16. SELECT COUNT(*) FROM STUDIES WHERE SPLACE = 'PRAGATHI';
17. SELECT COUNT(*) FROM STUDIES WHERE CCOST BETWEEN 10000 AND 15000;
18. SELECT AVG(CCOST) FROM STUDIES;
19. SELECT * FROM PROGRAMMER WHERE PROF1 = 'C' OR PROF2 = 'C';
20. SELECT * FROM PROGRAMMER WHERE PROF1 IN ('C','PASCAL') OR PROF2 IN
('C','PASCAL');
21. SELECT * FROM PROGRAMMER WHERE PROF1 NOT IN ('C','C++') AND PROF2 NOT IN
('C','C++');
22. SELECT TRUNC(MAX(MONTHS_BETWEEN(SYSDATE,DOB)/12)) FROM PROGRAMMER
WHERE SEX = 'M';
23. SELECT TRUNC(AVG(MONTHS_BETWEEN(SYSDATE,DOB)/12)) FROM PROGRAMMER
WHERE SEX = 'F';
24. SELECT PNAME, TRUNC(MONTHS_BETWEEN(SYSDATE,DOJ)/12) FROM PROGRAMMER
ORDER BY PNAME DESC;
25. SELECT PNAME FROM PROGRAMMER WHERE TO_CHAR(DOB,'MON') =
TO_CHAR(SYSDATE,'MON');
26. SELECT COUNT(*) FROM PROGRAMMER WHERE SEX = 'F';
27. SELECT DISTINCT(PROF1) FROM PROGRAMMER WHERE SEX = 'M';
28. SELECT AVG(SAL) FROM PROGRAMMER;
29. SELECT COUNT(*) FROM PROGRAMMER WHERE SAL BETWEEN 5000 AND 7500;
30. SELECT * FROM PROGRAMMER WHERE PROF1 NOT IN ('C','C++','PASCAL') AND PROF2
NOT IN ('C','C++','PASCAL');
31. SELECT PNAME,TITLE,SCOST FROM SOFTWARE WHERE SCOST IN (SELECT MAX(SCOST)
FROM SOFTWARE GROUP BY PNAME);
32.SELECT 'Mr.' || PNAME || ' - has ' || TRUNC(MONTHS_BETWEEN(SYSDATE,DOJ)/12) || ' years of
experience' “Programmer” FROM PROGRAMMER WHERE SEX = 'M' UNION SELECT 'Ms.' ||
PNAME || ' - has ' || TRUNC (MONTHS_BETWEEN (SYSDATE,DOJ)/12) || ' years of experience'
“Programmer” FROM PROGRAMMER WHERE SEX = 'F';

II . SCHEMA :
Table 1 : DEPT
DEPTNO (NOT NULL , NUMBER(2)), DNAME (VARCHAR2(14)),
LOC (VARCHAR2(13)

Table 2 : EMP
EMPNO (NOT NULL , NUMBER(4)), ENAME (VARCHAR2(10)),
JOB (VARCHAR2(9)), MGR (NUMBER(4)), HIREDATE (DATE),
SAL (NUMBER(7,2)), COMM (NUMBER(7,2)), DEPTNO (NUMBER(2))

MGR is the empno of the employee whom the employee reports to. DEPTNO is a foreign key.
QUERIES

89
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

1. List all the employees who have at least one person reporting to them.
2. List the employee details if and only if more than 10 employees are present in department no 10.
3. List the name of the employees with their immediate higher authority.
4. List all the employees who do not manage any one.
5. List the employee details whose salary is greater than the lowest salary of an employee belonging to deptno
20.
6. List the details of the employee earning more than the highest paid manager.
7. List the highest salary paid for each job.
8. Find the most recently hired employee in each department.
9. In which year did most people join the company? Display the year and the number of employees.
10. Which department has the highest annual remuneration bill?
11. Write a query to display a ‘*’ against the row of the most recently hired employee.
12. Write a correlated sub-query to list out the employees who earn more than the average salary of their
department.
13. Find the nth maximum salary.
14. Select the duplicate records (Records, which are inserted, that already exist) in the EMP table.
15. Write a query to list the length of service of the employees (of the form n years and m months).

KEYS:
1. SELECT DISTINCT(A.ENAME) FROM EMP A, EMP B WHERE A.EMPNO = B.MGR; or SELECT ENAME FROM
EMP WHERE EMPNO IN (SELECT MGR FROM EMP);
2. SELECT * FROM EMP WHERE DEPTNO IN (SELECT DEPTNO FROM EMP GROUP BY DEPTNO HAVING
COUNT(EMPNO)>10 AND DEPTNO=10);
3. SELECT A.ENAME "EMPLOYEE", B.ENAME "REPORTS TO" FROM EMP A, EMP B WHERE A.MGR=B.EMPNO;
4. SELECT * FROM EMP WHERE EMPNO IN ( SELECT EMPNO FROM EMP MINUS SELECT MGR FROM EMP);
5. SELECT * FROM EMP WHERE SAL > ( SELECT MIN(SAL) FROM EMP GROUP BY DEPTNO HAVING
DEPTNO=20);
6. SELECT * FROM EMP WHERE SAL > ( SELECT MAX(SAL) FROM EMP GROUP BY JOB HAVING JOB =
'MANAGER' );
7. SELECT JOB, MAX(SAL) FROM EMP GROUP BY JOB;
8. SELECT * FROM EMP WHERE (DEPTNO, HIREDATE) IN (SELECT DEPTNO, MAX(HIREDATE) FROM EMP
GROUP BY DEPTNO);
9. SELECT TO_CHAR(HIREDATE,'YYYY') "YEAR", COUNT(EMPNO) "NO. OF EMPLOYEES" FROM EMP GROUP
BY TO_CHAR(HIREDATE,'YYYY') HAVING COUNT(EMPNO) = (SELECT MAX(COUNT(EMPNO)) FROM EMP
GROUP BY TO_CHAR(HIREDATE,'YYYY'));
10. SELECT DEPTNO, LPAD(SUM(12*(SAL+NVL(COMM,0))),15) "COMPENSATION" FROM EMP GROUP BY
DEPTNO HAVING SUM( 12*(SAL+NVL(COMM,0))) = (SELECT MAX(SUM(12*(SAL+NVL(COMM,0)))) FROM EMP
GROUP BY DEPTNO);
11. SELECT ENAME, HIREDATE, LPAD('*',8) "RECENTLY HIRED" FROM EMP WHERE HIREDATE = (SELECT
MAX(HIREDATE) FROM EMP) UNION SELECT ENAME NAME, HIREDATE, LPAD(' ',15) "RECENTLY HIRED" FROM
EMP WHERE HIREDATE != (SELECT MAX(HIREDATE) FROM EMP);
12. SELECT ENAME,SAL FROM EMP E WHERE SAL > (SELECT AVG(SAL) FROM EMP F WHERE E.DEPTNO =
F.DEPTNO);
13. SELECT ENAME, SAL FROM EMP A WHERE &N = (SELECT COUNT (DISTINCT(SAL)) FROM EMP B WHERE
A.SAL<=B.SAL);
14. SELECT * FROM EMP A WHERE A.EMPNO IN (SELECT EMPNO FROM EMP GROUP BY EMPNO HAVING
COUNT(EMPNO)>1) AND A.ROWID!=MIN (ROWID));

90
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

15. SELECT ENAME "EMPLOYEE",TO_CHAR(TRUNC(MONTHS_BETWEEN(SYSDATE,HIREDATE)/12))||' YEARS '||

TO_CHAR(TRUNC(MOD(MONTHS_BETWEEN (SYSDATE, HIREDATE),12)))||' MONTHS ' "LENGTH OF SERVICE"
FROM EMP;

6 Computer
r Networks
1. What are the two types of transmission technology available?
Networks
(i) Broadcast and (ii) point-to-point

2. What is subnet?
A generic term for section of a large networks usually separated by a bridge or router.

3. Difference between the communication and transmission.

Transmission is a physical movement of information and concern issues like bit polarity,
synchronisation, clock etc.
Communication means the meaning full exchange of information between two communication media.

4. What are the possible ways of data exchange?

(i) Simplex (ii) Half-duplex (iii) Full-duplex.

5. What is SAP?
Series of interface points that allow other computers to communicate with the other layers of network
protocol stack.

6. What do you meant by "triple X" in Networks?

The function of PAD (Packet Assembler Disassembler) is described in a document known as X.3. The
standard protocol has been defined between the terminal and the PAD, called X.28; another standard protocol
exists between hte PAD and the network, called X.29. Together, these three recommendations are often called
"triple X"

7. What is frame relay, in which layer it comes?

Frame relay is a packet switching technology. It will operate in the data link layer.

8. What is terminal emulation, in which layer it comes?

Telnet is also called as terminal emulation. It belongs to application layer.

9. What is Beaconing?
The process that allows a network to self-repair networks problems. The stations on the network notify
the other stations on the ring when they are not receiving the transmissions. Beaconing is used in Token ring and
FDDI networks.

10. What is redirector?

Redirector is software that intercepts file or prints I/O requests and translates them into network requests.
This comes under presentation layer.

11. What is NETBIOS and NETBEUI?

NETBIOS is a programming interface that allows I/O requests to be sent to and received from a remote
computer and it hides the networking hardware from applications.
NETBEUI is NetBIOS extended user interface. A transport protocol designed by microsoft and IBM for
the use on small subnets.

12. What is RAID?

A method for providing fault tolerance by using multiple hard disk drives.

13. What is passive topology?

When the computers on the network simply listen and receive the signal, they are referred to as passive
because they don’t amplify the signal in any way. Example for passive topology - linear bus.

14. What is Brouter?

91
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Hybrid devices that combine the features of both bridges and routers.

15. What is cladding?

A layer of a glass surrounding the center fiber of glass inside a fiber-optic cable.

16. What is point-to-point protocol

A communications protocol used to connect computers to remote networking services including Internet
service providers.

17. How Gateway is different from Routers?

A gateway operates at the upper levels of the OSI model and translates information between two
completely different network architectures or data formats

18. What is attenuation?

The degeneration of a signal over distance on a network cable is called attenuation.

19. What is MAC address?

The address for a device as it is identified at the Media Access Control (MAC) layer in the network
architecture. MAC address is usually stored in ROM on the network adapter card and is unique.

20. Difference between bit rate and baud rate.

Bit rate is the number of bits transmitted during one second whereas baud rate refers to the number of
signal units per second that are required to represent those bits.
baud rate = bit rate / N
where N is no-of-bits represented by each signal shift.

21. What is Bandwidth?

Every line has an upper limit and a lower limit on the frequency of signals it can carry. This limited
range is called the bandwidth.

22. What are the types of Transmission media?

Signals are usually transmitted over some transmission media that are broadly classified in to two
categories.
a) Guided Media:
These are those that provide a conduit from one device to another that include twisted-pair,
coaxial cable and fiber-optic cable. A signal traveling along any of these media is directed and is contained by the
physical limits of the medium. Twisted-pair and coaxial cable use metallic that accept and transport signals in the
form of electrical current. Optical fiber is a glass or plastic cable that accepts and transports signals in the form of
light.
b) Unguided Media:
This is the wireless media that transport electromagnetic waves without using a physical
conductor. Signals are broadcast either through air. This is done through radio communication, satellite
communication and cellular telephony.

23. What is Project 802?

It is a project started by IEEE to set standards to enable intercommunication between equipment from a
variety of manufacturers. It is a way for specifying functions of the physical layer, the data link layer and to some
extent the network layer to allow for interconnectivity of major LAN
protocols.
It consists of the following:
 802.1 is an internetworking standard for compatibility of different LANs and MANs across protocols.
 802.2 Logical link control (LLC) is the upper sublayer of the data link layer which is non-architecture-
specific, that is remains the same for all IEEE-defined LANs.
 Media access control (MAC) is the lower sublayer of the data link layer that contains some distinct modules
each carrying proprietary information specific to the LAN product being used. The modules are Ethernet
LAN (802.3), Token ring LAN (802.4), Token bus LAN (802.5).
 802.6 is distributed queue dual bus (DQDB) designed to be used in MANs.

24. What is Protocol Data Unit?

The data unit in the LLC level is called the protocol data unit (PDU). The PDU contains of four fields a
destination service access point (DSAP), a source service access point (SSAP), a control field and an information
field. DSAP, SSAP are addresses used by the LLC to identify the protocol stacks on the receiving and sending
machines that are generating and using the data. The control field specifies whether the PDU frame is a
information frame (I - frame) or a supervisory frame (S - frame) or a unnumbered frame (U - frame).

25. What are the different type of networking / internetworking devices?

Repeater:

92
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Also called a regenerator, it is an electronic device that operates only at physical layer. It
receives the signal in the network before it becomes weak, regenerates the original bit pattern and puts the
refreshed copy back in to the link.
Bridges:
These operate both in the physical and data link layers of LANs of same type. They divide a
larger network in to smaller segments. They contain logic that allow them to keep the traffic for each segment
separate and thus are repeaters that relay a frame only the side of the segment containing the intended recipent and
control congestion.
Routers:
They relay packets among multiple interconnected networks (i.e. LANs of different type).
They operate in the physical, data link and network layers. They contain software that enable them to determine
which of the several possible paths is the best for a particular transmission.
Gateways:
They relay packets among networks that have different protocols (e.g. between a LAN and a
WAN). They accept a packet formatted for one protocol and convert it to a packet formatted for another protocol
before forwarding it. They operate in all seven layers of the OSI model.

26. What is ICMP?

ICMP is Internet Control Message Protocol, a network layer protocol of the TCP/IP suite used by hosts
and gateways to send notification of datagram problems back to the sender. It uses the echo test / reply to test
whether a destination is reachable and responding. It also handles both control and error messages.

27. What are the data units at different layers of the TCP / IP protocol suite?
The data unit created at the application layer is called a message, at the transport layer the data unit
created is called either a segment or an user datagram, at the network layer the data unit created is called the
datagram, at the data link layer the datagram is encapsulated in to a frame and finally transmitted as signals along
the transmission media.

28. What is difference between ARP and RARP?

The address resolution protocol (ARP) is used to associate the 32 bit IP address with the 48 bit physical
address, used by a host or a router to find the physical address of another host on its network by sending a ARP
query packet that includes the IP address of the receiver.
The reverse address resolution protocol (RARP) allows a host to discover its Internet address when it
knows only its physical address.

29. What is the minimum and maximum length of the header in the TCP segment and IP datagram?
The header should have a minimum length of 20 bytes and can have a maximum length of 60 bytes.

30. What is the range of addresses in the classes of internet addresses?

Class A 0.0.0.0 - 127.255.255.255
Class B 128.0.0.0 - 191.255.255.255
Class C 192.0.0.0 - 223.255.255.255
Class D 224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255
Class E 240.0.0.0 - 247.255.255.255

31. What is the difference between TFTP and FTP application layer protocols?
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) allows a local host to obtain files from a remote host but does
not provide reliability or security. It uses the fundamental packet delivery services offered by UDP.
The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is the standard mechanism provided by TCP / IP for copying a file from
one host to another. It uses the services offer by TCP and so is reliable and secure. It establishes two connections
(virtual circuits) between the hosts, one for data transfer and another for control information.

32. What are major types of networks and explain?

 Server-based network
 Peer-to-peer network
Peer-to-peer network, computers can act as both servers sharing resources and as clients using the
resources.
Server-based networks provide centralized control of network resources and rely on server computers to
provide security and network administration

33. What are the important topologies for networks?

 BUS topology:
In this each computer is directly connected to primary network cable in a single line.
Advantages:
Inexpensive, easy to install, simple to understand, easy to extend.

 STAR topology:

93
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

In this all computers are connected using a central hub.

Advantages:
Can be inexpensive, easy to install and reconfigure and easy to trouble shoot physical
problems.

 RING topology:
In this all computers are connected in loop.
Advantages:
All computers have equal access to network media, installation can be simple, and signal does
not degrade as much as in other topologies because each computer regenerates it.

34. What is mesh network?

A network in which there are multiple network links between computers to provide multiple paths for
data to travel.

35. What is difference between baseband and broadband transmission?

In a baseband transmission, the entire bandwidth of the cable is consumed by a single signal. In
broadband transmission, signals are sent on multiple frequencies, allowing multiple signals to be sent
simultaneously.

36. Explain 5-4-3 rule?

In a Ethernet network, between any two points on the network ,there can be no more than five network
segments or four repeaters, and of those five segments only three of segments can be populated.

37. What MAU?

In token Ring , hub is called Multistation Access Unit(MAU).

38. What is the difference between routable and non- routable protocols?
Routable protocols can work with a router and can be used to build large networks. Non-Routable
protocols are designed to work on small, local networks and cannot be used with a router

39. Why should you care about the OSI Reference Model?
It provides a framework for discussing network operations and design.

40. What is logical link control?

One of two sublayers of the data link layer of OSI reference model, as defined by the IEEE 802 standard.
This sublayer is responsible for maintaining the link between computers when they are sending data across the
physical network connection.

41. What is virtual channel?

Virtual channel is normally a connection from one source to one destination, although multicast
connections are also permitted. The other name for virtual channel is virtual circuit.

42. What is virtual path?

Along any transmission path from a given source to a given destination, a group of virtual circuits can be
grouped together into what is called path.

43. What is packet filter?

Packet filter is a standard router equipped with some extra functionality. The extra functionality allows
every incoming or outgoing packet to be inspected. Packets meeting some criterion are forwarded normally. Those
that fail the test are dropped.

44. What is traffic shaping?

One of the main causes of congestion is that traffic is often busy. If hosts could be made to transmit at a
uniform rate, congestion would be less common. Another open loop method to help manage congestion is forcing
the packet to be transmitted at a more predictable rate. This is called traffic shaping.

45. What is multicast routing?

Sending a message to a group is called multicasting, and its routing algorithm is called multicast routing.

46. What is region?

When hierarchical routing is used, the routers are divided into what we will call regions, with each router
knowing all the details about how to route packets to destinations within its own region, but knowing nothing
about the internal structure of other regions.

47. What is silly window syndrome?

94
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

It is a problem that can ruin TCP performance. This problem occurs when data are passed to the sending
TCP entity in large blocks, but an interactive application on the receiving side reads 1 byte at a time.

48. What are Digrams and Trigrams?

The most common two letter combinations are called as digrams. e.g. th, in, er, re and an. The most
common three letter combinations are called as trigrams. e.g. the, ing, and, and ion.

49. Expand IDEA.

IDEA stands for International Data Encryption Algorithm.

50. What is wide-mouth frog?

Wide-mouth frog is the simplest known key distribution center (KDC) authentication protocol.

51. What is Mail Gateway?

It is a system that performs a protocol translation between different electronic mail delivery protocols.

52. What is IGP (Interior Gateway Protocol)?

It is any routing protocol used within an autonomous system.

53. What is EGP (Exterior Gateway Protocol)?

It is the protocol the routers in neighboring autonomous systems use to identify the set of networks that
can be reached within or via each autonomous system.

54. What is autonomous system?

It is a collection of routers under the control of a single administrative authority and that uses a common
Interior Gateway Protocol.

55. What is BGP (Border Gateway Protocol)?

It is a protocol used to advertise the set of networks that can be reached with in an autonomous system.
BGP enables this information to be shared with the autonomous system. This is newer than EGP (Exterior
Gateway Protocol).

56. What is Gateway-to-Gateway protocol?

It is a protocol formerly used to exchange routing information between Internet core routers.

57. What is NVT (Network Virtual Terminal)?

It is a set of rules defining a very simple virtual terminal interaction. The NVT is used in the start of a
Telnet session.

58. What is a Multi-homed Host?

It is a host that has a multiple network interfaces and that requires multiple IP addresses is called as a
Multi-homed Host.

59. What is Kerberos?

It is an authentication service developed at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Kerberos uses
encryption to prevent intruders from discovering passwords and gaining unauthorized access to files.

60. What is OSPF?

It is an Internet routing protocol that scales well, can route traffic along multiple paths, and uses
knowledge of an Internet's topology to make accurate routing decisions.

61. What is Proxy ARP?

It is using a router to answer ARP requests. This will be done when the originating host believes that a
destination is local, when in fact is lies beyond router.

62. What is SLIP (Serial Line Interface Protocol)?

It is a very simple protocol used for transmission of IP datagrams across a serial line.

63. What is RIP (Routing Information Protocol)?

It is a simple protocol used to exchange information between the routers.

64. What is source route?

It is a sequence of IP addresses identifying the route a datagram must follow. A source route may
optionally be included in an IP datagram header.

95
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

7 Operating System

Following are a few basic questions that cover the essentials of OS:

1. Describe the Buddy system of memory allocation.

Free memory is maintained in linked lists, each of equal sized blocks. Any such block is of size 2^k.
When some memory is required by a process, the block size of next higher order is chosen, and broken into two.
Note that the two such pieces differ in address only in their kth bit. Such pieces are called buddies. When any used
block is freed, the OS checks to see if its buddy is also free. If so, it is rejoined, and put into the original free-block
linked-list.

2. What is time-stamping?
It is a technique proposed by Lamport, used to order events in a distributed system without the use of
clocks. This scheme is intended to order events consisting of the transmission of messages. Each system 'i' in the
network maintains a counter Ci. Every time a system transmits a message, it increments its counter by 1 and
attaches the time-stamp Ti to the message. When a message is received, the receiving system 'j' sets its counter Cj
to 1 more than the maximum of its current value and the incoming time-stamp Ti. At each site, the ordering of
messages is determined by the following rules: For messages x from site i and y from site j, x precedes y if one of
the following conditions holds....(a) if Ti<Tj or (b) if Ti=Tj and i<j.

3. How are the wait/signal operations for monitor different from those for semaphores?
If a process in a monitor signal and no task is waiting on the condition variable, the signal is lost. So this
allows easier program design. Whereas in semaphores, every operation affects the value of the semaphore, so the
wait and signal operations should be perfectly balanced in the program.

4. In the context of memory management, what are placement and replacement algorithms?
Placement algorithms determine where in available real-memory to load a program. Common methods
are first-fit, next-fit, best-fit. Replacement algorithms are used when memory is full, and one process (or part of a
process) needs to be swapped out to accommodate a new program. The replacement algorithm determines which
are the partitions to be swapped out.

5. In loading programs into memory, what is the difference between load-time dynamic linking and run-time
dynamic linking?
For load-time dynamic linking: Load module to be loaded is read into memory. Any reference to a target
external module causes that module to be loaded and the references are updated to a relative address from the start
base address of the application module.
With run-time dynamic loading: Some of the linking is postponed until actual reference during
execution. Then the correct module is loaded and linked.

6. What are demand- and pre-paging?

With demand paging, a page is brought into memory only when a location on that page is actually
referenced during execution. With pre-paging, pages other than the one demanded by a page fault are brought in.
The selection of such pages is done based on common access patterns, especially for secondary memory devices.

7. Paging a memory management function, while multiprogramming a processor management function, are
the two interdependent?
Yes.

8. What is page cannibalizing?

Page swapping or page replacements are called page cannibalizing.

9. What has triggered the need for multitasking in PCs?

 Increased speed and memory capacity of microprocessors together with the support fir virtual memory and
 Growth of client server computing

96
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

10. What are the four layers that Windows NT have in order to achieve independence?
 Hardware abstraction layer
 Kernel
 Subsystems
 System Services.

11. What is SMP?

To achieve maximum efficiency and reliability a mode of operation known as symmetric
multiprocessing is used. In essence, with SMP any process or threads can be assigned to any processor.

12. What are the key object oriented concepts used by Windows NT?
 Encapsulation
 Object class and instance

13. Is Windows NT a full blown object oriented operating system? Give reasons.
No Windows NT is not so, because its not implemented in object oriented language and the data
structures reside within one executive component and are not represented as objects and it does not support object
oriented capabilities .

14. What is a drawback of MVT?

It does not have the features like
 ability to support multiple processors
 virtual storage
 source level debugging

15. What is process spawning?

When the OS at the explicit request of another process creates a process, this action is called process
spawning.

16. How many jobs can be run concurrently on MVT?

15 jobs

17. List out some reasons for process termination.

 Normal completion
 Time limit exceeded
 Memory unavailable
 Bounds violation
 Protection error
 Arithmetic error
 Time overrun
 I/O failure
 Invalid instruction
 Privileged instruction
 Data misuse
 Operator or OS intervention
 Parent termination.

18. What are the reasons for process suspension?

 swapping
 interactive user request
 timing
 parent process request

19. What is process migration?

It is the transfer of sufficient amount of the state of process from one machine to the target machine

20. What is mutant?

In Windows NT a mutant provides kernel mode or user mode mutual exclusion with the notion of
ownership.

21. What is an idle thread?

The special thread a dispatcher will execute when no ready thread is found.

22. What is FtDisk?

It is a fault tolerance disk driver for Windows NT.

97
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

23. What are the possible threads a thread can have?

 Ready
 Standby
 Running
 Waiting
 Transition
 Terminated.

24. What are rings in Windows NT?

Windows NT uses protection mechanism called rings provides by the process to implement separation
between the user mode and kernel mode.

25. What is Executive in Windows NT?

In Windows NT, executive refers to the operating system code that runs in kernel mode.

26. What are the sub-components of I/O manager in Windows NT?

 Network redirector/ Server
 Cache manager.
 File systems
 Network driver
 Device driver

27. What are DDks? Name an operating system that includes this feature.
DDks are device driver kits, which are equivalent to SDKs for writing device drivers. Windows NT
includes DDks.

28. What level of security does Windows NT meets?

C2 level security.

What is multi tasking, multi programming, multi threading?

Multi programming: Multiprogramming is the technique of running several programs at a time using
timesharing. It allows a computer to do several things at the same time.

Multiprogramming creates logical parallelism. The concept of multiprogramming is that the operating
system keeps several jobs in memory simultaneously. The operating system selects a job from the job pool and
starts executing a job, when that job needs to wait for any i/o operations the CPU is switched to another job. So the
main idea here is that the CPU is never idle. Multi tasking: Multitasking is the logical extension of
multiprogramming .

The concept of multitasking is quite similar to multiprogramming but difference is that the switching
between jobs occurs so frequently that the users can interact with each program while it is running.

This concept is also known as time-sharing systems. A time-shared operating system uses CPU
scheduling and multiprogramming to provide each user with a small portion of time-shared system.

Multi threading: An application typically is implemented as a separate process with several threads of
control. In some situations a single application may be required to perform several similar tasks for example a web
server accepts client requests for web pages, images, sound, and so forth.

A busy web server may have several of clients concurrently accessing it. If the web server ran as a
traditional single-threaded process, it would be able to service only one client at a time.

The amount of time that a client might have to wait for its request to be serviced could be enormous. So
it is efficient to have one process that contains multiple threads to serve the same purpose.

This approach would multithread the web-server process, the server would create a separate thread that
would listen for client requests when a request was made rather than creating another process it would create
another thread to service the request.

To get the advantages like responsiveness, Resource sharing economy and utilization of multiprocessor
architectures multithreading concept can be used.

What is hard disk and what is its purpose?

 Hard disk is the secondary storage device, which holds the data in bulk, and it holds the data on the
magnetic medium of the disk.

98
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Hard disks have a hard platter that holds the magnetic medium, the magnetic medium can be easily
erased and rewritten, and a typical desktop machine will have a hard disk with a capacity of between 10 and 40
gigabytes.

Data is stored onto the disk in the form of files.

What is fragmentation? Different types of fragmentation?

Fragmentation occurs in a dynamic memory allocation system when many of the free blocks are too
small to satisfy any request.

External Fragmentation: External Fragmentation happens when a dynamic memory allocation algorithm
allocates some memory and a small piece is left over that cannot be effectively used.

If too much external fragmentation occurs, the amount of usable memory is drastically reduced. Total
memory space exists to satisfy a request, but it is not contiguous.

Internal Fragmentation: Internal fragmentation is the space wasted inside of allocated memory blocks
because of restriction on the allowed sizes of allocated blocks.

Allocated memory may be slightly larger than requested memory; this size difference is memory internal
to a partition, but not being used

What is DRAM? In which form does it store data?

DRAM is not the best, but it’s cheap, does the job, and is available almost everywhere you look. DRAM
data resides in a cell made of a capacitor and a transistor.

The capacitor tends to lose data unless it’s recharged every couple of milliseconds, and this recharging
tends to slow down the performance of DRAM compared to speedier RAM types.

What is Dispatcher?

Dispatcher module gives control of the CPU to the process selected by the short-term scheduler; this
involves:

Switching context, Switching to user mode, Jumping to the proper location in the user program to restart
that program, dispatch latency – time it takes for the dispatcher to stop one process and start another running.

What is CPU Scheduler?

Selects from among the processes in memory that are ready to execute, and allocates the CPU to one of
them.

CPU scheduling decisions may take place when a process: 1.Switches from running to waiting state.
2.Switches from running to ready state. 3.Switches from waiting to ready. 4.Terminates. Scheduling under 1 and 4
is non-preemptive. All other scheduling is preemptive.

What is Context Switch?

Switching the CPU to another process requires saving the state of the old process and loading the saved
state for the new process.

This task is known as a context switch. Context-switch time is pure overhead, because the system does
no useful work while switching.

Its speed varies from machine to machine, depending on the memory speed, the number of registers
which must be copied, the existed of special instructions(such as a single instruction to load or store all registers).

What is cache memory?

Cache memory is random access memory (RAM) that a computer microprocessor can access more
quickly than it can access regular RAM.

99
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

As the microprocessor processes data, it looks first in the cache memory and if it finds the data there
(from a previous reading of data), it does not have to do the more time-consuming reading of data from larger
memory.

What is a Safe State and what is its use in deadlock avoidance?

When a process requests an available resource, system must decide if immediate allocation leaves the
system in a safe state. System is in safe state if there exists a safe sequence of all processes.

Deadlock Avoidance: ensure that a system will never enter an unsafe state.

What is a Real-Time System?

A real time process is a process that must respond to the events within a certain time period.

A real time operating system is an operating system that can run real time processes successfully

What's OPERATING SYSTEM?

An Operating System, or OS, is a software program that enables the computer hardware to communicate
and operate with the computer software. Without a computer Operating System, a computer would be useless.

OPERATING SYSTEM TYPES

As computers have progressed and developed so have the types of operating systems. Below is a basic
list of the different types of operating systems and a few examples of Operating Systems that fall into each of the
categories. Many computer Operating Systems will fall into more than one of the below categories.
GUI –

Short for Graphical User Interface, a GUI Operating System contains graphics and icons and is
commonly navigated by using a computer mouse. See our GUI dictionary definition for a complete definition.
Below are some examples of GUI Operating Systems. System 7.x,Windows 98, Windows CE .

Multi-user

A multi-user Operating System allows for multiple users to use the same computer at the same time
and/or different times. See our multi-user dictionary definition for a complete definition for a complete definition.
Below are some examples of multi-user Operating Systems.
Linux
Unix
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Mac OS X

Multiprocessing – An Operating System capable of supporting and utilizing more than one computer processor.
Below are some examples of multiprocessing Operating Systems.

Linux
Unix
Windows 2000
Windows XP Mac OS X

What are the basic functions of an operating system?

- Operating system controls and coordinates the use of the hardware among the various applications programs for
various uses. Operating system acts as resource allocator and manager. Since there are many possibly conflicting
requests for resources the operating system must decide which requests are allocated resources to operating the
computer system efficiently and fairly. Also operating system is control program which controls the user programs
to prevent errors and improper use of the computer. It is especially concerned with the operation and control of I/O
devices.

Why paging is used?

Paging is solution to external fragmentation problem which is to permit the logical address space of a
process to be noncontiguous, thus allowing a process to be allocating physical memory wherever the latter is
available.

100
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

While running DOS on a PC, which command would be used to duplicate the entire diskette?
diskcopy

What resources are used when a thread created? How do they differ from those when a process is created?

When a thread is created the threads does not require any new resources to execute the thread shares the
resources like memory of the process to which they belong to. The benefit of code sharing is that it allows an
application to have several different threads of activity all within the same address space. Whereas if a new process
creation is very heavyweight because it always requires new address space to be created and even if they share the
memory then the inter process communication is expensive when compared to the communication between the
threads.

What is virtual memory?

Virtual memory is hardware technique where the system appears to have more memory that it actually
does. This is done by time-sharing, the physical memory and storage parts of the memory one disk when they are
not actively being used.

What is Throughput, Turnaround time, waiting time and Response time?

Throughput – number of processes that complete their execution per time unit. Turnaround time – amount of time
to execute a particular process. Waiting time – amount of time a process has been waiting in the ready queue.
Response time – amount of time it takes from when a request was submitted until the first response is produced,
not output (for time-sharing environment).

What is the state of the processor, when a process is waiting for some event to occur?
Waiting state

What is the important aspect of a real-time system or Mission Critical Systems?

A real time operating system has well defined fixed time constraints. Process must be done within the
defined constraints or the system will fail. An example is the operating system for a flight control computer or an
advanced jet airplane. Often used as a control device in a dedicated application such as controlling scientific
experiments, medical imaging systems, industrial control systems, and some display systems. Real-Time systems
may be either hard or soft real-time. Hard real-time: Secondary storage limited or absent, data stored in short term
memory, or read-only memory (ROM), Conflicts with time-sharing systems, not supported by general-purpose
operating systems. Soft real-time: Limited utility in industrial control of robotics, Useful in applications
(multimedia, virtual reality) requiring advanced operating-system features.

What is the difference between Hard and Soft real-time systems?

A hard real-time system guarantees that critical tasks complete on time. This goal requires that all delays
in the system be bounded from the retrieval of the stored data to the time that it takes the operating system to finish
any request made of it. A soft real time system where a critical real-time task gets priority over other tasks and
retains that priority until it completes. As in hard real time systems kernel delays need to be bounded

1.When is a system in safe state?

The set of dispatchable processes is in a safe state if there exists at least one temporal order in which all
processes can be run to completion without resulting in a deadlock.

2. What is cycle stealing?

We encounter cycle stealing in the context of Direct Memory Access (DMA). Either the DMA controller
can use the data bus when the CPU does not need it, or it may force the CPU to temporarily suspend operation.
The latter technique is called cycle stealing. Note that cycle stealing can be done only at specific break points in an
instruction cycle.

3. What is meant by arm-stickiness?

If one or a few processes have a high access rate to data on one track of a storage disk, then they may
monopolize the device by repeated requests to that track. This generally happens with most common device
scheduling algorithms (LIFO, SSTF, C-SCAN, etc). High-density multisurface disks are more likely to be affected
by this than low density ones.

4. What are the stipulations of C2 level security?

C2 level security provides for:

> Discretionary Access Control

101
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

> Identification and Authentication

> Auditing
> Resource reuse

5. What is busy waiting?

The repeated execution of a loop of code while waiting for an event to occur is called busy-waiting. The
CPU is not engaged in any real productive activity during this period, and the process does not progress toward
completion.

6. What are short-, long- and medium-term scheduling?

Long term scheduler determines which programs are admitted to the system for processing. It controls
the degree of multiprogramming. Once admitted, a job becomes a process.

Medium term scheduling is part of the swapping function. This relates to processes that are in a
blocked or suspended state. They are swapped out of real-memory until they are ready to execute. The swapping-in
decision is based on memory-management criteria.

Short term scheduler, also know as a dispatcher executes most frequently, and makes the finest-grained
decision of which process should execute next. This scheduler is invoked whenever an event occurs. It may lead to
interruption of one process by preemption..

7. What are turnaround time and response time?

Turnaround time is the interval between the submission of a job and its completion. Response time is the interval
between submission of a request, and the first response to that request.

8. What are the typical elements of a process image?

> User data: Modifiable part of user space. May include program data, user stack area, and programs that may be
modified.
> User program: The instructions to be executed.
> System Stack: Each process has one or more LIFO stacks associated with it. Used to store parameters and calling
addresses for procedure and system calls.
> Process control Block (PCB): Info needed by the OS to control processes.

9. What is the Translation Lookaside Buffer (TLB)?

In a cached system, the base addresses of the last few referenced pages is maintained in registers called
the TLB that aids in faster lookup. TLB contains those page-table entries that have been most recently used.
Normally, each virtual memory reference causes 2 physical memory accesses-- one to fetch appropriate page-table
entry, and one to fetch the desired data. Using TLB in-between, this is reduced to just one physical memory access
in cases of TLB-hit.

10. What is the resident set and working set of a process?

Resident set is that portion of the process image that is actually in real-memory at a particular instant.
Working set is that subset of resident set that is actually needed for execution. (Relate this to the variable-window
size method for swapping techniques.)

11. Explain the concept of Reentrancy.

It is a useful, memory-saving technique for multiprogrammed timesharing systems. A Reentrant

Procedure is one in which multiple users can share a single copy of a program during the same period. Reentrancy
has 2 key aspects: The program code cannot modify itself, and the local data for each user process must be stored
separately.

Thus, the permanent part is the code, and the temporary part is the pointer back to the calling program
and local variables used by that program. Each execution instance is called activation. It executes the code in the
permanent part, but has its own copy of local variables/parameters.

The temporary part associated with each activation is the activation record. Generally, the activation
record is kept on the stack.
Note: A reentrant procedure can be interrupted and called by an interrupting program, and still execute correctly on
returning to the procedure.

12. Explain Belady's Anomaly.

102
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Also called FIFO anomaly. Usually, on increasing the number of frames allocated to a process' virtual
memory, the process execution is faster, because fewer page faults occur. Sometimes, the reverse happens, i.e., the
execution time increases even when more frames are allocated to the process. This is Belady's Anomaly. This is
true for certain page reference patterns.

13. What is a binary semaphore? What is its use?

A binary semaphore is one, which takes only 0 and 1 as values. They are used to implement mutual
exclusion and synchronize concurrent processes.

14. What is thrashing?

It is a phenomenon in virtual memory schemes when the processor spends most of its time swapping
pages, rather than executing instructions. This is due to an inordinate number of page faults.

Cause of thrashing? How does the system detect thrashing?

Once it detects thrashing, what can the system do to eliminate this problem? - Thrashing is caused by
under allocation of the minimum number of pages required by a process, forcing it to continuously page fault. The
system can detect thrashing by evaluating the level of CPU utilization as compared to the level of
multiprogramming. It can be eliminated by reducing the level of multiprogramming.

15. List the Coffman's conditions that lead to a deadlock.

> Mutual Exclusion: Only one process may use a critical resource at a time.
> Hold & Wait: A process may be allocated some resources while waiting for others.
> No Pre-emption: No resource can be forcible removed from a process holding it.
> Circular Wait: A closed chain of processes exist such that each process holds at least one resource needed by
another process in the chain.

16. Explain the popular multiprocessor thread-scheduling strategies.

> Load Sharing: Processes are not assigned to a particular processor. A global queue of threads is maintained.
Each processor, when idle, selects a thread from this queue. Note that load balancing refers to a scheme where
work is allocated to processors on a more permanent basis.

> Gang Scheduling: A set of related threads is scheduled to run on a set of processors at the same time, on a 1-to-
1 basis. Closely related threads / processes may be scheduled this way to reduce synchronization blocking, and
minimize process switching. Group scheduling predated this strategy.

> Dedicated processor assignment: Provides implicit scheduling defined by assignment of threads to processors.
For the duration of program execution, each program is allocated a set of processors equal in number to the
number of threads in the program. Processors are chosen from the available pool.

> Dynamic scheduling: The number of thread in a program can be altered during the course of execution.

17. When does the condition 'rendezvous' arise?

In message passing, it is the condition in which, both, the sender and receiver are blocked until the
message is delivered.

18. What is a trap and trapdoor?

Trapdoor is a secret undocumented entry point into a program used to grant access without normal
methods of access authentication. A trap is a software interrupt, usually the result of an error condition.

19. What are local and global page replacements?

Local replacement means that an incoming page is brought in only to the relevant process' address space.
Global replacement policy allows any page frame from any process to be replaced. The latter is applicable to
variable partitions model only.

20. Define latency, transfer and seek time with respect to disk I/O.

Seek time is the time required to move the disk arm to the required track. Rotational delay or latency is
the time it takes for the beginning of the required sector to reach the head. Sum of seek time (if any) and latency is
the access time. Time taken to actually transfer a span of data is transfer time.

103
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

8 Data Structures

1)What is data structure?

A data structure is a way of organizing data that considers not only the items stored, but also their
relationship to each other. Advance knowledge about the relationship between data items allows designing of
efficient algorithms for the manipulation of data.

2)List out the areas in which data structures are applied extensively?

Compiler Design, Operating System, Database Management System, Statistical analysis package,
Numerical Analysis, Graphics, Artificial Intelligence, Simulation

3)If you are using C language to implement the heterogeneous linked list, what pointer type will you use?

The heterogeneous linked list contains different data types in its nodes and we need a link, pointer to
connect them. It is not possible to use ordinary pointers for this. So we go for void pointer. Void pointer is capable
of storing pointer to any type as it is a generic pointer type.

4)What is the data structures used to perform recursion?

Stack. Because of its LIFO (Last In First Out) property it remembers its caller, so knows whom to return
when the function has to return. Recursion makes use of system stack for storing the return addresses of the
function calls.

Every recursive function has its equivalent iterative (non-recursive) function. Even when such
equivalent iterative procedures are written, explicit stack is to be used.

5)What are the methods available in storing sequential files ?

Straight merging, Natural merging,  Polyphase sort, Distribution of Initial runs.

6)List out few of the Application of tree data-structure?

The manipulation of Arithmetic expression, Symbol Table construction, Syntax analysis.

7)In RDBMS, what is the efficient data structure used in the internal storage representation?

B+ tree. Because in B+ tree, all the data is stored only in leaf nodes, that makes searching easier. This
corresponds to the records that shall be stored in leaf nodes.

8)What is a spanning Tree?

A spanning tree is a tree associated with a network. All the nodes of the graph appear on the tree once. A
minimum spanning tree is a spanning tree organized so that the total edge weight between nodes is minimized.

9)Does the minimum spanning tree of a graph give the shortest distance between any 2 specified nodes?

Minimal spanning tree assures that the total weight of the tree is kept at its minimum. But it doesn't mean
that the distance between any two nodes involved in the minimum-spanning tree is minimum.

10)Whether Linked List is linear or Non-linear data structure?

104
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

According to Access strategies Linked list is a linear one. According to Storage Linked List is a Non-
linear one.

11)What is the quickest sorting method to use?

The answer depends on what you mean by quickest. For most sorting problems, it just doesn't matter
how quick the sort is because it is done infrequently or other operations take significantly more time anyway.

Even in cases in which sorting speed is of the essence, there is no one answer.

It depends on not only the size and nature of the data, but also the likely order. No algorithm is best in all
cases. There are three sorting methods in this author's toolbox that are all very fast and that are useful in different
situations. Those methods are quick sort, merge sort, and radix sort.

The Quick Sort

The quick sort algorithm is of the divide and conquer type. That means it works by reducing a sorting
problem into several easier sorting problems and solving each of them.

A dividing value is chosen from the input data, and the data is partitioned into three sets: elements that
belong before the dividing value, the value itself, and elements that come after the dividing value.

The partitioning is performed by exchanging elements that are in the first set but belong in the third with
elements that are in the third set but belong in the first Elements that are equal to the dividing element can be put in
any of the three sets the algorithm will still work properly.

The Merge Sort

The merge sort is a divide and conquer sort as well. It works by considering the data to be sorted as a
sequence of already-sorted lists (in the worst case, each list is one element long).

Adjacent sorted lists are merged into larger sorted lists until there is a single sorted list containing all the
elements.

The merge sort is good at sorting lists and other data structures that are not in arrays, and it can be used
to sort things that don't fit into memory. It also can be implemented as a stable sort.

The Radix Sort

The radix sort takes a list of integers and puts each element on a smaller list, depending on the value of
its least significant byte.

Then the small lists are concatenated, and the process is repeated for each more significant byte until the
list is sorted. The radix sort is simpler to implement on fixed-length data such as ints.

12)How can I search for data in a linked list?

Unfortunately, the only way to search a linked list is with a linear search, because the only way a linked
list's members can be accessed is sequentially. Sometimes it is quicker to take the data from a linked list and store
it in a different data structure so that searches can be more efficient.

13)What is the heap?

The heap is where malloc(), calloc(), and realloc() get memory.

Getting memory from the heap is much slower than getting it from the stack. On the other hand, the heap
is much more flexible than the stack. Memory can be allocated at any time and deallocated in any order. Such
memory isn't deallocated automatically; you have to call free().

Recursive data structures are almost always implemented with memory from the heap. Strings often
come from there too, especially strings that could be very long at runtime.

If you can keep data in a local variable (and allocate it from the stack), your code will run faster than if
you put the data on the heap. Sometimes you can use a better algorithm if you use the heap faster, or more robust,
or more flexible. Its a tradeoff.

If memory is allocated from the heap, its available until the program ends. That's great if you remember
to deallocate it when you're done. If you forget, it's a problem.

105
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

A �memory leak is some allocated memory that's no longer needed but isn't deallocated. If you have a
memory leak inside a loop, you can use up all the memory on the heap and not be able to get any more. (When that
happens, the allocation functions return a null pointer.)

In some environments, if a program doesn't deallocate everything it allocated, memory stays unavailable
even after the program ends.

14)What is the easiest sorting method to use?

The answer is the standard library function qsort(). It's the easiest sort by far for several reasons:
It is already written.
It is already debugged.
It has been optimized as much as possible (usually).
Void qsort(void *buf, size_t num, size_t size, int (*comp)(const void *ele1, const void *ele2));

15)What is the bucket size, when the overlapping and collision occur at same time?

One. If there is only one entry possible in the bucket, when the collision occurs, there is no way to
accommodate the colliding value. This results in the overlapping of values.

16)In an AVL tree, at what condition the balancing is to be done?

If the pivotal value (or the Height factor) is greater than 1 or less than 1.

17)Minimum number of queues needed to implement the priority queue?

Two. One queue is used for actual storing of data and another for storing priorities.

19)What is a node class?

A node class is a class that, relies on the base class for services and   implementation, provides a wider
interface to users than its base class, relies primarily on virtual functions in its public interface depends on all its
direct and indirect base class can be understood only in the context of the base class can be used as base for further
derivationcan be used to create objects.

A node class is a class that has added new services or functionality beyond the services inherited from its
base class.

20)When can you tell that a memory leak will occur?

A memory leak occurs when a program loses the ability to free a block of dynamically allocated
memory.

21)What is placement new?

When you want to call a constructor directly, you use the placement new. Sometimes you have some raw
memory that’s already been allocated, and you need to construct an object in the memory you have. Operator
new’s special version placement new allows you to do it.
class Widget
{
public :
Widget(int widgetsize);
…
Widget* Construct_widget_int_buffer(void *buffer,int widgetsize)
{
return new(buffer) Widget(widgetsize);
}
};

This function returns a pointer to a Widget object that’s constructed within the buffer passed to the
function. Such a function might be useful for applications using shared memory or memory-mapped I/O, because
objects in such applications must be placed at specific addresses or in memory allocated by special routines.

26)Tell how to check whether a linked list is circular ?

Create two pointers, each set to the start of the list. Update each as follows:

while (pointer1)

106
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

{
pointer1 = pointer1->next;
pointer2 = pointer2->next; if (pointer2) pointer2=pointer2->next;
if (pointer1 == pointer2)

??????{
print (\”circular\n\”);
}
}

27)What is the difference between ARRAY and STACK?

STACK follows LIFO. Thus the item that is first entered would be the last removed.

In array the items can be entered or removed in any order. Basically each member access is done using
index. No strict order is to be followed here to remove a particular element.

28)What is the difference between NULL AND VOID pointer?

NULL can be value for pointer type variables.

VOID is a type identifier which has not size.
NULL and void are not same. Example: void* ptr = NULL;

29)What is precision?

Precision refers the accuracy of the decimal portion of a value. Precision is the number of digits allowed
after the decimal point.

30)What is impact of signed numbers on the memory?

Sign of the number is the first bit of the storage allocated for that number. So you get one bit less for
storing the number. For example if you are storing an 8-bit number, without sign, the range is 0-255. If you decide
to store sign you get 7 bits for the number plus one bit for the sign. So the range is -128 to +127.

31)How memory is reserved using a declaration statement ?

Memory is reserved using data type in the variable declaration. A programming language
implementation has predefined sizes for its data types.

For example, in C# the declaration int i; will reserve 32 bits for variable i.

A pointer declaration reserves memory for the address or the pointer variable, but not for the data that it
will point to. The memory for the data pointed by a pointer has to be allocated at runtime.

The memory reserved by the compiler for simple variables and for storing pointer address is allocated on
the stack, while the memory allocated for pointer referenced data at runtime is allocated on the heap.

32)How many parts are there in a declaration statement?

There are two main parts, variable identifier and data type and the third type is optional which is type
qualifier like signed/unsigned.

33)Is Pointer a variable?

Yes, a pointer is a variable and can be used as an element of a structure and as an attribute of a class in
some programming languages such as C++, but not Java.

However, the contents of a pointer is a memory address of another location of memory, which is usually
the memory address of another variable, element of a structure, or attribute of a class.

35)What is significance of  ” * ” ?

The symbol “*” tells the computer that you are declaring a pointer.
Actually it depends on context.
In a statement like int *ptr; the ‘*’ tells that you are declaring a pointer.
In a statement like int i = *ptr; it tells that you want to assign value pointed to by ptr to variable i.

107
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

The symbol “*” is also called as Indirection Operator/ Dereferencing Operator.

36)Why do we Use a Multidimensional Array?

A multidimensional array can be useful to organize subgroups of data within an array. In addition to
organizing data stored in elements of an array, a multidimensional array can store memory addresses of data in a
pointer array and an array of pointers.

Multidimensional arrays are used to store information in a matrix form.

e.g. a railway timetable, schedule cannot be stored as a single dimensional array.
One can use a 3-D array for storing height, width and length of each room on each floor of a building.

37)How do you assign an address to an element of a pointer array ?

We can assign a memory address to an element of a pointer array by using the address operator, which is
the ampersand (&), in an assignment statement such as ptemployee[0] = &projects[2];

38)Run Time Memory Allocation is known as ?

Allocating memory at runtime is called a dynamically allocating memory. In this, you dynamically
allocate memory by using the new operator when declaring the array, for example : int grades[] = new int[10];

39)What method is used to place a value onto the top of a stack?

push() method, Push is the direction that data is being added to the stack. push() member method places
a value onto the top of a stack.

40)What method removes the value from the top of a stack?

The pop() member method removes the value from the top of a stack, which is then returned by the pop()
member method to the statement that calls the pop() member method.

41)What does isEmpty() member method determines?

isEmpty() checks if the stack has at least one element. This method is called by Pop() before retrieving
and returning the top element.

42)What is a queue ?

A Queue is a sequential organization of data. A queue is a first in first out type of data structure. An
element is inserted at the last position and an element is always taken out from the first position.

43)What is the relationship between a queue and its underlying array?

Data stored in a queue is actually stored in an array. Two indexes, front and end will be used to identify
the start and end of the queue.

When an element is removed front will be incremented by 1. In case it reaches past the last index
available it will be reset to 0. Then it will be checked with end. If it is greater than end queue is empty.

When an element is added end will be incremented by 1. In case it reaches past the last index available it
will be reset to 0. After incrementing it will be checked with front. If they are equal queue is full.

44)Which process places data at the back of the queue?

Enqueue is the process that places data at the back of the queue.

45)Why is the isEmpty() member method called?

The isEmpty() member method is called within the dequeue process to determine if there is an item in
the queue to be removed i.e. isEmpty() is called to decide whether the queue has at least one element. This method
is called by the dequeue() method before returning the front element.

46)How is the front of the queue calculated ?

The front of the queue is calculated by front = (front+1) % size.

108
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

47)What does each entry in the Link List called?

Each entry in a linked list is called a node. Think of a node as an entry that has three sub entries. One sub
entry contains the data, which may be one attribute or many attributes.

Another points to the previous node, and the last points to the next node. When you enter a new item on
a linked list, you allocate the new node and then set the pointers to previous and next nodes.

48)What is Linked List ?

Linked List is one of the fundamental data structures. It consists of a sequence of? nodes, each
containing arbitrary data fields and one or two (”links”) pointing to the next and/or previous nodes.

A linked list is a self-referential datatype because it contains a pointer or link to another data of the same
type. Linked lists permit insertion and removal of nodes at any point in the list in constant time, but do not allow
random access.

49)What member function places a new node at the end of the linked list?

The appendNode() member function places a new node at the end of the linked list. The appendNode()
requires an integer representing the current data of the node.

50)How is any Data Structure application is classified among files?

A linked list application can be organized into a header file, source file and main application file.

The first file is the header file that contains the definition of the NODE structure and the LinkedList
class definition.

The second file is a source code file containing the implementation of member functions of the
LinkedList class. The last file is the application file that contains code that creates and uses the LinkedList class.

51)Which file contains the definition of member functions?

Definitions of member functions for the Linked List class are contained in the LinkedList.cpp file.

52)What are the major data structures used in the following areas : RDBMS, Network data model &
Hierarchical data model.

1. RDBMS Array (i.e. Array of structures)

2. Network data model Graph
3. Hierarchical data model Trees.

53)Difference between calloc and malloc ?

malloc: allocate n bytes

calloc: allocate m times n bytes initialized to 0
55)List out the areas in which data structures are applied extensively?
 Compiler Design,
 Operating System,
 Database Management System,
 Statistical analysis package,
 Numerical Analysis,
 Graphics,
 Artificial Intelligence,
 Simulation

58)Minimum number of queues needed to implement the priority queue?

Two. One queue is used for actual storing of data and another for storing priorities.

59)What is the data structures used to perform recursion?

Stack. Because of its LIFO (Last In First Out) property it remembers its ‘caller’ so knows whom to
return when the function has to return. Recursion makes use of system stack for storing the return addresses of the
function calls.
Every recursive function has its equivalent iterative (non-recursive) function. Even when such equivalent
iterative procedures are written, explicit stack is to be used.

109
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

60)What are the notations used in Evaluation of Arithmetic Expressions using prefix and postfix forms?
Polish and Reverse Polish notations.

61)Convert the expression ((A + B) * C – (D – E) ^ (F + G)) to equivalent Prefix and Postfix notations.
Prefix Notation:
^ - * +ABC - DE + FG
Postfix Notation:
AB + C * DE - - FG + ^

62)Sorting is not possible by using which of the following methods?

(a) Insertion
(b) Selection
(c) Exchange
(d) Deletion

(d) Deletion.
Using insertion we can perform insertion sort, using selection we can perform selection sort, using
exchange we can perform the bubble sort (and other similar sorting methods). But no sorting method can be done
just using deletion.

63)A binary tree with 20 nodes has null branches?

21
Let us take a tree with 5 nodes (n=5) \

Null Branches

It will have only 6 (ie,5+1) null branches. In general,

A binary tree with n nodes has exactly n+1 null nodes.

64)What are the methods available in storing sequential files ?

 Straight merging,
 Natural merging,
 Polyphase sort,
 Distribution of Initial runs.

65)How many different trees are possible with 10 nodes ?

1014
For example, consider a tree with 3 nodes(n=3), it will have the maximum combination of 5 different (ie,
23 - 3 = 5) trees.

i ii iii iv v

In general:
If there are n nodes, there exist 2n-n different trees.

66)List out few of the Application of tree data-structure?

 The manipulation of Arithmetic expression,
 Symbol Table construction,

110
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

 Syntax analysis.

67)List out few of the applications that make use of Multilinked Structures?
 Sparse matrix,
 Index generation.

68)In tree construction which is the suitable efficient data structure?

(a) Array (b) Linked list (c) Stack (d) Queue (e) none

(b) Linked list

69)What is the type of the algorithm used in solving the 8 Queens problem?
Backtracking

70)In an AVL tree, at what condition the balancing is to be done?

If the ‘pivotal value’ (or the ‘Height factor’) is greater than 1 or less than –1.

71)What is the bucket size, when the overlapping and collision occur at same time?
One. If there is only one entry possible in the bucket, when the collision occurs, there is no way to
accommodate the colliding value. This results in the overlapping of values.

72)Traverse the given tree using Inorder, Preorder and Postorder traversals.

Given tree:
A

B C

D E F G

H I J
 Inorder : DHBEAFCIGJ
 Preorder: ABDHECFGIJ
 Postorder: HDEBFIJGCA

73)There are 8, 15, 13, 14 nodes were there in 4 different trees. Which of them could have formed a full
binary tree?
15.
In general:
There are 2n-1 nodes in a full binary tree.
By the method of elimination:
Full binary trees contain odd number of nodes. So there cannot be full binary trees with 8 or 14
nodes, so rejected. With 13 nodes you can form a complete binary tree but not a full binary tree. So the correct
answer is 15.
Note:
Full and Complete binary trees are different. All full binary trees are complete binary trees but not vice
versa.
1
74)In the given binary tree, using array you can store the node 4 at which location?

2 3

4
111

5
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

At location 6

1 2 3 - - 4 - - 5

Root LC1 RC1 LC2 RC2 LC3 RC3 LC4 RC4

where LCn means Left Child of node n and RCn means Right Child of node n

75)Sort the given values using Quick Sort?

65 70 75 80 85 60 55 50 45

Sorting takes place from the pivot value, which is the first value of the given elements, this is marked
bold. The values at the left pointer and right pointer are indicated using L and R respectively.

65 70L 75 80 85 60 55 50 45R

Since pivot is not yet changed the same process is continued after interchanging the values at L and R positions

65 45 75 L 80 85 60 55 50 R 70

65 45 50 80 L 85 60 55 R 75 70

65 45 50 55 85 L 60 R 80 75 70

65 45 50 55 60 R 85 L 80 75 70

When the L and R pointers cross each other the pivot value is interchanged with the value at right pointer. If the
pivot is changed it means that the pivot has occupied its original position in the sorted order (shown in bold italics)
and hence two different arrays are formed, one from start of the original array to the pivot position-1 and the other
from pivot position+1 to end.

60 L 45 50 55 R 65 85 L 80 75 70 R

55 L 45 50 R 60 65 70 R 80 L 75 85

50 L 45 R 55 60 65 70 80 L 75 R 85

In the next pass we get the sorted form of the array.

45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85

76)For the given graph, draw the DFS and BFS?

The given graph:

A

X H Y
E
G P M J 112
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

 BFS: AXGHPEMYJ

 DFS: AXHPEYMJG

77)Classify the Hashing Functions based on the various methods by which the key value is found.
 Direct method,
 Subtraction method,
 Modulo-Division method,
 Digit-Extraction method,
 Mid-Square method,
 Folding method,
 Pseudo-random method.

78)What are the types of Collision Resolution Techniques and the methods used in each of the type?
 Open addressing (closed hashing),
The methods used include:
Overflow block,
 Closed addressing (open hashing)
The methods used include:
Linked list,
Binary tree…

79)In RDBMS, what is the efficient data structure used in the internal storage representation?
B+ tree. Because in B+ tree, all the data is stored only in leaf nodes, that makes searching easier. This
corresponds to the records that shall be stored in leaf nodes.

80)Draw the B-tree of order 3 created by inserting the following data arriving in sequence – 92 24 6 7 11
8 22 4 5 16 19 20 78

11 -

5 7 19 24

4 - 6 - 8 - 16 - 20 22 78 92

81)Of the following tree structure, which is, efficient considering space and time complexities?
(a) Incomplete Binary Tree
(b) Complete Binary Tree
(c) Full Binary Tree

(b) Complete Binary Tree.

By the method of elimination:
Full binary tree loses its nature when operations of insertions and deletions are done. For
incomplete binary trees, extra storage is required and overhead of NULL node checking takes place. So complete
binary tree is the better one since the property of complete binary tree is maintained even after operations like
additions and deletions are done on it.

84)Convert the given graph with weighted edges to minimal spanning tree.

600
1 3 200
612
410 310
2985 5
113
400
2 4
1421
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

the equivalent minimal spanning tree is:

1 3
200
410 612 310

2 4 5
85)Which is the simplest file structure?
(a) Sequential
(b) Indexed
(c) Random
(a) Sequential

87)Draw a binary Tree for the expression :

A * B - (C + D) * (P / Q)

* *

A B + /

C D P Q
88)For the following COBOL code, draw the Binary tree?

01 STUDENT_REC.
02 NAME.
03 FIRST_NAME PIC X(10).
03 LAST_NAME PIC X(10).

02 YEAR_OF_STUDY.
03 FIRST_SEM PIC XX.
03 SECOND_SEM PIC XX. 01
STUDENT_REC

02 02
NAME YEAR_OF_STUDY

114
03 03 03 03
FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME FIRST_SEM SECOND_SEM
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

89)What is a heap data structure?

The binary heap data structure is an array that can be viewed as a complete binary tree. Each node of the
binary tree corresponds to an element of the array. The array is completely filled on all levels except possibly
lowest.

90)Under what circumstances can one delete an element from a singly linked list in constant time?

If the list is circular and there are no references to the nodes in the list from anywhere else! Just copy the
contents of the next node and delete the next node. If the list is not circular, we can delete any but the last node
using this idea. In that case, mark the last node as dummy!

91)Given a singly linked list, determine whether it contains a loop or not.

(a) Start reversing the list. If you reach the head, there is a loop! But this changes the list. So, reverse the list
again.
(b) Maintain two pointers, initially pointing to the head. Advance one of them one node at a time. And the other
one, two nodes at a time. If the latter overtakes the former at any time, there is a loop!
p1 = p2 = head;

do {
p1 = p1->next;
p2 = p2->next->next;
} while (p1 != p2);
92)Given a singly linked list, print out its contents in reverse order. Can you do it without using any
extra space?

Start reversing the list. Do this again, printing the contents.

93)Reverse a singly linked list recursively. The function prototype is node * reverse (node *) ;
node * reverse (node * n)
{
node * m ;

if (! (n && n -> next))

return n ;

m = reverse (n -> next) ;

n -> next -> next = n ;
n -> next = NULL ;
return m ;
}
94). Given a singly linked list, find the middle of the list.

HINT. Use the single and double pointer jumping. Maintain two pointers, initially pointing to the head.
Advance one of them one node at a time. And the other one, two nodes at a time. When the double reaches the end,
the single is in the middle. This is not asymptotically faster but seems to take less steps than going through the list
twice.

JAVA
9 115
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

1.The Java interpreter is used for the execution of the source code.
True
False
Ans: a.

2) On successful compilation a file with the class extension is created.

a) True
b) False
Ans: a.

3) The Java source code can be created in a Notepad editor.

a) True
b) False
Ans: a.

4) The Java Program is enclosed in a class definition.

a) True
b) False
Ans: a.

5) What declarations are required for every Java application?

Ans: A class and the main( ) method declarations.

6) What are the two parts in executing a Java program and their purposes?
Ans: Two parts in executing a Java program are:
Java Compiler and Java Interpreter.
The Java Compiler is used for compilation and the Java Interpreter is used for execution of the application.

7) What are the three OOPs principles and define them?

Ans : Encapsulation, Inheritance and Polymorphism are the three OOPs
Principles.
Encapsulation:
Is the Mechanism that binds together code and the data it manipulates, and keeps both safe from outside
interference and misuse.
Inheritance:
Is the process by which one object acquires the properties of another object.
Polymorphism:
Is a feature that allows one interface to be used for a general class of actions.
  
8) What is a compilation unit?
Ans : Java source code file.

9) What output is displayed as the result of executing the following statement?

System.out.println("// Looks like a comment.");
// Looks like a comment
The statement results in a compilation error
Looks like a comment
No output is displayed
Ans : a.

10) In order for a source code file, containing the public class Test, to successfully compile, which of the following
must be true?
It must have a package statement
It must be named Test.java
It must import java.lang
It must declare a public class named Test
Ans : b

116
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

11) What are identifiers and what is naming convention?

Ans : Identifiers are used for class names, method names and variable names. An identifier may be any descriptive
sequence of upper case & lower case letters,numbers or underscore or dollar sign and must not begin with
numbers.

12) What is the return type of program’s main( ) method?

Ans : void

13) What is the argument type of program’s main( ) method?

Ans : string array.

14) Which characters are as first characters of an identifier?

Ans : A – Z, a – z, _ ,$

15) What are different comments?

Ans : 1) // -- single line comment
2) /* --
*/ multiple line comment
3) /** --
*/ documentation

16) What is the difference between constructor method and method?

Ans : Constructor will be automatically invoked when an object is created. Whereas method has to be call
explicitly.

17) What is the use of bin and lib in JDK?

Ans : Bin contains all tools such as javac, applet viewer, awt tool etc., whereas Lib
contains all packages and variables.

 Data types,variables and Arrays

1) What is meant by variable?

Ans: Variables are locations in memory that can hold values. Before assigning any value to a variable, it must be
declared.

2) What are the kinds of variables in Java? What are their uses?
Ans: Java has three kinds of variables namely, the instance variable, the local variable and the class variable.

Local variables are used inside blocks as counters or in methods as temporary variables and are used to
store information needed by a single method.
Instance variables are used to define attributes or the state of a particular object and are used to store
information needed by multiple methods in the objects.
Class variables are global to a class and to all the instances of the class and are useful for communicating between
different objects of all the same class or keeping track of global states.

3) How are the variables declared?

Ans: Variables can be declared anywhere in the method definition and can be initialized during their
declaration.They are commonly declared before usage at the beginning of the definition.
Variables with the same data type can be declared together. Local variables must be given a value before usage.

4) What are variable types?

Ans: Variable types can be any data type that java supports, which includes the eight primitive data types, the
name of a class or interface and an array.

6) What is a literal? How many types of literals are there?

Ans: A literal represents a value of a certain type where the type describes how that value behaves.
There are different types of literals namely number literals, character literals,
boolean literals, string literals,etc.
.
12) Strings are instances of the class String.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.

13) When a string literal is used in the program, Java automatically creates instances of the string class.
a)True
b)False

117
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Ans: a.

15) Which of the following declare an array of string objects?

String[ ] s;
String [ ]s:
String[ s]:
String s[ ]:
Ans : a, b and d

16) What is the value of a[3] as the result of the following array declaration?
1
2
3
4
Ans : d

17) Which of the following are primitive types?

byte
String
integer
Float
Ans : a.

18) What is the range of the char type?

0 to 216
0 to 215
0 to 216-1
0 to 215-1
Ans. D

19) What are primitive data types?

Ans : byte, short, int, long
float, double
boolean
char

20) What are default values of different primitive types?

Ans : int - 0
short - 0
byte - 0
long - 0 l
float - 0.0 f
double - 0.0 d
boolean - false
char – null

21) Converting of primitive types to objects can be explicitly.

a)True
b)False
Ans: b.

23) What is final varaible?

Ans : If a variable is declared as final variable, then you can not change its value. It becomes constant.

24) What is static variable?

Ans : Static variables are shared by all instances of a class.
 Operators
1) What are operators and what are the various types of operators available in Java?
Ans: Operators are special symbols used in expressions.
The following are the types of operators:
Arithmetic operators,
Assignment operators,
Increment & Decrement operators,
Logical operators,

118
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Biwise operators,
Comparison/Relational operators and
Conditional operators

3) Comparison/Logical operators are used for testing and magnitude.

a)True
b)False
Ans: a.

4) Character literals are stored as unicode characters.

a)True
b)False
Ans: a.

5) What are the Logical operators?

Ans: OR(|), AND(&), XOR(^) AND NOT(~).

6) What is the % operator?

Ans : % operator is the modulo operator or reminder operator. It returns the reminder of dividing the first operand
by second operand.

7) What is the value of 111 % 13?

3
5
7
9
Ans : c.

8) Is &&= a valid operator?

Ans : No.

9) Can a double value be cast to a byte?

Ans : Yes

10) Can a byte object be cast to a double value ?

Ans : No. An object cannot be cast to a primitive value.
11) What are order of precedence and associativity?
Ans : Order of precedence the order in which operators are evaluated in expressions.
Associativity determines whether an expression is evaluated left-right or right-left.

12) Which Java operator is right associativity?

Ans : = operator.

13) What is the difference between prefix and postfix of -- and ++ operators?
Ans : The prefix form returns the increment or decrement operation and returns the value of the increment or
decrement operation.
The postfix form returns the current value of all of the expression and then
performs the increment or decrement operation on that value.

14) What is the result of expression 5.45 + "3,2"?

The double value 8.6
The string ""8.6"
The long value 8.
The String "5.453.2"
Ans : d

15) What are the values of x and y ?

x = 5; y = ++x;
Ans : x = 6; y = 6

16) What are the values of x and z?

x = 5; z = x++; Ans : x = 6; z = 5

Control Statements

1) What are the programming constructs?

Ans: a) Sequential

119
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

b) Selection -- if and switch statements

c) Iteration -- for loop, while loop and do-while loop

2) class conditional {
public static void main(String args[]) {
int i = 20;
int j = 55;
int z = 0;
z = i < j ? i : j; // ternary operator
System.out.println("The value assigned is " + z);
}
}
What is output of the above program?
Ans: The value assigned is 20

3) The switch statement does not require a break.

a)True
b)False
Ans: b.
4) The conditional operator is otherwise known as the ternary operator.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.
Ans: a.

7) What are difference between break and continue?

Ans: The break keyword halts the execution of the current loop and forces control out of the loop.
The continue is similar to break, except that instead of halting the execution of the loop, it starts the next iteration.
 
 Introduction to Classes and Methods

1) Which is used to get the value of the instance variables?

Ans: Dot notation.

2) The new operator creates a single instance named class and returns a
reference to that object.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.

3) A class is a template for multiple objects with similar features.

a)True
b)False
Ans: a.

4) What is mean by garbage collection?

Ans: When an object is no longer referred to by any variable, Java automatically
reclaims memory used by that object. This is known as garbage collection.

5) What are methods and how are they defined?

Ans: Methods are functions that operate on instances of classes in which they are defined.Objects can
communicate with each other using methods and can call methods in other classes.

Method definition has four parts. They are name of the method, type of object or primitive type the method
returns, a list of parameters and the body of the method.
A method's signature is a combination of the first three parts mentioned above.

6) What is calling method?

Ans: Calling methods are similar to calling or referring to an instance variable. These methods are accessed using
dot notation.

Ex: obj.methodname(param1,param2)

7) Which method is used to determine the class of an object?

Ans: getClass( ) method can be used to find out what class the belongs to. This class is defined in the object class
and is available to all objects.
8) All the classes in java.lang package are automatically imported when

120
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

a program is compiled.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.

9) How can class be imported to a program?

Ans: To import a class, the import keyword should be used as shown.;
import classname;

10) How can class be imported from a package to a program?

Ans: import java . packagename . classname (or) import java.package name.*;

12) Which keyword is used to create an instance of a class?

Ans: new.

13) Which method is used to garbage collect an object?

Ans: finalize ().

14) Constructors can be overloaded like regular methods.

a)True
b)False
Ans: a.

15) What is casting?

Ans: Casting is bused to convert the value of one type to another.
16) Casting between primitive types allows conversion of one primitive type to another.
a)True
b)False
Ans: a.

17) Casting occurs commonly between numeric types.

a)True
b)False
Ans: a.

18) Boolean values can be cast into any other primitive type.
a)True
b)False
Ans: b.

19) Casting does not affect the original object or value.

a)True
b)False
Ans: a.

20) Which cast must be used to convert a larger value into a smaller one?
Ans: Explicit cast.

21) Which cast must be used to cast an object to another class?

Ans: Specific cast.

22) Which of the following features are common to both Java & C++?
A.The class declaration
b.The access modifiers
c.The encapsulation of data & methods with in objects
d.The use of pointers
Ans: a,b,c.

23) Which of the following statements accurately describe the use of access modifiers within a class definition?
a.They can be applied to both data & methods
b.They must precede a class's data variables or methods
c.They can follow a class's data variables or methods
d.They can appear in any order
e.They must be applied to data variables first and then to methods
Ans: a,b,d.

24) Suppose a given instance variable has been declared private.

121
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Can this instance variable be manipulated by methods out side its class?
a.yes
b.no
Ans: b.

25) Which of the following statements can be used to describe a public method?
a.It is accessible to all other classes in the hierarchy
b.It is accessablde only to subclasses of its parent class
c.It represents the public interface of its class
d.The only way to gain access to this method is by calling one of the public class
methods
Ans: a,c.

26) Which of the following types of class members can be part of the internal part of a class?
a.Public instance variables
b.Private instance variables
c.Public methods
d.Private methods
Ans: b,d.

27) You would use the ____ operator to create a single instance of a named class.
a.new
b.dot
Ans: a.

28) Which of the following statements correctly describes the relation between an object and the instance variable
it stores?
a.Each new object has its own distinctive set of instance variables
b.Each object has a copy of the instance variables of its class
c.the instance variable of each object are seperate from the variables of other objects
d.The instance variables of each object are stored together with the variables of other objects
Ans: a,b,c.

29) If no input parameters are specified in a method declaration then the declaration will include __.
a.an empty set of parantheses
b.the term void
Ans: a.

30) What are the functions of the dot(.) operator?

a.It enables you to access instance variables of any objects within a class
b.It enables you to store values in instance variables of an object
c.It is used to call object methods
d.It is to create a new object
Ans: a,b,c.

31) Which of the following can be referenced by this variable?

a.The instance variables of a class only
b.The methods of a class only
c.The instance variables and methods of a class
Ans: c.

32) The this reference is used in conjunction with ___methods.

a.static
b.non-static
Ans: b.

33) Which of the following operators are used in conjunction with the this and super references?
a.The new operator
b.The instanceof operator
c.The dot operator
Ans: c.

34) A constructor is automatically called when an object is instantiated

a. true
b. false
Ans: a.

122
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

35) When may a constructor be called without specifying arguments?

a. When the default constructor is not called
b. When the name of the constructor differs from that of the class
c. When there are no constructors for the class
Ans: c.

36) Each class in java can have a finalizer method

a. true
b.false
Ans: a.
37) When an object is referenced, does this mean that it has been identified by the finalizer method for garbage
collection?
a.yes
b.no
Ans: b.

38) Because finalize () belongs to the java.lang.Object class, it is present in all ___.
a.objects
b.classes
c.methods
Ans: b.

39) Identify the true statements about finalization.

a.A class may have only one finalize method
b.Finalizers are mostly used with simple classes
c.Finalizer overloading is not allowed
Ans: a,c.

40) When you write finalize() method for your class, you are overriding a finalizer
inherited from a super class.
a.true
b.false
Ans: a.

41) Java memory management mechanism garbage collects objects which are no longer referenced
a true
b.false
Ans: a.

42) are objects referenced by a variable candidates for garbage collection when the variable goes out of scope?
a yes
b. no
Ans: a.

43) Java's garbage collector runs as a ___ priority thread waiting for __priority threads to relinquish the processor.
a.high
b.low
Ans: a,b.

44) The garbage collector will run immediately when the system is out of memory
a.true
b.false
Ans: a.

45) You can explicitly drop a object reference by setting the value of a variable whose data type is a reference type
to ___
Ans: null

46) When might your program wish to run the garbage collecter?
a. before it enters a compute-intense section of code
b. before it enters a memory-intense section of code
c. before objects are finalized
d. when it knows there will be some idle time
Ans: a,b,d

47) For externalizable objects the class is solely responsible for the external format of its contents
a.true

123
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

b.false
Ans: a

48) When an object is stored, are all of the objects that are reachable from that object stored as well?
a.true
b.false
Ans: a

49) The default__ of objects protects private and trancient data, and supports the __ of the classes
a.evolution
b.encoding
Ans: b,a.

50) Which are keywords in Java?

a) NULL
b) sizeof
c) friend
d) extends
e) synchronized
Ans : d and e

51) When must the main class and the file name coincide?
Ans :When class is declared public.

52) What are different modifiers?

Ans : public, private, protected, default, static, trancient, volatile, final, abstract.

53) What are access modifiers?

Ans : public, private, protected, default.

54) What is meant by "Passing by value" and " Passing by reference"?

Ans : objects – pass by referrence
Methods - pass by value

55) Is a class a subclass of itself?

Ans : A class is a subclass itself.
 56) What modifiers may be used with top-level class?
Ans : public, abstract, final.

57) What is an example of polymorphism?

Inner class
Anonymous classes
Method overloading
Method overriding
Ans : c

 Packages and interface

1) What are packages ? what is use of packages ?

Ans :The package statement defines a name space in which classes are stored.If you omit the package, the classes
are put into the default package.

Signature... package pkg;

Use: * It specifies to which package the classes defined in a file belongs to. * Package is both naming and a
visibility control mechanism.

2) What is difference between importing "java.applet.Applet" and "java.applet.*;" ?

Ans :"java.applet.Applet" will import only the class Applet from the package java.applet

Where as "java.applet.*" will import all the classes from java.applet package.

3) What do you understand by package access specifier?

Ans : public: Anything declared as public can be accessed from anywhere
private: Anything declared in the private can’t be seen outside of its class.
default: It is visible to subclasses as well as to other classes in the same package.

124
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

4) What is interface? What is use of interface?

Ans : It is similar to class which may contain method’s signature only but not bodies.
Methods declared in interface are abstract methods. We can implement many interfaces on a class which support
the multiple inheritance.

5) Is it is necessary to implement all methods in an interface?

Ans : Yes. All the methods have to be implemented.

6) Which is the default access modifier for an interface method?

Ans : public.

7) Can we define a variable in an interface ?and what type it should be ?

Ans : Yes we can define a variable in an interface. They are implicitly final and static.

8) What is difference between interface and an abstract class?

Ans : All the methods declared inside an Interface are abstract. Where as abstract class must have at least one
abstract method and others may be concrete or abstract.
In Interface we need not use the keyword abstract for the methods.

9) By default, all program import the java.lang package.

True/False
Ans : True

10) Java compiler stores the .class files in the path specified in CLASSPATH
environmental variable.
True/False
Ans : False
 
11) User-defined package can also be imported just like the standard packages.
True/False
Ans : True

12) When a program does not want to handle exception, the ______class is used.
Ans : Throws

13) The main subclass of the Exception class is _______ class.

Ans : RuntimeException

14) Only subclasses of ______class may be caught or thrown.

Ans : Throwable

15) Any user-defined exception class is a subclass of the _____ class.

Ans : Exception

16) The catch clause of the user-defined exception class should ______ its
Base class catch clause.
Ans : Exception

17) A _______ is used to separate the hierarchy of the class while declaring an
Import statement.
Ans : Package

18) All standard classes of Java are included within a package called _____.
Ans : java.lang

19) All the classes in a package can be simultaneously imported using ____.
Ans : *

20) Can you define a variable inside an Interface. If no, why? If yes, how?
Ans.: YES. final and static

21) How many concrete classes can you have inside an interface?
Ans.: None

22) Can you extend an interface?

Ans.: Yes

125
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

23) Is it necessary to implement all the methods of an interface while implementing the interface?
Ans.: No

24) If you do not implement all the methods of an interface while implementing , what specifier should you use for
the class ?
Ans.: abstract

25) How do you achieve multiple inheritance in Java?

Ans: Using interfaces.

26) How to declare an interface example?

Ans : access class classname implements interface.

27) Can you achieve multiple interface through interface?

a)True
b) false
Ans : a.

28) Can variables be declared in an interface ? If so, what are the modifiers?
Ans : Yes. final and static are the modifiers can be declared in an interface.

29) What are the possible access modifiers when implementing interface methods?
Ans : public.

30) Can anonymous classes be implemented an interface?

Ans : Yes.

31) Interfaces can’t be extended.

a)True
b)False
Ans : b.

32) Name interfaces without a method?

Ans : Serializable, Cloneble & Remote.

33) Is it possible to use few methods of an interface in a class ? If so, how?

Ans : Yes. Declare the class as abstract.
 
Exception Handling

1) What is the difference between ‘throw’ and ‘throws’ ?And it’s application?
Ans :

Exceptions that are thrown by java runtime systems can be handled by Try and catch blocks. With throw
exception we can handle the exceptions thrown by the program itself. If a method is capable of causing an
exception that it does not
handle, it must specify this behavior so the callers of the method can guard
against that exception.

2) What is the difference between ‘Exception’ and ‘error’ in java?

Ans :
Exception and Error are the subclasses of the Throwable class. Exception class is used for exceptional conditions
that user program should catch. With exception class we can subclass to create our own custom exception.

Error defines exceptions that are not excepted to be caught by you program. Example is Stack Overflow.

3) What is ‘Resource leak’?

Ans :
Freeing up other resources that might have been allocated at the beginning of a method.

4)What is the ‘finally’ block?

Ans :
Finally block will execute whether or not an exception is thrown. If an exception is thrown, the finally block will
execute even if no catch statement match the exception. Any time a method is about to return to the caller from
inside try/catch block, via an uncaught exception or an explicit return statement, the finally clause is also execute.

126
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

5) Can we have catch block with out try block? If so when?

Ans :
No. Try/Catch or Try/finally form a unit.
6) What is the difference between the following statements?
Catch (Exception e),
Catch (Error err),
Catch (Throwable t)
Ans :

7) What will happen to the Exception object after exception handling?

Ans : It will go for Garbage Collector. And frees the memory.

8) How many Exceptions we can define in ‘throws’ clause?

Ans : We can define multiple exceptions in throws clause.
Signature is..

type method-name (parameter-list) throws exception-list

 9) The finally block is executed when an exception is thrown, even if no catch matches it.
True/False
Ans : True

10) The subclass exception should precede the base class exception when used within the catch clause.
True/False
Ans : True

11) Exceptions can be caught or rethrown to a calling method.

True/False
Ans : True

12) The statements following the throw keyword in a program are not executed.
True/False
Ans : True

13) The toString ( ) method in the user-defined exception class is overridden.

True/False
Ans : True

MULTI THREADING

1) What are the two types of multitasking?

Ans : 1.process-based
2.Thread-based

2) What are the two ways to create the thread?

Ans : 1.by implementing Runnable
2.by extending Thread

3) What is the signature of the constructor of a thread class?

Ans : Thread(Runnable threadob,String threadName)

4) What are all the methods available in the Runnable Interface?

Ans : run()

5) What is the data type for the method isAlive() and this method is
available in which class?
Ans : boolean, Thread

6) What are all the methods available in the Thread class?

Ans : 1.isAlive()
2.join()
3.resume()
4.suspend()
5.stop()
6.start()
7.sleep()
8.destroy()

127
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

7) What are all the methods used for Inter Thread communication and what is the class in which these methods are
defined?
Ans :1. wait(),notify() & notifyall()

2. Object class

8) What is the mechanisam defind by java for the Resources to be used by only one Thread at a time?
Ans : Synchronisation

9) What is the procedure to own the moniter by many threads?

Ans : not possible

10) What is the unit for 1000 in the below statement?

ob.sleep(1000)
Ans : long milliseconds

11) What is the data type for the parameter of the sleep() method?
Ans : long

12) What are all the values for the following level?
max-priority
min-priority
normal-priority
Ans : 10,1,5

13) What is the method available for setting the priority?

Ans : setPriority()

14) What is the default thread at the time of starting the program?
Ans : main thread

15) The word synchronized can be used with only a method.

True/ False
Ans : False

16) Which priority Thread can prompt the lower primary Thread?
Ans : Higher Priority

17) How many threads at a time can access a monitor?

Ans : one

18) What are all the four states associated in the thread?
Ans : 1. new 2. runnable 3. blocked 4. dead
19) The suspend()method is used to teriminate a thread?
True /False
Ans : False

20) The run() method should necessary exists in clases created as subclass of thread?
True /False
Ans : True

21) When two threads are waiting on each other and can't proceed the programe is said to be in a deadlock?
True/False
Ans : True
22) Which method waits for the thread to die ?
Ans : join() method

23) Which of the following is true?

1) wait(),notify(),notifyall() are defined as final & can be called only from with in a synchronized method

2) Among wait(),notify(),notifyall() the wait() method only throws IOException

3) wait(),notify(),notifyall() & sleep() are methods of object class
1
2
3

128
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

1&2
1,2 & 3
Ans : D

24) Garbage collector thread belongs to which priority?

Ans : low-priority

25) What is meant by timeslicing or time sharing?

Ans : Timeslicing is the method of allocating CPU time to individual threads in a priority schedule.

26) What is meant by daemon thread? In java runtime, what is it's role?
Ans : Daemon thread is a low priority thread which runs intermittently in the background doing the garbage
collection operation for the java runtime system.

 Inheritance

1) What is the difference between superclass & subclass?

Ans : A super class is a class that is inherited whereas subclass is a class that does the inheriting.

2) Which keyword is used to inherit a class?

Ans : extends

3) Subclasses methods can access superclass members/ attributes at all times?

True/False
Ans : False

 4) When can subclasses not access superclass members?

Ans : When superclass is declared as private.

5) Which class does begin Java class hierarchy?

Ans : Object class

6) Object class is a superclass of all other classes?

True/False
Ans : True
7) Java supports multiple inheritance?
True/False
Ans : False

8) What is inheritance?
Ans : Deriving an object from an existing class. In the other words, Inheritance is the process of inheriting all the
features from a class

9) What are the advantages of inheritance?

Ans : Reusability of code and accessibility of variables and methods of the superclass by subclasses.

10) Which method is used to call the constructors of the superclass from the subclass?
Ans : super(argument)

11) Which is used to execute any method of the superclass from the subclass?
Ans : super.method-name(arguments)

12) Which methods are used to destroy the objects created by the constructor methods?
Ans : finalize()

13) What are abstract classes?

Ans : Abstract classes are those for which instances can’t be created.

14) What must a class do to implement an interface?

Ans: It must provide all of the methods in the interface and identify the interface in its implements clause.

15) Which methods in the Object class are declared as final?

Ans : getClass(), notify(), notifyAll(), and wait()

16) Final methods can be overridden.

129
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

True/False
Ans : False

17) Declaration of methods as final results in faster execution of the program?

True/False
Ans: True

18) Final variables should be declared in the beginning?

True/False
Ans : True
19) Can we declare variable inside a method as final variables? Why?
Ans : Cannot because, local variable cannot be declared as final variables.

20) Can an abstract class may be final?

Ans : An abstract class may not be declared as final.

21) Does a class inherit the constructors of it's super class?

Ans: A class does not inherit constructors from any of it's super classes.

22) What restrictions are placed on method overloading?

Ans: Two methods may not have the same name and argument list but different return types.

23) What restrictions are placed on method overriding?

Ans : Overridden methods must have the same name , argument list , and return type. The overriding method may
not limit the access of the method it overridees.The overriding method may not throw any exceptions that may not
be thrown by the overridden method.

24) What modifiers may be used with an inner class that is a member of an outer class?
Ans : a (non-local) inner class may be declared as public, protected, private, static, final or abstract.

25) How this() is used with constructors?

Ans: this() is used to invoke a constructor of the same class

26) How super() used with constructors?

Ans : super() is used to invoke a super class constructor

27) Which of the following statements correctly describes an interface?

a)It's a concrete class
b)It's a superclass
c)It's a type of abstract class
Ans: c

28) An interface contains __ methods

a)Non-abstract
b)Implemented
c)unimplemented
Ans:c

STRING HANDLING

Which package does define String and StringBuffer classes?

Ans : java.lang package.

Which method can be used to obtain the length of the String?

Ans : length( ) method.

How do you concatenate Strings?

Ans : By using " + " operator.

Which method can be used to compare two strings for equality?

Ans : equals( ) method.
Which method can be used to perform a comparison between strings that ignores case differences?
Ans : equalsIgnoreCase( ) method.

What is the use of valueOf( ) method?

Ans : valueOf( ) method converts data from its internal format into a human-readable form.

130
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

What are the uses of toLowerCase( ) and toUpperCase( ) methods?

Ans : The method toLowerCase( ) converts all the characters in a string from uppercase to
lowercase.
The method toUpperCase( ) converts all the characters in a string from lowercase to
uppercase.

Which method can be used to find out the total allocated capacity of a StrinBuffer?
Ans : capacity( ) method.

Which method can be used to set the length of the buffer within a StringBuffer object?
Ans : setLength( ).

What is the difference between String and StringBuffer?

Ans : String objects are constants, whereas StringBuffer objects are not.
String class supports constant strings, whereas StringBuffer class supports growable, modifiable strings.

Which of the following is not a wrapper class?

String
Integer
Boolean
Character
Ans : a.

What is the output of the following program?

public class Question {
public static void main(String args[]) {
String s1 = "abc";
String s2 = "def";
String s3 = s1.concat(s2.toUpperCase( ) );
System.out.println(s1+s2+s3);
}
}
abcdefabcdef
abcabcDEFDEF
abcdefabcDEF
None of the above
ANS : c.

Which of the following methods are methods of the String class?

delete( )
append( )
reverse( )
replace( )
Ans : d.

Which of the following methods cause the String object referenced by s to be changed?
s.concat( )
s.toUpperCase( )
s.replace( )
s.valueOf( )
Ans : a and b.

String is a wrapper class?

True
False
Ans : b.

17) If you run the code below, what gets printed out?
String s=new String("Bicycle");
int iBegin=1;
char iEnd=3;
System.out.println(s.substring(iBegin,iEnd));
Bic
ic
c) icy
d) error: no method matching substring(int,char)

131
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Ans : b.

18) Given the following declarations

String s1=new String("Hello")
String s2=new String("there");
String s3=new String();
Which of the following are legal operations?
s3=s1 + s2;
s3=s1 - s2;
c) s3=s1 & s2
d) s3=s1 && s2
Ans : a.

19) Which of the following statements are true?

The String class is implemented as a char array, elements are addressed using the stringname[] convention
b) Strings are a primitive type in Java that overloads the + operator for concatenation
c) Strings are a primitive type in Java and the StringBuffer is used as the matching wrapper type
d) The size of a string can be retrieved using the length property.
Ans : b.
EXPLORING JAVA.LANG

java.lang package is automatically imported into all programs.

True
False
Ans : a

What are the interfaces defined by java.lang?

Ans : Cloneable, Comparable and Runnable.

What are the constants defined by both Flaot and Double classes?
Ans : MAX_VALUE,
MIN_VALUE,
NaN,
POSITIVE_INFINITY,
NEGATIVE_INFINITY and
TYPE.

What are the constants defined by Byte, Short, Integer and Long?
Ans : MAX_VALUE,
MIN_VALUE and
TYPE.

What are the constants defined by both Float and Double classes?
Ans : MAX_RADIX,
MIN_RADIX,
MAX_VALUE,
MIN_VALUE and
TYPE.

What is the purpose of the Runtime class?

Ans : The purpose of the Runtime class is to provide access to the Java runtime system.

What is the purpose of the System class?

Ans : The purpose of the System class is to provide access to system resources.

Which class is extended by all other classes?

Ans : Object class is extended by all other classes.

Which class can be used to obtain design information about an object?

Ans : The Class class can be used to obtain information about an object’s design.

Which method is used to calculate the absolute value of a number?

Ans : abs( ) method.

What are E and PI?

Ans : E is the base of the natural logarithm and PI is the mathematical value pi.

132
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Which of the following classes is used to perform basic console I/O?

System
SecurityManager
Math
Runtime
Ans : a.

Which of the following are true?

The Class class is the superclass of the Object class.
The Object class is final.
The Class class can be used to load other classes.
The ClassLoader class can be used to load other classes.
Ans : c and d.

Which of the following methods are methods of the Math class?

absolute( )
log( )
cosine( )
sine( )
Ans : b.

Which of the following are true about the Error and Exception classes?
Both classes extend Throwable.
The Error class is final and the Exception class is not.
The Exception class is final and the Error is not.
Both classes implement Throwable.
Ans : a.

Which of the following are true?

The Void class extends the Class class.
The Float class extends the Double class.
The System class extends the Runtime class.
The Integer class extends the Number class.
Ans : d.

 17) Which of the following will output - 4.0

System.out.println(Math.floor(-4.7));
System.out.println(Math.round(-4.7));
System.out.println(Math.ceil(-4.7));
d) System.out.println(Math.Min(-4.7));
Ans : c.

18) Which of the following are valid statements

a) public class MyCalc extends Math
b) Math.max(s);
c) Math.round(9.99,1);
d) Math.mod(4,10);
e) None of the above.
Ans : e.

19) What will happen if you attempt to compile and run the following code?
Integer ten=new Integer(10);
Long nine=new Long (9);
System.out.println(ten + nine);
int i=1;
System.out.println(i + ten);
19 followed by 20
19 followed by 11
Error: Can't convert java lang Integer
d) 10 followed by 1
Ans : c.
 
INPUT / OUTPUT : EXPLORING JAVA.IO

What is meant by Stream and what are the types of Streams and classes of the Streams?

133
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Ans : A Stream is an abstraction that either produces or consumes information.

There are two types of Streams. They are:
Byte Streams : Byte Streams provide a convenient means for handling input and output of bytes.
Character Streams : Character Streams provide a convenient means for handling input and output of characters.
Byte Stream classes : Byte Streams are defined by using two abstract classes. They are:InputStream and
OutputStream.
Character Stream classes : Character Streams are defined by using two abstract classes. They are : Reader and
Writer.

Which of the following statements are true?

UTF characters are all 8-bits.
UTF characters are all 16-bits.
UTF characters are all 24-bits.
Unicode characters are all 16-bits.
Bytecode characters are all 16-bits.
Ans : d.

Which of the following statements are true?

When you construct an instance of File, if you do not use the filenaming semantics of the local machine, the
constructor will throw an IOException.
When you construct an instance of File, if the corresponding file does not exist on the local file system, one will be
created.
When an instance of File is garbage collected, the corresponding file on the local file system is deleted.
None of the above.
Ans : a, b and c.

The File class contains a method that changes the current working directory.
True
False
Ans : b.

It is possible to use the File class to list the contents of the current working directory.
True
False
Ans : a.

Readers have methods that can read and return floats and doubles.
True
False
Ans : b.

You execute the code below in an empty directory. What is the result?
File f1 = new File("dirname");
File f2 = new File(f1, "filename");
A new directory called dirname is created in the current working directory.
A new directory called dirname is created in the current working directory. A new file called filename is created in
directory dirname.
A new directory called dirname and a new file called filename are created, both in the current working directory.
A new file called filename is created in the current working directory.
No directory is created, and no file is created.
Ans : e.

What is the difference between the Reader/Writer class hierarchy and the
InputStream/OutputStream class hierarchy?
Ans : The Reader/Writer class hierarchy is character-oriented and the InputStream/OutputStream class hierarchy is
byte-oriented.

What is an I/O filter?

Ans : An I/O filter is an object that reads from one stream and writes to another, usually altering the data in some
way as it is passed from one stream to another.

What is the purpose of the File class?

Ans : The File class is used to create objects that provide access to the files and directories of a local file system.

What interface must an object implement before it can be written to a stream as an object?
Ans : An object must implement the Serializable or Externalizable interface before it can be written to a stream as
an object.

134
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

What is the difference between the File and RandomAccessFile classes?

Ans : The File class encapsulates the files and directories of the local file system. The RandomAccessFile class
provides the methods needed to directly access data contained in any part of a file.

What class allows you to read objects directly from a stream?

Ans : The ObjectInputStream class supports the reading of objects from input streams.

What value does read( ) return when it has reached the end of a file?
Ans : The read( ) method returns – 1 when it has reached the end of a file.

What value does readLine( ) return when it has reached the end of a file?
Ans : The readLine( ) method returns null when it has reached the end of a file.

How many bits are used to represent Unicode, ASCII, UTF-16 and UTF-8 characters?
Ans : Unicode requires 16-bits and ASCII requires 8-bits. Although the ASCII character set uses only 1-bits, it is
usually represented as 8-bits. UTF-8 represents characters using 8, 16 and 18-bit patterns. UTF-16 uses 16-bit and
larger bit patterns.

Which of the following are true?

The InputStream and OutputStream classes are byte-oriented.

The ObjectInputStream and ObjectOutputStream do not support serialized object input and output.
The Reader and Writer classes are character-oriented.
The Reader and Writer classes are the preferred solution to serialized object output.
Ans : a and c.

Which of the following are true about I/O filters?

Filters are supported on input, but not on output.
Filters are supported by the InputStream/OutputStream class hierarchy, but not by the Reader/Writer class
hierarchy.
Filters read from one stream and write to another.
A filter may alter data that is read from one stream and written to another.
Ans : c and d.

Which of the following are true?

Any Unicode character is represented using 16-bits.
7-bits are needed to represent any ASCII character.
UTF-8 characters are represented using only 8-bits.
UTF-16 characters are represented using only 16-bits.
Ans : a and b.

Which of the following are true?

The Serializable interface is used to identify objects that may be written to an output stream.
The Externalizable interface is implemented by classes that control the way in which their objects are serialized.
The Serializable interface extends the Externalizable interface.
The Externalizable interface extends the Serializable interface.
Ans : a, b and d.

Which of the following are true about the File class?

A File object can be used to change the current working directory.
A File object can be used to access the files in the current directory.
When a File object is created, a corresponding directory or file is created in the local file system.
File objects are used to access files and directories on the local file system.
File objects can be garbage collected.
When a File object is garbage collected, the corresponding file or directory is deleted.
Ans : b, d and e.

How do you create a Reader object from an InputStream object?

Use the static createReader( ) method of InputStream class.
Use the static createReader( ) method of Reader class.
Create an InputStreamReader object, passing the InputStream object as an argument to the InputStreamReader
constructor.
Create an OutputStreamReader object, passing the InputStream object as an argument to the OutputStreamReader
constructor.
Ans : c.

135
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Which of the following are true?

Writer classes can be used to write characters to output streams using different character encodings.
Writer classes can be used to write Unicode characters to output streams.
Writer classes have methods that support the writing of the values of any Java primitive type to output streams.
Writer classes have methods that support the writing of objects to output streams.
Ans : a and b.

The isFile( ) method returns a boolean value depending on whether the file object is a file or a directory.
True.
False.
Ans : a.

Reading or writing can be done even after closing the input/output source.
True.
False.
Ans : b.

 The ________ method helps in clearing the buffer.

Ans : flush( ).

The System.err method is used to print error message.

True.
False.
Ans : a.

What is meant by StreamTokenizer?

Ans : StreamTokenizer breaks up InputStream into tokens that are delimited by sets of characters.
It has the constructor : StreamTokenizer(Reader inStream).
Here inStream must be some form of Reader.

What is Serialization and deserialization?

Ans : Serialization is the process of writing the state of an object to a byte stream.
Deserialization is the process of restoring these objects.

30) Which of the following can you perform using the File class?
a) Change the current directory
b) Return the name of the parent directory
c) Delete a file
d) Find if a file contains text or binary information
Ans : b and c.

31)How can you change the current working directory using an instance of the File class called FileName?
FileName.chdir("DirName").
FileName.cd("DirName").
FileName.cwd("DirName").
The File class does not support directly changing the current directory.
Ans : d.

EVENT HANDLING

The event delegation model, introduced in release 1.1 of the JDK, is fully compatible with the
event model.
True
False
Ans : b.

A component subclass that has executed enableEvents( ) to enable processing of a certain kind of event cannot also
use an adapter as a listener for the same kind of event.
True
False
Ans : b.

What is the highest-level event class of the event-delegation model?

Ans : The java.util.eventObject class is the highest-level class in the event-delegation hierarchy.

What interface is extended by AWT event listeners?

Ans : All AWT event listeners extend the java.util.EventListener interface.

136
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

What class is the top of the AWT event hierarchy?

Ans : The java.awt.AWTEvent class is the highest-level class in the AWT event class hierarchy.

What event results from the clicking of a button?

Ans : The ActionEvent event is generated as the result of the clicking of a button.

What is the relationship between an event-listener interface and an event-adapter class?

Ans : An event-listener interface defines the methods that must be implemented by an event
handler for a particular kind of event.
An event adapter provides a default implementation of an event-listener interface.

In which package are most of the AWT events that support the event-delegation model defined?
Ans : Most of the AWT–related events of the event-delegation model are defined in the
java.awt.event package. The AWTEvent class is defined in the java.awt package.

What is the advantage of the event-delegation model over the earlier event-inheritance model?
Ans : The event-delegation has two advantages over the event-inheritance model. They are :
It enables event handling by objects other than the ones that generate the events. This
allows a clean separation between a component’s design and its use.
It performs much better in applications where many events are generated. This
performance improvement is due to the fact that the event-delegation model does not
have to repeatedly process unhandled events, as is the case of the event-inheritance
model.

What is the purpose of the enableEvents( ) method?

Ans :The enableEvents( ) method is used to enable an event for a particular object.

Which of the following are true?

The event-inheritance model has replaced the event-delegation model.
The event-inheritance model is more efficient than the event-delegation model.
The event-delegation model uses event listeners to define the methods of event-handling classes.
The event-delegation model uses the handleEvent( ) method to support event handling.
Ans : c.

Which of the following is the highest class in the event-delegation model?

java.util.EventListener
java.util.EventObject
java.awt.AWTEvent
java.awt.event.AWTEvent
Ans : b.
When two or more objects are added as listeners for the same event, which listener is first invoked to handle the
event?
The first object that was added as listener.
The last object that was added as listener.
There is no way to determine which listener will be invoked first.
It is impossible to have more than one listener for a given event.
Ans : c.

Which of the following components generate action events?

Buttons
Labels
Check boxes
Windows
Ans : a.

Which of the following are true?

A TextField object may generate an ActionEvent.
A TextArea object may generate an ActionEvent.
A Button object may generate an ActionEvent.
A MenuItem object may generate an ActionEvent.
Ans : a,c and d.

Which of the following are true?

The MouseListener interface defines methods for handling mouse clicks.
The MouseMotionListener interface defines methods for handling mouse clicks.
The MouseClickListener interface defines methods for handling mouse clicks.

137
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

The ActionListener interface defines methods for handling the clicking of a button.
Ans : a and d.

Suppose that you want to have an object eh handle the TextEvent of a TextArea object t. How should you add eh
as the event handler for t?
t.addTextListener(eh);
eh.addTextListener(t);
addTextListener(eh.t);
addTextListener(t,eh);
Ans : a.

What is the preferred way to handle an object’s events in Java 2?

Override the object’s handleEvent( ) method.
Add one or more event listeners to handle the events.
Have the object override its processEvent( ) methods.
Have the object override its dispatchEvent( ) methods.
Ans : b.

Which of the following are true?

A component may handle its own events by adding itself as an event listener.
A component may handle its own events by overriding its event-dispatching method.
A component may not handle oits own events.
A component may handle its own events only if it implements the handleEvent( ) method.
Ans : a and b.

APPLETS

What is an Applet? Should applets have constructors?

Ans : Applet is a dynamic and interactive program that runs inside a Web page
displayed by a Java capable browser. We don’t have the concept of Constructors in Applets.

How do we read number information from my applet’s parameters, given that Applet’s getParameter() method
returns a string?
Ans : Use the parseInt() method in the Integer Class, the Float(String) constructor in the
Class Float, or the Double(String) constructor in the class Double.

How can I arrange for different applets on a web page to communicate with each other?
Ans : Name your applets inside the Applet tag and invoke AppletContext’s getApplet()
method in your applet code to obtain references to the other applets on the page.

How do I select a URL from my Applet and send the browser to that page?
Ans : Ask the applet for its applet context and invoke showDocument() on that context object.
Eg. URL targetURL;
String URLString
AppletContext context = getAppletContext();
try{
targetUR L = new URL(URLString);
} catch (Malformed URLException e){
// Code for recover from the exception }
context. showDocument (targetURL);

Can applets on different pages communicate with each other?

Ans : No. Not Directly. The applets will exchange the information at one meeting place
either on the local file system or at remote system.

How do Applets differ from Applications?

Ans : Appln: Stand Alone
Applet: Needs no explicit installation on local m/c.
Appln: Execution starts with main() method.
Applet: Execution starts with init() method.
Appln: May or may not be a GUI
Applet: Must run within a GUI (Using AWT)

How do I determine the width and height of my application?

Ans : Use the getSize() method, which the Applet class inherits from the Component
class in the Java.awt package. The getSize() method returns the size of the applet as
a Dimension object, from which you extract separate width, height fields.

138
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Eg. Dimension dim = getSize ();

int appletwidth = dim.width ();

8) What is AppletStub Interface?

Ans : The applet stub interface provides the means by which an applet and the browser communicate. Your code
will not typically implement this interface.

It is essential to have both the .java file and the .html file of an applet in the same
directory.
True.
False.
Ans : b.

The <PARAM> tag contains two attributes namely _________ and _______.
Ans : Name , value.
 Passing values to parameters is done in the _________ file of an applet.

Ans : .html.

12) What tags are mandatory when creating HTML to display an applet
name, height, width
code, name
codebase, height, width
d) code, height, width
Ans : d.

Applet’s getParameter( ) method can be used to get parameter values.

True.
False.
Ans : a.

What are the Applet’s Life Cycle methods? Explain them?

Ans : init( ) method - Can be called when an applet is first loaded.
start( ) method - Can be called each time an applet is started.
paint( ) method - Can be called when the applet is minimized or refreshed.
stop( ) method - Can be called when the browser moves off the applet’s page.
destroy( ) method - Can be called when the browser is finished with the applet.

What are the Applet’s information methods?

Ans : getAppletInfo( ) method : Returns a string describing the applet, its author ,copy
right information, etc.
getParameterInfo( ) method : Returns an array of string describing the applet’s parameters.

All Applets are subclasses of Applet.

True.
False.
Ans : a.

All Applets must import java.applet and java.awt.

True.
False.
Ans : a.

What are the steps involved in Applet development?

Ans : a) Edit a Java source file,
b) Compile your program and
c) Execute the appletviewer, specifying the name of your applet’s source file.

Applets are executed by the console based Java run-time interpreter.

True.
False.
Ans : b.

Which classes and interfaces does Applet class consist?

Ans : Applet class consists of a single class, the Applet class and three interfaces: AppletContext,
AppletStub and AudioClip.

139
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

What is the sequence for calling the methods by AWT for applets?
Ans : When an applet begins, the AWT calls the following methods, in this sequence.
init( )
start( )
paint( )
When an applet is terminated, the following sequence of method cals takes place :
stop( )
destroy( )

Which method is used to output a string to an applet?

Ans : drawString ( ) method.

Every color is created from an RGB value.

True.
False
Ans : a.
AWT : WINDOWS, GRAPHICS AND FONTS

How would you set the color of a graphics context called g to cyan?
g.setColor(Color.cyan);
g.setCurrentColor(cyan);
g.setColor("Color.cyan");
g.setColor("cyan’);
g.setColor(new Color(cyan));
Ans : a.

The code below draws a line. What color is the line?

g.setColor(Color.red.green.yellow.red.cyan);
g.drawLine(0, 0, 100,100);
Red
Green
Yellow
Cyan
Black
Ans : d.

What does the following code draw?

g.setColor(Color.black);
g.drawLine(10, 10, 10, 50);
g.setColor(Color.RED);
g.drawRect(100, 100, 150, 150);
A red vertical line that is 40 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A black vertical line that is 40 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A black vertical line that is 50 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A red vertical line that is 50 pixels long and a red square with sides of 150 pixels
A black vertical line that is 40 pixels long and a red square with sides of 100 pixel
Ans : b.

Which of the statements below are true?

A polyline is always filled.
b) A polyline can not be filled.
c) A polygon is always filled.
d) A polygon is always closed
e) A polygon may be filled or not filled
Ans : b, d and e.

What code would you use to construct a 24-point bold serif font?
new Font(Font.SERIF, 24,Font.BOLD);
new Font("SERIF", 24, BOLD");
new Font("BOLD ", 24,Font.SERIF);
new Font("SERIF", Font.BOLD,24);
new Font(Font.SERIF, "BOLD", 24);
Ans : d.

What does the following paint( ) method draw?

Public void paint(Graphics g) {
g.drawString("question #6",10,0);

140
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

}
The string "question #6", with its top-left corner at 10,0
A little squiggle coming down from the top of the component, a little way in from the left edge
Ans : b.

What does the following paint( ) method draw?

Public void paint(Graphics g) {
g.drawString("question #6",10,0);
}
A circle at (100, 100) with radius of 44
A circle at (100, 44) with radius of 100
A circle at (100, 44) with radius of 44
The code does not compile
Ans : d.

8)What is relationship between the Canvas class and the Graphics class?
Ans : A Canvas object provides access to a Graphics object via its paint( ) method.

What are the Component subclasses that support painting.

Ans : The Canvas, Frame, Panel and Applet classes support painting.

What is the difference between the paint( ) and repaint( ) method?

Ans : The paint( ) method supports painting via a Graphics object. The repaint( ) method is used

to cause paint( ) to be invoked by the AWT painting method.

What is the difference between the Font and FontMetrics classes?

Ans : The FontMetrics class is used to define implementation-specific properties, such as ascent
and descent, of a Font object.

Which of the following are passed as an argument to the paint( ) method?

A Canvas object
A Graphics object
An Image object
A paint object
Ans : b.

Which of the following methods are invoked by the AWT to support paint and repaint operations?
paint( )
repaint( )
draw( )
redraw( )
Ans : a.

Which of the following classes have a paint( ) method?

Canvas
Image
Frame
Graphics
Ans : a and c.

Which of the following are methods of the Graphics class?

drawRect( )
drawImage( )
drawPoint( )
drawString( )
Ans : a, b and d.

Which Font attributes are available through the FontMetrics class?

ascent
leading
case
height
Ans : a, b and d.

Which of the following are true?

141
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

The AWT automatically causes a window to be repainted when a portion of a window has been minimized and
then maximized.
The AWT automatically causes a window to be repainted when a portion of a window has been covered and then
uncovered.
The AWT automatically causes a window to be repainted when application data is changed.
The AWT does not support repainting operations.
Ans : a and b.

Which method is used to size a graphics object to fit the current size of the window?
Ans : getSize( ) method.

What are the methods to be used to set foreground and background colors?
Ans : setForeground( ) and setBackground( ) methods.

19) You have created a simple Frame and overridden the paint method as follows
public void paint(Graphics g){
g.drawString("Dolly",50,10);
}

What will be the result when you attempt to compile and run the program?
The string "Dolly" will be displayed at the centre of the frame
b) An error at compilation complaining at the signature of the paint method
c) The lower part of the word Dolly will be seen at the top of the form, with the top hidden.
d) The string "Dolly" will be shown at the bottom of the form
Ans : c.

20) Where g is a graphics instance what will the following code draw on the screen.
g.fillArc(45,90,50,50,90,180);
a) An arc bounded by a box of height 45, width 90 with a centre point of 50,50, starting
at an angle of 90 degrees traversing through 180 degrees counter clockwise.
b) An arc bounded by a box of height 50, width 50, with a centre point of 45,90 starting
at an angle of 90 degrees traversing through 180 degrees clockwise.
c) An arc bounded by a box of height 50, width 50, with a top left at coordinates of 45,
90, starting at 90 degrees and traversing through 180 degrees counter clockwise.
d) An arc starting at 45 degrees, traversing through 90 degrees clockwise bounded by a
box of height 50, width 50 with a centre point of 90, 180.
Ans : c.

21) Given the following code

import java.awt.*;
public class SetF extends Frame{
public static void main(String argv[]){
SetF s = new SetF();
s.setSize(300,200);
s.setVisible(true);
}
}

How could you set the frame surface color to pink

a)s.setBackground(Color.pink);
b)s.setColor(PINK);
c)s.Background(pink);
d)s.color=Color.pink
Ans : a.
 AWT: CONTROLS, LAYOUT MANAGERS AND MENUS

What is meant by Controls and what are different types of controls?

Ans : Controls are componenets that allow a user to interact with your application.
The AWT supports the following types of controls:
Labels
Push buttons
Check boxes
Choice lists
Lists
Scroll bars
Text components
These controls are subclasses of Component.

142
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

You want to construct a text area that is 80 character-widths wide and 10 character-heights tall. What code do you
use?
new TextArea(80, 10)
new TextArea(10, 80)
Ans: b.

A text field has a variable-width font. It is constructed by calling new

TextField("iiiii"). What happens if you change the contents of the text field to
"wwwww"? (Bear in mind that is one of the narrowest characters, and w is one of the widest.)

The text field becomes wider.

The text field becomes narrower.
The text field stays the same width; to see the entire contents you will have to scroll by using the ß and à keys.
The text field stays the same width; to see the entire contents you will have to scroll by using the text field’s
horizontal scroll bar.
Ans : c.
The CheckboxGroup class is a subclass of the Component class.
True
False
Ans : b.

5) What are the immediate super classes of the following classes?

a) Container class
b) MenuComponent class
c) Dialog class
d) Applet class
e) Menu class
Ans : a) Container - Component
b) MenuComponent - Object
c) Dialog - Window
d) Applet - Panel
e) Menu – MenuItem

6) What are the SubClass of Textcomponent Class?

Ans : TextField and TextArea

7) Which method of the component class is used to set the position and the size of a component?
Ans : setBounds()

8) Which TextComponent method is used to set a TextComponent to the read-only state?

Ans : setEditable()

9) How can the Checkbox class be used to create a radio button?

Ans : By associating Checkbox objects with a CheckboxGroup.

10) What Checkbox method allows you to tell if a Checkbox is checked?

Ans : getState()

11) Which Component method is used to access a component's immediate Container?

getVisible()
getImmediate
getParent()
getContainer
Ans : c.

12) What methods are used to get and set the text label displayed by a Button object?
Ans : getLabel( ) and setLabel( )

13) What is the difference between a Choice and a List?

Ans : A Choice is displayed in a compact form that requires you to pull it down to see the list of available choices.
Only one item may be selected from a Choice.
A List may be displayed in such a way that several List items are visible. A List supports the selection of one or
more List items.

14) Which Container method is used to cause a container to be laid out and redisplayed?
Ans : validate( )

143
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

15) What is the difference between a Scollbar and a Scrollpane?

Ans : A Scrollbar is a Component, but not a Container.
A Scrollpane is a Container and handles its own events and performs its own
scrolling.

16) Which Component subclass is used for drawing and painting?

Ans : Canvas.

17) Which of the following are direct or indirect subclasses of Component?

Button
Label
CheckboxMenuItem
Toolbar
Frame
Ans : a, b and e.

18) Which of the following are direct or indirect subclasses of Container?

Frame
TextArea
MenuBar
FileDialog
Applet
Ans : a,d and e.

19) Which method is used to set the text of a Label object?

setText( )
setLabel( )
setTextLabel( )
setLabelText( )
Ans : a.

20) Which constructor creates a TextArea with 10 rows and 20 columns?

new TextArea(10, 20)
new TextArea(20, 10)
new TextArea(new Rows(10), new columns(20))
new TextArea(200)
Ans : a.
(Usage is TextArea(rows, columns)

21) Which of the following creates a List with 5 visible items and multiple selection enabled?
new List(5, true)
new List(true, 5)
new List(5, false)
new List(false,5)
Ans : a.
[Usage is List(rows, multipleMode)]

22) Which are true about the Container class?

The validate( ) method is used to cause a Container to be laid out and redisplayed.
The add( ) method is used to add a Component to a Container.
The getBorder( ) method returns information about a Container’s insets.
The getComponent( ) method is used to access a Component that is contained in a Container.
Ans : a, b and d.

23) Suppose a Panel is added to a Frame and a Button is added to the Panel. If the Frame’s font is set to 12-point
TimesRoman, the Panel’s font is set to 10-point TimesRoman, and the Button’s font is not set, what font will be
used to dispaly the Button’s label?
12-point TimesRoman
11-point TimesRoman
10-point TimesRoman
9-point TimesRoman
Ans : c.

A Frame’s background color is set to Color.Yellow, and a Button’s background color is to Color.Blue. Suppose the
Button is added to a Panel, which is added to the Frame. What background color will be used with the Panel?
Colr.Yellow

144
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Color.Blue
Color.Green
Color.White
Ans : a.

25) Which method will cause a Frame to be displayed?

show( )
setVisible( )
display( )
displayFrame( )
Ans : a and b.

26) All the componenet classes and container classes are derived from _________ class.
Ans : Object.

27) Which method of the container class can be used to add components to a Panel.
Ans : add ( ) method.

28) What are the subclasses of the Container class?

Ans : The Container class has three major subclasses. They are :
Window
Panel
ScrollPane

29) The Choice component allows multiple selection.

True.
False.
Ans : b.

30) The List component does not generate any events.

True.
False.
Ans : b.

31) Which components are used to get text input from the user.
Ans : TextField and TextArea.

32) Which object is needed to group Checkboxes to make them exclusive?

Ans : CheckboxGroup.

33) Which of the following components allow multiple selections?

Non-exclusive Checkboxes.
Radio buttons.
Choice.
List.
Ans : a and d.

34) What are the types of Checkboxes and what is the difference between them?
Ans : Java supports two types of Checkboxes. They are : Exclusive and Non-exclusive.
In case of exclusive Checkboxes, only one among a group of items can be selected at a time. I f an item from the
group is selected, the checkbox currently checked is deselected and the new selection is highlighted. The exclusive
Checkboxes are also called as Radio buttons.
The non-exclusive checkboxes are not grouped together and each one can be selected independent of the other.

35) What is a Layout Manager and what are the different Layout Managers available in java.awt and what is the
default Layout manager for the panal and the panal subclasses?
Ans: A layout Manager is an object that is used to organize components in a container.
The different layouts available in java.awt are :
FlowLayout, BorderLayout, CardLayout, GridLayout and GridBag Layout.
The default Layout Manager of Panal and Panal sub classes is FlowLayout".

36) Can I exert control over the size and placement of components in my interface?
Ans : Yes.
myPanal.setLayout(null);
myPanal.setbounds(20,20,200,200);

145
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

37) Can I add the same component to more than one container?
Ans : No. Adding a component to a container automatically removes it from any previous parent(container).
38) How do I specify where a window is to be placed?
Ans : Use setBounds, setSize, or setLocation methods to implement this.
setBounds(int x, int y, int width, int height)
setBounds(Rectangle r)
setSize(int width, int height)
setSize(Dimension d)
setLocation(int x, int y)
setLocation(Point p)

 39) How can we create a borderless window?

Ans : Create an instance of the Window class, give it a size, and show it on the screen.
eg. Frame aFrame = ......
Window aWindow = new Window(aFrame);
aWindow.setLayout(new FlowLayout());
aWindow.add(new Button("Press Me"));
aWindow.getBounds(50,50,200,200);
aWindow.show();

 40) Can I create a non-resizable windows? If so, how?

Ans: Yes. By using setResizable() method in class Frame.

41) What is the default Layout Manager for the Window and Window subclasses (Frame,Dialog)?
Ans : BorderLayout().

42) How are the elements of different layouts organized?

Ans : FlowLayout : The elements of a FlowLayout are organized in a top to bottom, left to right fashion.
BorderLayout : The elements of a BorderLayout are organized at the
borders (North, South, East and West) and the center of a
container.
CardLayout : The elements of a CardLayout are stacked, one on top of the other, like a deck of cards.
GridLayout : The elements of a GridLayout are of equal size and are laid out using the square of a grid.
GridBagLayout : The elements of a GridBagLayout are organized according to a grid.However, the elements are of
different sizes and may occupy
more than one row or column of the grid. In addition, the rows and columns may have different sizes.

43) Which containers use a BorderLayout as their default layout?

Ans : The Window, Frame and Dialog classes use a BorderLayout as their default layout.

 44) Which containers use a FlowLayout as their default layout?

Ans : The Panel and the Applet classes use the FlowLayout as their default layout.

45) What is the preferred size of a component?

Ans : The preferred size of a component size that will allow the component to display normally.
46) Which method is method to set the layout of a container?
startLayout( )
initLayout( )
layoutContainer( )
setLayout( )
Ans : d.

47) Which method returns the preferred size of a component?

getPreferredSize( )
getPreferred( )
getRequiredSize( )
getLayout( )
Ans : a.
 

48) Which layout should you use to organize the components of a container in a
tabular form?
CardLayout
BorederLayout
FlowLayout
GridLayout
Ans : d.

146
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

An application has a frame that uses a Border layout manager. Why is it probably not a good idea to put a vertical
scroll bar at North in the frame?
The scroll bar’s height would be its preferred height, which is not likely to be enough.
The scroll bar’s width would be the entire width of the frame, which would be much wider than necessary.
Both a and b.
Neither a nor b. There is no problem with the layout as described.
Ans : c.

What is the default layouts for a applet, a frame and a panel?

Ans : For an applet and a panel, Flow layout is the default layout, whereas Border layout is default layout for a
frame.

If a frame uses a Grid layout manager and does not contain any panels, then all the components within the frame
are the same width and height.
True
False.
Ans : a.

If a frame uses its default layout manager and does not contain any panels, then all the components within the
frame are the same width and height.
True
False.
Ans : b.
With a Border layout manager, the component at Center gets all the space that is left over, after the components at
North and South have been considered.
True
False
Ans : b.

An Applet has its Layout Manager set to the default of FlowLayout. What code would be the correct to change to
another Layout Manager?
setLayoutManager(new GridLayout());
setLayout(new GridLayout(2,2));
c) setGridLayout(2,2,))
d setBorderLayout();
Ans : b.

55) How do you indicate where a component will be positioned using Flowlayout?
a) North, South,East,West
b) Assign a row/column grid reference
c) Pass a X/Y percentage parameter to the add method
d) Do nothing, the FlowLayout will position the component
Ans :d.

 56) How do you change the current layout manager for a container?
a) Use the setLayout method
b) Once created you cannot change the current layout manager of a component
c) Use the setLayoutManager method
d) Use the updateLayout method
Ans :a.

57)When using the GridBagLayout manager, each new component requires a new instance of the
GridBagConstraints class. Is this statement true or false?
a) true
b) false
Ans : b.

58) Which of the following statements are true?

a)The default layout manager for an Applet is FlowLayout
b) The default layout manager for an application is FlowLayout
c) A layout manager must be assigned to an Applet before the setSize method is called
d) The FlowLayout manager attempts to honor the preferred size of any components
Ans : a and d.

59) Which method does display the messages whenever there is an item selection or deselection of the
CheckboxMenuItem menu?

147
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Ans : itemStateChanged method.

60) Which is a dual state menu item?

Ans : CheckboxMenuItem.

61) Which method can be used to enable/diable a checkbox menu item?

Ans : setState(boolean).

Which of the following may a menu contain?

A separator
A check box
A menu
A button
A panel
Ans : a and c.

Which of the following may contain a menu bar?

A panel
A frame
An applet
A menu bar
A menu
Ans : b

64) What is the difference between a MenuItem and a CheckboxMenuItem?

Ans : The CheckboxMenuItem class extends the MenuItem class to support a menu item
that may be checked or unchecked.

65) Which of the following are true?

A Dialog can have a MenuBar.
MenuItem extends Menu.
A MenuItem can be added to a Menu.
A Menu can be added to a Menu.
Ans : c and d.
Which colour is used to indicate instance methods in the standard "javadoc" format documentation:
1) blue
2) red
3) purple
4) orange
Answer : 2

explain
In JDK 1.1 the variabels, methods and constructors are colour coded to simplifytheir identification.
endExplain

What is the correct ordering for the import, class and package declarations when found in a single file?
1) package, import, class
2) class, import, package
3) import, package, class
4) package, class, import
Answer : 1
explain
This is my explanation for question 2
endExplain
Which methods can be legally applied to a string object?
(Multiple)
1) equals(String)
2) equals(Object)
3) trim()
4) round()
5) toString()
Answer : 1,2,3,5

What is the parameter specification for the public static void main method?
(multiple)
1) String args []

148
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

2) String [] args
3) Strings args []
4) String args
Answer : 1,2

What does the zeroth element of the string array passed to the public static void main method contain?
(multiple)
1) The name of the program
2) The number of arguments
3) The first argument if one is present
Answer : 3

Which of the following are Java keywords?

(multiple)
1) goto
2) malloc
3) extends
4) FALSE
Answer : 3

What will be the result of compiling the following code:

public class Test {
public static void main (String args []) {
int age;
age = age + 1;
System.out.println("The age is " + age);
}
}
1) Compiles and runs with no output
2) Compiles and runs printing out The age is 1
3) Compiles but generates a runtime error
4) Does not compile
5) Compiles but generates a compile time error
Answer : 4

Which of these is the correct format to use to create the literal char value a?
(multiple)
1) 'a'
2) "a"
3) new Character(a)
4) \000a
Answer : 1

What is the legal range of a byte integral type?

1) 0 - 65, 535
2) (-128) - 127
3) (-32,768) - 32,767
4) (-256) - 255
Answer : 2

Which of the following is illegal:

1) int i = 32;
2) float f = 45.0;
3) double d = 45.0;
Answer 2

What will be the result of compiling the following code:

public class Test {
static int age;
public static void main (String args []) {
age = age + 1;
System.out.println("The age is " + age);
}
}
1) Compiles and runs with no output

149
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

2) Compiles and runs printing out The age is 1

3) Compiles but generates a runtime error
4) Does not compile
5) Compiles but generates a compile time error
Answer : 2

Which of the following are correct?

(multiple)
1) 128 >> 1 gives 64
2) 128 >>> 1 gives 64
3) 128 >> 1 gives -64
4) 128 >>> 1 gives -64
Answer : 1

Which of the following return true?

(multiple)
1) "john" == new String("john")
2) "john".equals("john")
3) "john" = "john"
4) "john".equals(new Button("john"))
Answer : 2

Which of the following do not lead to a runtime error?

(multiple)
1) "john" + " was " + " here"
2) "john" + 3
3) 3 + 5
4) 5 + 5.5
answer 1,2,3,4

Which of the following are so called "short circuit" logical operators?

(multiple)
1) &
2) ||
3) &&
4) |
Answer : 2,3

Which of the following are acceptable?

(multiple)
1) Object o = new Button("A");
2) Boolean flag = true;
3) Panel p = new Frame();
4) Frame f = new Panel();
5) Panel p = new Applet();
Answer : 1,5

What is the result of compiling and running the following code:

public class Test {
static int total = 10;
public static void main (String args []) {
new Test();
}
public Test () {
System.out.println("In test");
System.out.println(this);
int temp = this.total;
if (temp > 5) {
System.out.println(temp);
}
}
}
(multiple)
1) The class will not compile
2) The compiler reports and error at line 2
3) The compiler reports an error at line 9
4) The value 10 is one of the elements printed to the standard output

150
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

5) The class compiles but generates a runtime error

Answer : 4

Which of the following is correct:

1) String temp [] = new String {"j" "a" "z"};
2) String temp [] = { "j " " b" "c"};
3) String temp = {"a", "b", "c"};
4) String temp [] = {"a", "b", "c"};
Answer 4
What is the correct declaration of an abstract method that is intended to be public:
1) public abstract void add();
2) public abstract void add() {}
3) public abstract add();
4) public virtual add();
Answer : 1

Under what situatio

ns do you obtain a default constructor?
1) When you define any class
2) When the class has no other constructors
3) When you define at least one constructor
Answer : 2

Which of the following can be used to define a constructor for this class, given the following code:
public class Test {
...
}
1) public void Test() {...}
2) public Test() {...}
3) public static Test() {...}
4) public static void Test() {...}
Answer : 2

Which of the following are acceptable to the Java compiler:

(multiple)
1) if (2 == 3) System.out.println("Hi");
2) if (2 = 3) System.out.println("Hi");
3) if (true) System.out.println("Hi");
4) if (2 != 3) System.out.println("Hi");
5) if (aString.equals("hello")) System.out.println("Hi");
Answer : 1,3,4,5

Assuming a method contains code which may raise an Exception (but not a RuntimeException), what is the correct
way for a method to indicate that it expects the caller to handle that exception:
1) throw Exception
2) throws Exception
3) new Exception
4) Don't need to specify anything
Answer : 2

What is the result of executing the following code, using the parameters 4 and 0:
public void divide(int a, int b) {
try {
int c = a / b;
} catch (Exception e) {
System.out.print("Exception ");
} finally {
System.out.println("Finally");
}
1) Prints out: Exception Finally
2) Prints out: Finally
3) Prints out: Exception
4) No output
Answer : 1

Which of the following is a legal return type of a method overloading the following method:

151
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

public void add(int a) {...}

1) void
2) int
3) Can be anything
Answer : 3

Which of the following statements is correct for a method which is overriding the following method:
public void add(int a) {...}
1) the overriding method must return void
2) the overriding method must return int
3) the overriding method can return whatever it likes
Answer : 1

Given the following classes defined in separate files, what will be the effect of compiling and running this class
Test?
class Vehicle {
public void drive() {
System.out.println("Vehicle: drive");
}
}
class Car extends Vehicle {
public void drive() {
System.out.println("Car: drive");
}
}
public class Test {
public static void main (String args []) {
Vehicle v;
Car c;
v = new Vehicle();
c = new Car();
v.drive();
c.drive();
v = c;
v.drive();
}
}
1) Generates a Compiler error on the statement v= c;
2) Generates runtime error on the statement v= c;
3) Prints out:
Vehicle: drive
Car: drive
Car: drive
4) Prints out:
Vehicle: drive
Car: drive
Vehicle: drive
Answer : 3

Where in a constructor, can you place a call to a constructor defined in the super class?
1) Anywhere
2) The first statement in the constructor
3) The last statement in the constructor
4) You can't call super in a constructor
Answer : 2

Which variables can an inner class access from the class which encapsulates it?
(multiple)
1) All static variables
2) All final variables
3) All instance variables
4) Only final instance variables
5) Only final static variables
Answer : 1,2,3

What class must an inner class extend:

1) The top level class

152
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

2) The Object class

3) Any class or interface
4) It must extend an interface
Answer 3

In the following code, which is the earliest statement, where the object originally held in e, may be garbage
collected:
1. public class Test {
2. public static void main (String args []) {
3. Employee e = new Employee("Bob", 48);
4. e.calculatePay();
5. System.out.println(e.printDetails());
6. e = null;
7. e = new Employee("Denise", 36);
8. e.calculatePay();
9. System.out.println(e.printDetails());
10. }
11. }
1) Line 10
2) Line 11
3) Line 7
4) Line 8
5) Never
Answer : 3

What is the name of the interface that can be used to define a class that can execute within its own thread?
1) Runnable
2) Run
3) Threadable
4) Thread
5) Executable
Answer : 1

What is the name of the method used to schedule a thread for execution?
1) init();
2) start();
3) run();
4) resume();
5) sleep();
Answer : 2

Which methods may cause a thread to stop executing?

(multiple)
1) sleep();
2) stop();
3) yield();
4) wait();
5) notify();
6) notifyAll()
7) synchronized()
Answer : 1,2,3,4

Which of the following would create a text field able to display 10 characters (assuming a fixed size font)
displaying the initial string "hello":
1) new TextField("hello", 10);
2) new TextField("hello");
3) new textField(10);
4) new TextField();
Answer : 1

Which of the following methods are defined on the Graphics class:

(multiple)
1) drawLine(int, int, int, int)
2) drawImage(Image, int, int, ImageObserver)
3) drawString(String, int, int)
4) add(Component);
5) setVisible(boolean);

153
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

6) setLayout(Object);
Answer : 1,2,3

Which of the following layout managers honours the preferred size of a component:
(multiple)
1) CardLayout
2) FlowLayout
3) BorderLayout
4) GridLayout
Answer : 2

Given the following code what is the effect of a being 5:

public class Test {
public void add(int a) {
loop: for (int i = 1; i < 3; i++){
for (int j = 1; j < 3; j++) {
if (a == 5) {
break loop;
}
System.out.println(i * j);
}
}
}
}
1) Generate a runtime error
2) Throw an ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException
3) Print the values: 1, 2, 2, 4
4) Produces no output
Answer : 4

What is the effect of issuing a wait() method on an object

1) If a notify() method has already been sent to that object then it has no effect
2) The object issuing the call to wait() will halt until another object sends a notify() or notifyAll() method
3) An exception will be raised
4) The object issuing the call to wait() will be automatically synchronized with any other objects using the
receiving object.
Answer : 2

The layout of a container can be altered using which of the following methods:
(multiple)
1) setLayout(aLayoutManager);
2) addLayout(aLayoutManager);
3) layout(aLayoutManager);
4) setLayoutManager(aLayoutManager);
Answer : 1

Using a FlowLayout manager, which is the correct way to add elements to a container:
1) add(component);
2) add("Center", component);
3) add(x, y, component);
4) set(component);
Answer : 1

Given that a Button can generate an ActionEvent which listener would you expect to have to implement, in a class
which would handle this event?
1) FocusListener
2) ComponentListener
3) WindowListener
4) ActionListener
5) ItemListener
Answer : 4

Which of the following, are valid return types, for listener methods:
1) boolean
2) the type of event handled
3) void
4) Component

154
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Answer : 3

Assuming we have a class which implements the ActionListener interface, which method should be used to
register this with a Button?
1) addListener(*);
2) addActionListener(*);
3) addButtonListener(*);
4) setListener(*);
Answer : 2

In order to cause the paint(Graphics) method to execute, which of the following is the most appropriate method to
call:
1) paint()
2) repaint()
3) paint(Graphics)
4) update(Graphics)
5) None - you should never cause paint(Graphics) to execute
Answer : 2

Which of the following illustrates the correct way to pass a parameter into an applet:
1) <applet code=Test.class age=33 width=100 height=100>
2) <param name=age value=33>
3) <applet code=Test.class name=age value=33 width=100 height=100>
4) <applet Test 33>
Answer : 2

Which of the following correctly illustrate how an InputStreamReader can be created:

(multiple)
1) new InputStreamReader(new FileInputStream("data"));
2) new InputStreamReader(new FileReader("data"));
3) new InputStreamReader(new BufferedReader("data"));
4) new InputStreamReader("data");
5) new InputStreamReader(System.in);
Answer : 1,5

What is the permanent effect on the file system of writing data to a new FileWriter("report"), given the file report
already exists?
1) The data is appended to the file
2) The file is replaced with a new file
3) An exception is raised as the file already exists
4) The data is written to random locations within the file
Answer : 2

What is the effect of adding the sixth element to a vector created in the following manner:
new Vector(5, 10);
1) An IndexOutOfBounds exception is raised.
2) The vector grows in size to a capacity of 10 elements
3) The vector grows in size to a capacity of 15 elements
4) Nothing, the vector will have grown when the fifth element was added
Answer : 3

What is the result of executing the following code when the value of x is 2:
switch (x) {
case 1:
System.out.println(1);
case 2:
case 3:
System.out.println(3);
case 4:
System.out.println(4);
}
1) Nothing is printed out
2) The value 3 is printed out
3) The values 3 and 4 are printed out
4) The values 1, 3 and 4 are printed out
Answer : 3

155
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

What is the result of compiling and running the Second class?

Consider the following example:
class First {
public First (String s) {
System.out.println(s);
}
}
public class Second extends First {
public static void main(String args []) {
new Second();
}
}
1) Nothing happens
2) A string is printed to the standard out
3) An instance of the class First is generated
4) An instance of the class Second is created
5) An exception is raised at runtime stating that there is no null parameter constructor in class First.
6) The class second will not compile as there is no null parameter constructor in the class First
Answer : 6

What is the result of executing the following fragment of code:

boolean flag = false;
if (flag = true) {
System.out.println("true");
} else {
System.out.println("false");
}
1) true is printed to standard out
2) false is printed to standard out
3) An exception is raised
4) Nothing happens
Answer : 1

Consider the following classes. What is the result of compiling and running this class?
public class Test {
public static void test() {
this.print();
}
public static void print() {
System.out.println("Test");
}
public static void main(String args []) {
test();
}
}
(multiple)
1) The string Test is printed to the standard out.
2) A runtime exception is raised stating that an object has not been created.
3) Nothing is printed to the standard output.
4) An exception is raised stating that the method test cannot be found.
5) An exception is raised stating that the variable this can only be used within an instance.
6) The class fails to compile stating that the variable this is undefined.
Answer : 6

Examine the following class definition:

public class Test {
public static void test() {
print();
}
public static void print() {
System.out.println("Test");
}
public void print() {
System.out.println("Another Test");
}
}
What is the result of compiling this class:

156
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

1) A successful compilation.
2) A warning stating that the class has no main method.
3) An error stating that there is a duplicated method.
4) An error stating that the method test() will call one or other of the print() methods.
Answer : 3

What is the result of compiling and executing the following Java class:
public class ThreadTest extends Thread {
public void run() {
System.out.println("In run");
suspend();
resume();
System.out.println("Leaving run");
}
public static void main(String args []) {
(new ThreadTest()).start();
}
}
1) Compilation will fail in the method main.
2) Compilation will fail in the method run.
3) A warning will be generated for method run.
4) The string "In run" will be printed to standard out.
5) Both strings will be printed to standard out.
6) Nothing will happen.
Answer : 4

Given the following sequence of Java statements, Which of the following options are true:
1. StringBuffer sb = new StringBuffer("abc");
2. String s = new String("abc");
3. sb.append("def");
4. s.append("def");
5. sb.insert(1, "zzz");
6. s.concat(sb);
7. s.trim();
(multiple)
1) The compiler would generate an error for line 1.
2) The compiler would generate an error for line 2.
3) The compiler would generate an error for line 3.
4) The compiler would generate an error for line 4.
5) The compiler would generate an error for line 5.
6) The compiler would generate an error for line 6.
7) The compiler would generate an error for line 7.
Answer : 4,6

What is the result of executing the following Java class:

import java.awt.*;
public class FrameTest extends Frame {
public FrameTest() {
add (new Button("First"));
add (new Button("Second"));
add (new Button("Third"));
pack();
setVisible(true);
}
public static void main(String args []) {
new FrameTest();
}
}
1) Nothing happens.
2) Three buttons are displayed across a window.
3) A runtime exception is generated (no layout manager specified).
4) Only the "first" button is displayed.
5) Only the "second" button is displayed.
6) Only the "third" button is displayed.
Answer : 6

Consider the following tags and attributes of tags, which can be used with the <AAPLET> and </APPLET> tags?

157
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

1. CODEBASE
2. ALT
3. NAME
4. CLASS
5. JAVAC
6. HORIZONTALSPACE
7. VERTICALSPACE
8. WIDTH
9. PARAM
10. JAR
(multiple)
1) line 1, 2, 3
2) line 2, 5, 6, 7
3) line 3, 4, 5
4) line 8, 9, 10
5) line 8, 9

Answer : 1,5
Which of the following is a legal way to construct a RandomAccessFile:
1) RandomAccessFile("data", "r");
2) RandomAccessFile("r", "data");
3) RandomAccessFile("data", "read");
4) RandomAccessFile("read", "data");
Answer : 1

Carefully examine the following code, When will the string "Hi there" be printed?
public class StaticTest {
static {
System.out.println("Hi there");
}
public void print() {
System.out.println("Hello");
}
public static void main(String args []) {
StaticTest st1 = new StaticTest();
st1.print();
StaticTest st2 = new StaticTest();
st2.print();
}
}
1) Never.
2) Each time a new instance is created.
3) Once when the class is first loaded into the Java virtual machine.
4) Only when the static method is called explicitly.
Answer : 3

What is the result of the following program:

public class Test {
public static void main (String args []) {
boolean a = false;
if (a = true)
System.out.println("Hello");
else
System.out.println("Goodbye");
}
}
1) Program produces no output but terminates correctly.
2) Program does not terminate.
3) Prints out "Hello"
4) Prints out "Goodbye"
Answer : 3

Examine the following code, it includes an inner class, what is the result:
public final class Test4 {
class Inner {
void test() {
if (Test4.this.flag); {

158
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

sample();
}
}
}
private boolean flag = true;
public void sample() {
System.out.println("Sample");
}
public Test4() {
(new Inner()).test();
}
public static void main(String args []) {
new Test4();
}
}
1) Prints out "Sample"
2) Program produces no output but terminates correctly.
3) Program does not terminate.
4) The program will not compile
Answer : 1

Carefully examine the following class:

public class Test5 {
public static void main (String args []) {
/* This is the start of a comment
if (true) {
Test5 = new test5();
System.out.println("Done the test");
}
/* This is another comment */
System.out.println ("The end");
}
}
1) Prints out "Done the test" and nothing else.
2) Program produces no output but terminates correctly.
3) Program does not terminate.
4) The program will not compile.
5) The program generates a runtime exception.
6) The program prints out "The end" and nothing else.
7) The program prints out "Done the test" and "The end"
Answer : 6

What is the result of compiling and running the following applet:

import java.applet.Applet;
import java.awt.*;
public class Sample extends Applet {
private String text = "Hello World";
public void init() {
add(new Label(text));
}
public Sample (String string) {
text = string;
}
}
It is accessed form the following HTML page:
<html>
<title>Sample Applet</title>
<body>
<applet code="Sample.class" width=200 height=200></applet>
</body>
</html>
1) Prints "Hello World".
2) Generates a runtime error.
3) Does nothing.
4) Generates a compile time error.
Answer : 2

159
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

What is the effect of compiling and (if possible) running this class:
public class Calc {
public static void main (String args []) {
int total = 0;
for (int i = 0, j = 10; total > 30; ++i, --j) {
System.out.println(" i = " + i + " : j = " + j);
total += (i + j);
}
System.out.println("Total " + total);
}
}
1) Produce a runtime error
2) Produce a compile time error
3) Print out "Total 0"
4) Generate the following as output:
i = 0 : j = 10
i=1:j=9
i=2:j=8
Total 30
Answer : 3

  Utility Package
1) What is the Vector class?
ANSWER : The Vector class provides the capability to implement a growable array of objects.

2) What is the Set interface?

ANSWER : The Set interface provides methods for accessing the elements of a finite mathematical set.Sets do not
allow duplicate elements.

3) What is Dictionary class?

ANSWER : The Dictionary class is the abstarct super class of Hashtable and Properties class.Dictionary provides
the abstarct functions used to store and retrieve objects by key-value.This class allows any object to be used as a
key or value.

4) What is the Hashtable class?

ANSWER : The Hashtable class implements a hash table data structure. A hash table indexes and stores objects in
a dictionary using hash codes as the objects' keys. Hash codes are integer values that identify objects.

5) What is the Properties class?

Answer : The properties class is a subclass of Hashtable that can be read from or written to a stream.It also
provides the capability to specify a set of default values to be used if a specified key is not found in the table. We
have two methods load() and save().

6) What changes are needed to make the following prg to compile?

import java.util.*;
class Ques{
public static void main (String args[]) {
String s1 = "abc";
String s2 = "def";
Vector v = new Vector();
v.add(s1);
v.add(s2);
String s3 = v.elementAt(0) + v.elementAt(1);
System.out.println(s3);
}
}
ANSWER : Declare Ques as public B) Cast v.elementAt(0) to a String
C) Cast v.elementAt(1) to an Object. D) Import java.lang

ANSWER : B) Cast v.elementAt(0) to a String

 8) What is the output of the prg.

import java.util.*;
class Ques{
public static void main (String args[]) {
String s1 = "abc";

160
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

String s2 = "def";
Stack stack = new Stack();
stack.push(s1);
stack.push(s2);
try{
String s3 = (String) stack.pop() + (String) stack.pop() ;
System.out.println(s3);
}catch (EmptyStackException ex){}
}
}
ANSWER : abcdef B) defabc C) abcabc D) defdef
ANSWER : B) defabc

9) Which of the following may have duplicate elements?

ANSWER : Collection B) List C) Map D) Set
ANSWER : A and B Neither a Map nor a Set may have duplicate elements.

10) Can null value be added to a List?

ANSWER : Yes.A Null value may be added to any List.

11) What is the output of the following prg.

import java.util.*;
class Ques{
public static void main (String args[]) {
HashSet set = new HashSet();
String s1 = "abc";
String s2 = "def";
String s3 = "";
set.add(s1);
set.add(s2);
set.add(s1);
set.add(s2);
Iterator i = set.iterator();
while(i.hasNext())
{
s3 += (String) i.next();
}
System.out.println(s3);
}
}
A) abcdefabcdef B) defabcdefabc C) fedcbafedcba D) defabc
ANSWER : D) defabc. Sets may not have duplicate elements.

12) Which of the following java.util classes support internationalization?

A) Locale B) ResourceBundle C) Country D) Language

ANSWER : A and B . Country and Language are not java.util classes.

13) What is the ResourceBundle?

The ResourceBundle class also supports internationalization.

ResourceBundle subclasses are used to store locale-specific resources that can be loaded by a program to tailor the
program's appearence to the paticular locale in which it is being run. Resource Bundles provide the capability to
isolate a program's locale-specific resources in a standard and modular manner.

14) How are Observer Interface and Observable class, in java.util package, used?
ANSWER : Objects that subclass the Observable class maintain a list of Observers. When an Observable object is
updated it invokes the update() method of each of its observers to notify the observers that it has changed state.
The Observer interface is implemented by objects that observe Observable objects.

15) Which java.util classes and interfaces support event handling?

ANSWER : The EventObject class and the EventListener interface support event processing.

16) Does java provide standard iterator functions for inspecting a collection of objects?
ANSWER : The Enumeration interface in the java.util package provides a framework for stepping once through a
collection of objects. We have two methods in that interface.
public interface Enumeration {

161
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

boolean hasMoreElements();
Object nextElement();
}

17) The Math.random method is too limited for my needs- How can I generate random numbers more
flexibly?

ANSWER :

The random method in Math class provide quick, convienient access to random numbers, but more power and
flexibility use the Random class in the java.util package.
double doubleval = Math.random();

The Random class provide methods returning float, int, double, and long values.
nextFloat() // type float; 0.0 <= value < 1.0
nextDouble() // type double; 0.0 <= value < 1.0
nextInt() // type int; Integer.MIN_VALUE <= value <= Integer.MAX_VALUE
nextLong() // type long; Long.MIN_VALUE <= value <= Long.MAX_VALUE
nextGaussian() // type double; has Gaussian("normal") distribution with mean 0.0 and standard deviation 1.0)
Eg. Random r = new Random();
float floatval = r.nextFloat();

 18) How can we get all public methods of an object dynamically?

ANSWER : By using getMethods(). It return an array of method objects corresponding to the public methods of
this class.
getFields() returns an array of Filed objects corresponding to the public Fields(variables) of this class.
getConstructors() returns an array of constructor objects corresponding to the public constructors of this class.
 JDBC

1) What are the steps involved in establishing a connection?

ANSWER : This involves two steps: (1) loading the driver and (2) making the connection.

2) How can you load the drivers?

ANSWER : Loading the driver or drivers you want to use is very simple and involves just one line of code. If, for
example, you want to use the JDBC-ODBC Bridge driver, the following code will load it:
Eg.
Class.forName("sun.jdbc.odbc.JdbcOdbcDriver");
Your driver documentation will give you the class name to use. For instance, if the class name is jdbc.DriverXYZ ,
you would load the driver with the following line of code:
Eg.
Class.forName("jdbc.DriverXYZ");

3) What Class.forName will do while loading drivers?

ANSWER : It is used to create an instance of a driver and register it with the DriverManager.
When you have loaded a driver, it is available for making a connection with a DBMS.

4) How can you make the connection?

ANSWER : In establishing a connection is to have the appropriate driver connect to the DBMS. The following
line of code illustrates the general idea:
Eg.
String url = "jdbc:odbc:Fred";
Connection con = DriverManager.getConnection(url, "Fernanda", "J8");

5) How can you create JDBC statements?

ANSWER : A Statement object is what sends your SQL statement to the DBMS. You simply create a Statement
object and then execute it, supplying the appropriate execute method with the SQL statement you want to send.
For a SELECT statement, the method to use is executeQuery. For statements that create or modify tables, the
method to use is executeUpdate.
Eg.
It takes an instance of an active connection to create a Statement object. In the following example, we use our
Connection object con to create the Statement object stmt :
Statement stmt = con.createStatement();

6) How can you retrieve data from the ResultSet?

162
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

ANSWER : Step 1.
JDBC returns results in a ResultSet object, so we need to declare an instance of the class ResultSet to hold our
results. The following code demonstrates declaring the ResultSet object rs.
Eg.
ResultSet rs = stmt.executeQuery("SELECT COF_NAME, PRICE FROM COFFEES");
Step2.
String s = rs.getString("COF_NAME");
The method getString is invoked on the ResultSet object rs , so getString will retrieve (get) the value stored in the
column COF_NAME in the current row of rs

7) What are the different types of Statements?

ANSWER : 1.Statement (use createStatement method) 2. Prepared Statement (Use prepareStatement method) and
3. Callable Statement (Use prepareCall)

8) How can you use PreparedStatement?

ANSWER :

This special type of statement is derived from the more general class, Statement.If you want to execute a
Statement object many times, it will normally reduce execution time to use a PreparedStatement object instead.
The advantage to this is that in most cases, this SQL statement will be sent to the DBMS right away,
where it will be compiled. As a result, the PreparedStatement object contains not just an SQL statement, but an
SQL statement that has been precompiled.
This means that when the PreparedStatement is executed, the DBMS can just run the PreparedStatement
's SQL statement without having to compile it first.
Eg.
PreparedStatement updateSales = con.prepareStatement("UPDATE COFFEES SET SALES = ? WHERE
COF_NAME LIKE ?");

9) What setAutoCommit does?

ANSWER :
When a connection is created, it is in auto-commit mode. This means that each individual SQL statement
is treated as a transaction and will be automatically committed right after it is executed.
The way to allow two or more statements to be grouped into a transaction is to disable auto-commit
mode
Eg.
con.setAutoCommit(false);
Once auto-commit mode is disabled, no SQL statements will be committed until you call the method commit
explicitly.
Eg.
con.setAutoCommit(false);
PreparedStatement updateSales = con.prepareStatement(
"UPDATE COFFEES SET SALES = ? WHERE COF_NAME LIKE ?");
updateSales.setInt(1, 50);
updateSales.setString(2, "Colombian");
updateSales.executeUpdate();
PreparedStatement updateTotal = con.prepareStatement("UPDATE COFFEES SET TOTAL = TOTAL + ?
WHERE COF_NAME LIKE ?");
updateTotal.setInt(1, 50);
updateTotal.setString(2, "Colombian");
updateTotal.executeUpdate();
con.commit();
con.setAutoCommit(true);

10) How to call a Strored Procedure from JDBC?

ANSWER :
The first step is to create a CallableStatement object. As with Statement an and PreparedStatement
objects, this is done with an open Connection
object. A CallableStatement object contains a call to a stored procedure;
Eg.
CallableStatement cs = con.prepareCall("{call SHOW_SUPPLIERS}");
ResultSet rs = cs.executeQuery();

11) How to Retrieve Warnings?

ANSWER :

163
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

SQLWarning objects are a subclass of SQLException that deal with database access warnings.
Warnings do not stop the execution of an application, as exceptions do; they simply alert the user that something
did not happen as planned.
A warning can be reported on a Connection object, a Statement object (including PreparedStatement and
CallableStatement objects), or a ResultSet object. Each of these classes has a getWarnings method, which you
must invoke in order to see the first warning reported on the calling object
Eg.
SQLWarning warning = stmt.getWarnings();
if (warning != null) {
System.out.println("\n---Warning---\n");
while (warning != null) {
System.out.println("Message: " + warning.getMessage());
System.out.println("SQLState: " + warning.getSQLState());
System.out.print("Vendor error code: ");
System.out.println(warning.getErrorCode());
System.out.println("");
warning = warning.getNextWarning();}}

12) How can you Move the Cursor in Scrollable Result Sets ?
ANSWER :
One of the new features in the JDBC 2.0 API is the ability to move a result set's cursor backward as well
as forward. There are also methods that let you move the cursor to a particular row and check the position of the
cursor.
Eg.
Statement stmt = con.createStatement(ResultSet.TYPE_SCROLL_SENSITIVE,
ResultSet.CONCUR_READ_ONLY);
ResultSet srs = stmt.executeQuery("SELECT COF_NAME, PRICE FROM COFFEES");
The first argument is one of three constants added to the ResultSet API to indicate the type of a
ResultSet object: TYPE_FORWARD_ONLY, TYPE_SCROLL_INSENSITIVE , and
TYPE_SCROLL_SENSITIVE .
The second argument is one of two ResultSet constants for specifying whether a result set is read-only or
updatable: CONCUR_READ_ONLY and CONCUR_UPDATABLE . The point to remember here is that if you
specify a type, you must also specify whether it is read-only or updatable. Also, you must specify the type first,
and because both parameters are of type int , the compiler will not complain if you switch the order.
Specifying the constant TYPE_FORWARD_ONLY creates a nonscrollable result set, that is, one in
which the cursor moves only forward. If you do not specify any constants for the type and updatability of a
ResultSet object, you will automatically get one that is TYPE_FORWARD_ONLY and CONCUR_READ_ONLY

13) What’s the difference between TYPE_SCROLL_INSENSITIVE , and TYPE_SCROLL_SENSITIVE?

ANSWER :
You will get a scrollable ResultSet object if you specify one of these ResultSet constants.The difference
between the two has to do with whether a result set reflects changes that are made to it while it is open and whether
certain methods can be called to detect these changes. Generally speaking, a result set that is
TYPE_SCROLL_INSENSITIVE does not reflect changes made while it is still open and one that is
TYPE_SCROLL_SENSITIVE does.
All three types of result sets will make changes visible if they are closed and then reopened
Eg.
Statement stmt = con.createStatement(ResultSet.TYPE_SCROLL_INSENSITIVE,
ResultSet.CONCUR_READ_ONLY);
ResultSet srs = stmt.executeQuery("SELECT COF_NAME, PRICE FROM COFFEES");
srs.afterLast();
while (srs.previous()) {
String name = srs.getString("COF_NAME");
float price = srs.getFloat("PRICE");
System.out.println(name + " " + price);
}

14) How to Make Updates to Updatable Result Sets?

ANSWER :
Another new feature in the JDBC 2.0 API is the ability to update rows in a result set using methods in
the Java programming language rather than having to send an SQL command.
But before you can take advantage of this capability, you need to create a ResultSet object that is
updatable. In order to do this, you supply the ResultSet constant CONCUR_UPDATABLE to the createStatement
method.
Eg.
Connection con = DriverManager.getConnection("jdbc:mySubprotocol:mySubName");

164
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Statement stmt = con.createStatement(ResultSet.TYPE_SCROLL_SENSITIVE,

ResultSet.CONCUR_UPDATABLE);
ResultSet uprs = stmt.executeQuery("SELECT COF_NAME, PRICE FROM COFFEES");

 Networking Concepts
1) The API doesn't list any constructors for InetAddress- How do I create an InetAddress instance?
ANSWER : In case of InetAddress the three methods getLocalHost, getByName, getByAllName can be used to
create instances.
E.g.
InetAddress add1;
InetAddress add2;
try{
add1 = InetAddress.getByName("java.sun.com");
add2 = InetAddress.getByName("199.22.22.22");
}catch(UnknownHostException e){}

2) Is it possible to get the Local host IP?

ANSWER : Yes. Use InetAddress's getLocalHost method.

3) What's the Factory Method?

ANSWER :
Factory methods are merely a convention whereby static methods in a class return an instance of that
class.
The InetAddress class has no visible constructors. To create an InetAddress object, you have to use one
of the available factory methods. In InetAddress the three methods getLocalHost, getByName, getByAllName can
be used to create instances of InetAddress.

4) What’s the difference between TCP and UDP?

ANSWER :
These two protocols differ in the way they carry out the action of communicating. A TCP protocol
establishes a two way connection between a pair of computers, while the UDP protocol is a one-way message
sender.
The common analogy is that TCP is like making a phone call and carrying on a two-way
communication, while UDP is like mailing a letter.

5) What is the Proxy Server?

ANSWER :
A proxy server speaks the client side of a protocol to another server. This is often required when clients
have certain restrictions on which servers they can connect to.
And when several users are hitting a popular web site, a proxy server can get the contents of the web
server's popular pages once, saving expensive internetwork transfers while providing faster access to those pages
to the clients.
Also, we can get multiple connections for a single server.

6) What are the seven layers of OSI model?

ANSWER :

Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, DataLink, Physical Layer.

7)What Transport Layer does?

ANSWER : It ensures that the mail gets to its destination. If a packet fails to get its destination, it handles the
process of notifying the sender and requesting that another packet be sent.

8) What is DHCP?
ANSWER : Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, a piece of the TCP/IP protocol suite that handles the automatic
assignment of IP addresses to clients.

9) What is SMTP?

ANSWER : Simple Mail Transmission Protocol, the TCP/IP Standard for Internet mails. SMTP exchanges mail
between servers; contrast this with POP, which transmits mail between a server and a client.

10) In OSI N/w architecture, the dialogue control and token management are responsibilities of...
Answer : Network b) Session c) Application d) DataLink
ANSWER : b) Session Layer.

11) In OSI N/W Architecture, the routing is performed by ______

165
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Answer : Network b) Session c) Application d) DataLink

ANSWER : Answer : Network Layer.
Networking

 What is the difference between URL instance and URLConnection instance?

ANSWER : A URL instance represents the location of a resource, and a URLConnection instance represents a
link for accessing or communicating with the resource at the location.

2) How do I make a connection to URL?

ANSWER : You obtain a URL instance and then invoke openConnection on it.
URLConnection is an abstract class, which means you can't directly create instances of it using a constructor. We
have to invoke openConnection method on a URL instance, to get the right kind of connection for your URL.
Eg. URL url;
URLConnection connection;
try{ url = new URL("...");
conection = url.openConnection();
}catch (MalFormedURLException e) { }

 3) What Is a Socket?

A socket is one end-point of a two-way communication link between two programs running on the
network. A socket is bound to a port number so that the TCP layer can identify the application that data is destined
to be sent.Socket classes are used to represent the connection between a client program and a server program. The
java.net package provides two classes--Socket and ServerSocket--which implement the client side of the
connection and the server side of the connection, respectively.
What information is needed to create a TCP Socket?

ANSWER : The Local System’s IP Address and Port Number.

And the Remote System's IPAddress and Port Number.

5) What are the two important TCP Socket classes?

ANSWER : Socket and ServerSocket.
ServerSocket is used for normal two-way socket communication. Socket class allows us to read and write through
the sockets.
getInputStream() and getOutputStream() are the two methods available in Socket class.

When MalformedURLException and UnknownHostException throws?

ANSWER : When the specified URL is not connected then the URL throw MalformedURLException and If
InetAddress’ methods getByName and getLocalHost are unabletoresolve the host name they throwan
UnknownHostException.

Servlets
 1) What is the servlet?
ANSWER : Servlets are modules that extend request/response-oriented servers, such as Java-enabled web servers.
For example, a servlet might be responsible for taking data in an HTML order-entry form and applying the
business logic used to update a company's order database.
Servlets are to servers what applets are to browsers. Unlike applets, however, servlets have no graphical user
interface.

2) Whats the advantages using servlets than using CGI?

ANSWER : Servlets provide a way to generate dynamic documents that is both easier to write and faster to run.
Servlets also address the problem of doing server-side programming with platform-specific APIs: they are
developed with the Java Servlet API, a standard Java extension.

3) What are the uses of Servlets?

ANSWER : A servlet can handle multiple requests concurrently, and can synchronize requests. This allows
servlets to support systems such as on-line conferencing.
Servlets can forward requests to other servers and servlets.Thus servlets can be used to balance load among several
servers that mirror the same content, and to partition a single logical service over several servers, according to task
type or organizational boundaries.

4) Which pakage provides interfaces and classes for writing servlets?

ANSWER : javax

166
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

5) Whats the Servlet Interfcae?

ANSWER :
The central abstraction in the Servlet API is the Servlet interface. All servlets implement this interface,
either directly or, more commonly, by extending a class that implements it such as HttpServlet.
Servlets-->Generic Servlet-->HttpServlet-->MyServlet.
The Servlet interface declares, but does not implement, methods that manage the servlet and its
communications with clients. Servlet writers provide some or all of these methods when developing a servlet.

6) When a servlet accepts a call from a client, it receives two objects- What are they?
ANSWER : ServeltRequest: Which encapsulates the communication from the client to the server.
ServletResponse: Whcih encapsulates the communication from the servlet back to the client.
ServletRequest and ServletResponse are interfaces defined by the javax.servlet package.

7) What information that the ServletRequest interface allows the servlet access to?
ANSWER : Information such as the names of the parameters passed in by the client, the protocol (scheme) being
used by the client, and the names of the remote host that made the request and the server that received it.
The input stream, ServletInputStream.Servlets use the input stream to get data from clients that use application
protocols such as the HTTP POST and PUT methods.

8) What information that the ServletResponse interface gives the servlet methods for replying to the client?
ANSWER : It Allows the servlet to set the content length and MIME type of the reply.
Provides an output stream, ServletOutputStream and a Writer through which the servlet can send the reply data.

9) What is the servlet Lifecycle?

ANSWER : Each servlet has the same life cycle:
A server loads and initializes the servlet (init())
The servlet handles zero or more client requests (service())
The server removes the servlet (destroy())
(some servers do this step only when they shut down)

10) How HTTP Servlet handles client requests?

ANSWER : An HTTP Servlet handles client requests through its service method. The service method supports
standard HTTP client requests by dispatching each request to a method designed to handle that request. 1
Encapsulation :
Encapsulation is the mechanism that binds together code and the data it manipulates and keeps both safe from
outside interference and misuse.

Inheritance:
Inheritance is the process by which one object acquires the properties of another object.
Polymorphism:
Polymorphism is a feature that allows one interface to be used for a general class of actions. The specific action is
determined by the exact nature of actions.

Code Blocks:
Two or more statements which is allowed to be grouped into blocks of code is otherwise called as Code
Blocks.This is done by enclosing the statements between opening and closing curly braces.

Floating-point numbers:
Floating-point numbers which is also known as real numbers, are used when evaluating expressions that require
fractional precision.

Unicode:
Unicode defines a fully international character set that can represent all of the characters found in all human
languages. It is a unification of dozens of character sets, such as Latin, Greek, Arabic and many more.

Booleans:
Java has a simple type called boolean, for logical values. It can have only on of two possible values, true or false.

Casting:
A cast is simply an explicit type conversion. To create a conversion between two incompatible types, you must use
a cast.

Arrays:
An array is a group of like-typed variables that are referred to by a common name. Arrays offer a convenient
means of grouping related information. Arrays of any type can be created and may have one or more dimension.

167
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Relational Operators:
The relational operators determine the relationship that one operand has to the other. They determine the equality
and ordering.

11.Short-Circuit Logical Operators:

The secondary versions of the Boolean AND and OR operators are known as short-
circuit logical operators. It is represented by || and &&..

12. Switch:
The switch statement is Java’s multiway branch statement. It provides an easy way to
dispatch execution to different parts of your code based on the value of an
experession.

13. Jump Statements:

Jump statements are the statements which transfer control to another part of your
program. Java Supports three jump statements: break, continue, and return.

14. Instance Variables:

The data, or variable, defined within a class are called instance variable.
 
 

Java interview questions Java

1. What are synchronized methods and synchronized statements? Synchronized methods are methods
that are used to control access to an object. For example, a thread only executes a synchronized method
after it has acquired the lock for the method’s object or class. Synchronized statements are similar to
synchronized methods. A synchronized statement can only be executed after a thread has acquired the
lock for the object or class referenced in the synchronized statement.

2. What are different ways in which a thread can enter the waiting state? A thread can enter the
waiting state by invoking its sleep() method, blocking on I/O, unsuccessfully attempting to acquire an
object’s lock, or invoking an object’s wait() method. It can also enter the waiting state by invoking its
(deprecated) suspend() method.

3. Can a lock be acquired on a class? Yes, a lock can be acquired on a class. This lock is acquired on the
class’s Class object.

4. What’s new with the stop(), suspend() and resume() methods in new JDK 1.2? The stop(), suspend()
and resume() methods have been deprecated in JDK 1.2.

5. What is the preferred size of a component? The preferred size of a component is the minimum
component size that will allow the component to display normally.

6. What method is used to specify a container’s layout? The setLayout() method is used to specify a
container’s layout. For example, setLayout(new FlowLayout()); will be set the layout as FlowLayout.

7. Which containers use a FlowLayout as their default layout? The Panel and Applet classes use the
FlowLayout as their default layout.

8. What state does a thread enter when it terminates its processing? When a thread terminates its
processing, it enters the dead state.

9. What is the Collections API? The Collections API is a set of classes and interfaces that support
operations on collections of objects. One example of class in Collections API is Vector and Set and List
are examples of interfaces in Collections API.

10. What is the List interface? The List interface provides support for ordered collections of objects. It
may or may not allow duplicate elements but the elements must be ordered.

11. How does Java handle integer overflows and underflows? It uses those low order bytes of the result
that can fit into the size of the type allowed by the operation.

12. What is the Vector class? The Vector class provides the capability to implement a growable array of
objects. The main visible advantage of this class is programmer needn’t to worry about the number of
elements in the Vector.

168
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

13. What modifiers may be used with an inner class that is a member of an outer class? A (non-local)
inner class may be declared as public, protected, private, static, final, or abstract.

14. If a method is declared as protected, where may the method be accessed? A protected method may
only be accessed by classes or interfaces of the same package or by subclasses of the class in which it is
declared.

15. What is an Iterator interface? The Iterator interface is used to step through the elements of a
Collection.

16. How many bits are used to represent Unicode, ASCII, UTF-16, and UTF-8 characters? Unicode
requires 16 bits, ASCII require 7 bits (although the ASCII character set uses only 7 bits, it is usually
represented as 8 bits), UTF-8 represents characters using 8, 16, and 18 bit patterns, UTF-16 uses 16-bit
and larger bit patterns

17. What is the difference between yielding and sleeping? Yielding means a thread returning to a ready
state either from waiting, running or after creation, where as sleeping refers a thread going to a waiting
state from running state. With reference to Java, when a task invokes its yield() method, it returns to the
ready state and when a task invokes its sleep() method, it returns to the waiting state

18. What are wrapper classes? Wrapper classes are classes that allow primitive types to be accessed as
objects. For example, Integer, Double. These classes contain many methods which can be used to
manipulate basic data types

19. Does garbage collection guarantee that a program will not run out of memory? No, it doesn’t. It is
possible for programs to use up memory resources faster than they are garbage collected. It is also
possible for programs to create objects that are not subject to garbage collection. The main purpose of
Garbage Collector is recover the memory from the objects which are no longer required when more
memory is needed.

20. Name Component subclasses that support painting? The following classes support painting: Canvas,
Frame, Panel, and Applet.

21. What is a native method? A native method is a method that is implemented in a language other than
Java. For example, one method may be written in C and can be called in Java.

22. How can you write a loop indefinitely?

for(;;) //for loop

while(true); //always true

23. Can an anonymous class be declared as implementing an interface and extending a class? An
anonymous class may implement an interface or extend a superclass, but may not be declared to do both.

24. What is the purpose of finalization? The purpose of finalization is to give an unreachable object the
opportunity to perform any cleanup processing before the object is garbage collected. For example,
closing a opened file, closing a opened database Connection.

25. What invokes a thread’s run() method? After a thread is started, via its start() method or that of the
Thread class, the JVM invokes the thread’s run() method when the thread is initially executed.

26. What is the GregorianCalendar class? The GregorianCalendar provides support for traditional
Western calendars.

27. What is the SimpleTimeZone class? The SimpleTimeZone class provides support for a Gregorian
calendar.

28. What is the Properties class? The properties class is a subclass of Hashtable that can be read from or
written to a stream. It also provides the capability to specify a set of default values to be used.

29. What is the purpose of the Runtime class? The purpose of the Runtime class is to provide access to
the Java runtime system.

30. What is the purpose of the System class? The purpose of the System class is to provide access to
system resources.

169
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

31. What is the purpose of the finally clause of a try-catch-finally statement? The finally clause is used
to provide the capability to execute code no matter whether or not an exception is thrown or caught. For
example,

try
{
//some statements
}
catch
{
// statements when exception is cought
}
finally
{
//statements executed whether exception occurs or not
}

32. What is the Locale class? The Locale class is used to tailor program output to the conventions of a
particular geographic, political, or cultural region.

33. What must a class do to implement an interface? It must provide all of the methods in the interface
and identify the interface in its implements clause.

10 Technical
Questions

Technical Questions

1. A 2MB PCM(pulse code modulation) has

a) 32 channels
b) 30 voice channels & 1 signalling channel.
c) 31 voice channels & 1 signalling channel.
d) 32 channels out of which 30 voice channels, 1 signalling channel, & 1 Synchronizatio channel.

Ans: (c)

2. Time taken for 1 satellite hop in voice communication is

a) 1/2 second
b) 1 seconds
c) 4 seconds
d) 2 seconds

Ans: (a)

3. Max number of satellite hops allowed in voice communication is :

a) only one
b) more han one
c) two hops
d) four hops

Ans: (c)

4. What is the max. decimal number that can be accomodated in a byte.

170
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

a) 128
b) 256
c) 255
d) 512

Ans: (c)

5. Conditional results after execution of an instruction in a micro processor is stored in

a) register
b) accumulator
c) flag register
d) flag register part of PSW(Program Status Word)

Ans: (d)

6. Frequency at which VOICE is sampled is

a) 4 Khz
b) 8 Khz
c) 16 Khz
d) 64 Khz

Ans: (a)

7. Line of Sight is

a) Straight Line
b) Parabolic
c) Tx & Rx should be visible to each other
d) none

Ans: (c)

8. Purpose of PC(Program Counter) in a MicroProcessor is

a) To store address of TOS(Top Of Stack)

b) To store address of next instruction to be executed.
c) count the number of instructions.
d) to store base address of the stack.

Ans: (b)

9. What action is taken when the processor under execution is interrupted by a non-maskable interrupt?

a) Processor serves the interrupt request after completing the execution of the current instruction.
b) Processor serves the interupt request after completing the current task.
c) Processor serves the interupt request immediately.
d) Processor serving the interrupt request depends upon the priority of the current task under execution.

Ans: (a)

10. The status of the Kernel is

a) task
b) process
c) not defined.
d) none of the above.

Ans: (b)

11. To send a data packet using datagram , connection will be established

a) before data transmission.

b) connection is not established before data transmission.
c) no connection is required.
d) none of the above.

171
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Ans: (c)

12. Word allignment is

a) alligning the address to the next word boundary of the machine.

b) alligning to even boundary.
c) alligning to word boundary.
d) none of the above.

Ans: (a)

13 When a 'C' function call is made, the order in which parameters passed to the function are pushed into the stack
is

a) left to right
b) right to left
c) bigger variables are moved first than the smaller variales.
d) smaller variables are moved first than the bigger ones.
e) none of the above.

Ans: (b)

14 What is the type of signalling used between two exchanges?

a) inband
b) common channel signalling
c) any of the above
d) none of the above.

Ans: (a)

15 Buffering is

a) the process of temporarily storing the data to allow for small variation in device speeds
b) a method to reduce cross talks
c) storage of data within transmitting medium until the receiver is ready to receive.
d) a method to reduce routing overhead.

Ans: (a)

16. Memory allocation of variables declared in a program is

a) allocated in RAM.
b) allocated in ROM.
c) allocated on stack.
d) assigned to registers.

Ans: (c)

17. A software that allows a personal computer to pretend as a computer terminal is

a) terminal adapter
b) bulletin board
c) modem
d) terminal emulation

Ans: (d)

18. Find the output of the following program

int *p,*q;
p=(int *)1000;
q=(int *)2000;
printf("%d",(q-p));

172
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Ans: 500

19. Which addressing mode is used in the following statements:

(a) MVI  B,55

(b) MOV B,A
(c) MOV M,A

Ans. (a) Immediate addressing mode.

(b) Register Addressing Mode
(c) Direct addressing mode

20. RS-232C standard is used in _____________.

Ans. Serial I/O

21. Memory. Management in Operating Systems is done by

a) Memory Management Unit

b) Memory management software of the Operating System
c) Kernel

Ans: (b)

22. What is done for a Push opertion?

Ans: SP is decremented and then the value is stored.

23. Binary equivalent of 52

Ans. 110100

24. Hexadecimal equivalent of 3452

Ans. 72A

25. Explain Just In Time Concept ?

Ans. Elimination of waste by purchasing manufacturing exactly when needed

26. A good way of unit testing s/w program is

Ans. User test

27. OOT uses

Ans. Encapsulated of detect methods

28.EDI useful in

Ans. Electronic Transmission

29. MRPII different from MRP

Ans. Modular version of man redundant initials

30. Hard disk time for R/W head to move to correct sector

Ans. Latency Time

31. The percentage of times a page number bound in associate register is called

Ans. Bit ratio

32. Expand MODEM

173
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Ans. Modulator and Demodulator

33. RDBMS file system can be defined as

Ans. Interrelated

34. Super Key is

Ans. Primary key and Attribute

35. Windows 95 supports

(a) Multiuser 
(b) n tasks 
(c) Both
(d) None

Ans. (a)

36.In the command scanf, h is used for

Ans. Short int

37.A process is defined as

Ans. Program in execution

38.A thread is

Ans. Detachable unit of executable code)

39.What is the advantage of Win NT over Win 95

Ans. Robust and secure

40.How is memory management done in Win95

Ans. Through paging and segmentation

41.What is meant by polymorphism

Ans. Redfinition of a base class method in a derived class

42.What is the essential feature of inheritance

Ans. All properties of existing class are derived

43.What does the protocol FTP do

Ans. Transfer a file b/w stations with user authentification

44.In the transport layer ,TCP is what type of protocol

Ans. Connection oriented

45.Why is a gateway used

Ans. To connect incompatible networks

46.How is linked list implemented

Ans. By referential structures

47.What method is used in Win95 in multitasking

Ans. Non preemptive check

174
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

48.What is a semaphore

Ans. A method synchronization of multiple processes

49.What is the precedence order from high to low ,of the symbols ( ) ++ /

Ans.( ) , ++, /

50.Preorder of A*(B+C)/D-G

Ans.*+ABC/-DG

51.What is the efficiency of merge sort

Ans. O(n log n)

52.In which layer are routers used

Ans.In network layer

53.Which of the following sorting algorithem has average sorting behavior --

       Bubble sort,merge sort,heap sort,exchange sort

Ans. Heap sort

54.In binary search tree which traversal is used for getting ascending order values--Inorder ,post order,preorder

Ans.Inorder

55.What are device drivers used for

Ans.To provide software for enabling the hardware

56.What is fork command in unix

Ans. System call used to create process

57.What is make command in unix

Ans. Used forcreation of more than one file

58.In unix .profile contains

Ans. Start up program

59.In unix 'ls 'stores contents in

Ans.inode block

60. Which of the following involves context switch,

(a) system call

(b) priviliged instruction
(c) floating poitnt exception
(d) all the above
(e) none of the above

Ans: (a)

61. In OST, terminal emulation is done in

(a) sessions layer

(b) application layer

175
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

(c) presentation layer

(d) transport layer

Ans: (b)

62. For 1 MB memory, the  number of address lines required,

(a)11
(b)16
(c)22
(d) 24

Ans. (b)

63. Semaphore is used for

(a) synchronization
(b) dead-lock avoidence
(c) box
(d) none

Ans. (a)

64. Which holds true for the following statement

     class c: public A, public B

a) 2 member in class A, B should not have same name

b) 2 member in class A, C should not have same name
c) both
d) none

Ans. (a)

65.Preproconia.. does not do which one of the following

(a) macro
(b) conditional compliclation
(c) in type checking
(d) including load file

Ans. (c)

66. Piggy backing is a technique for

a) Flow control
b) Sequence
c) Acknowledgement
d) retransmition

Ans. (c)

67. Which is not a memory management scheme?

a) buddy system
b) swapping
c) monitors
d) paging

Ans : c

68. There was a circuit given using three nand gates with two inputs and one output.
    Find the output.

a) OR
b) AND
c) XOR
d) NOT

176
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

Ans. (a)

69.Integrated check value(ICV) are used as:

Ans. The client computes the ICV and then compares it with the senders value.

70. When applets are downloaded from web sites , a byte verifier performs _________?

Ans. Status check.

71. An IP/IPX packet received by a computer using... having IP/IPX  both how the packet is handled.

Ans. Read the, field in the packet header with to send IP or IPX protocol.

72. The UNIX shell ....

a) does not come with the rest of the system

b) forms the interface between the user and the kernal
c) does not give any scope for programming
d) deos not allow calling one program from with in another
e) all of the above

Ans. (b)

73. In UNIX a files i-node ......?

Ans. Is a data structure that defines all specifications of a file like the file size,
        number of lines to a file, permissions etc.

74. The very first process created by the kernal that runs till the kernal process is halts is

a) init
b) getty
c) both (a) and (b)
d) none of these

Ans. (a)

75. In the process table entry for the kernel process, the process id value is

(a) 0
(b) 1
(c) 2
(d) 255
(e) it does not have a process table entry

Ans. (a)

76. Which of the following API is used to hide a window

a) ShowWindow
b) EnableWindow
c) MoveWindow
d) SetWindowPlacement
e) None of the above

Ans. (a)

77. Which function is the entry point for a DLL in MS Windows 3.1

a) Main
b) Winmain
c) Dllmain
d) Libmain
e) None

Ans. (b)

177
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

78. The standard source for standard input, standard output and standard error is

a) the terminal
b) /dev/null
c) /usr/you/input, /usr/you/output/, /usr/you/error respectively
d) None

Ans. (a)

79. The redirection operators > and >>

a) do the same function

b) differ : > overwrites, while >> appends
c) differ : > is used for input while >> is used for output
d) differ : > write to any file while >> write only to standard output
e) None of these

Ans. (b)

80. The command grep first second third /usr/you/myfile

a) prints lines containing the words first, second or third from the file /usr/you/myfile
b) searches for lines containing the pattern first in the files
second, third, and /usr/you/myfile and prints them
c) searches the files /usr/you/myfiel and third for lines containing the words first or second and prints them
d) replaces the word first with the word second in the files third and /usr/you/myfile
e) None of the above

Ans. (b)

81. You are creating a Index on EMPNO column in the EMPLOYEE table. Which statement will you use?
a) CREATE INdEX emp_empno_idx ON employee, empno;
b) CREATE INdEX emp_empno_idx FOR employee, empno;
c) CREATE INdEX emp_empno_idx ON employee(empno);
d) CREATE emp_empno_idx INdEX ON employee(empno);

Ans. C

82. Which program construct must return a value?

a) Package
b) Function
c) Anonymous block
d) Stored Procedure
e) Application Procedure

Ans. B

83. Which Statement would you use to remove the EMPLOYEE_Id_PK PRIMARY KEY constraint and all
depending constraints fromthe EMPLOYEE table?
a) ALTER TABLE employee dROP PRIMARY KEY CASCAdE;
b) ALTER TABLE employee dELETE PRIMARY KEY CASCAdE;
c) MOdIFY TABLE employee dROP CONSTRAINT employee_id_pk CASCAdE;
d) ALTER TABLE employee dROP PRIMARY KEY employee_id_pk CASCAdE;
e) MOdIFY TABLE employee dELETE PRIMARY KEY employee_id_pk CASCAdE;

Ans. A

84. Which three commands cause a transaction to end? (Chosse three)

a) ALTER
b) GRANT
c) DELETE
d) INSERT
e) UPdATE
f) ROLLBACK

Ans. a ,b ,f

178
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

85. Under which circumstance should you create an index on a table?

a) The table is small.
b) The table is updated frequently.
c) A columns values are static and contain a narrow range of values
d) Two columns are consistently used in the WHERE clause join condition of SELECT
     statements.

Ans.d

86. What was the first name given to Java Programming Language.

a) Oak - Java
b) Small Talk
c) Oak
d) None

Ans.a
87.When a bicycle is in motion,the force of friction exerted by the ground on the two wheels is such that it acts

(a) In the backward direction on the front wheel and in the forward direction on the rear wheel.
(b) In the forward direction on the front wheel and in the backward direction on the rear wheel.
(c) In the backward direction on both the front and rear wheels.
(d) In the backward direction on both the front and rear wheels.

Ans. (d)

88. A certain radioactive element A, has a half life = t seconds.

    In (t/2) seconds the fraction of the initial quantity of the element so far decayed is nearly

(a) 29%
(b) 15%
(c) 10%
(d) 45%

Ans. (a)

89. Which of the following plots would be a straight line ?

(a) Logarithm of decay rate against logarithm of time

(b) Logarithm of decay rate against logarithm of number of decaying nuclei
(c) Decay rate against time
(d) Number of decaying nuclei against time

Ans. (b)

90. A radioactive element x has an atomic number of 100.

    It decays directly into an element y which decays directly into element z.
    In both processes a charged particle is emitted.
    Which of the following statements would be true?

(a) y has an atomic number of 102

(b) y has an atomic number of 101
(c) z has an atomic number of 100
(d) z has an atomic number of 101

Ans. (b)

91. If the sum of the roots of the equation ax2 + bx + c=0 is equal to the sum of the squares of their reciprocals
    then a/c, b/a, c/b are in

(a) AP
(b) GP
(c) HP
(d) None of these

Ans. (c)

179
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

92. A man speaks the truth 3 out of 4 times.

    He throws a die and reports it to be a 6.
    What is the probability of it being a 6?

(a) 3/8
(b) 5/8
(c) 3/4
(d) None of the above

Ans. (a)

93. If cos2A + cos2B + cos2C = 1 then ABC is a

(a) Right angle triangle

(b) Equilateral triangle
(c) All the angles are acute
(d) None of these

Ans. (a)

94. Image of point (3,8) in the line  x + 3y = 7 is

(a) (-1,-4)
(b) (-1,4)
(c) (2,-4)
(d) (-2,-4)

Ans. (a)

97. Which of the following is not an essential condition for interference

(a) The two interfering waves must be propagated in almost the same direction or
     the two interfering waves must intersect at a very small angle
(b) The waves must have the same time period and wavelength
(c) Amplitude of the two waves should be the same
(d) The interfering beams of light must originate from the same source

Ans. (c)

11 UNIX

UNIX Concepts

SECTION - I
FILE MANAGEMENT IN UNIX

1. How are devices represented in UNIX?

All devices are represented by files called special files that are located in/dev directory. Thus,
device files and other files are named and accessed in the same way. A 'regular file' is just an ordinary data file in
the disk. A 'block special file' represents a device with characteristics similar to a disk (data transfer in terms of
blocks). A 'character special file' represents a device with characteristics similar to a keyboard (data transfer is by
stream of bits in sequential order).

2. What is 'inode'?
All UNIX files have its description stored in a structure called 'inode'. The inode contains info about the
file-size, its location, time of last access, time of last modification, permission and so on. Directories are also
represented as files and have an associated inode. In addition to descriptions about the file, the inode contains

180
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

pointers to the data blocks of the file. If the file is large, inode has indirect pointer to a block of pointers to
additional data blocks (this further aggregates for larger files). A block is typically 8k.
Inode consists of the following fields:
 File owner identifier
 File type
 File access permissions
 File access times
 Number of links
 File size
 Location of the file data

3. Brief about the directory representation in UNIX

A Unix directory is a file containing a correspondence between filenames and inodes. A directory is a
special file that the kernel maintains. Only kernel modifies directories, but processes can read directories. The
contents of a directory are a list of filename and inode number pairs. When new directories are created, kernel
makes two entries named '.' (refers to the directory itself) and '..' (refers to parent directory).
System call for creating directory is mkdir (pathname, mode).

4. What are the Unix system calls for I/O?

 open(pathname,flag,mode) - open file
 creat(pathname,mode) - create file
 close(filedes) - close an open file
 read(filedes,buffer,bytes) - read data from an open file
 write(filedes,buffer,bytes) - write data to an open file
 lseek(filedes,offset,from) - position an open file
 dup(filedes) - duplicate an existing file descriptor
 dup2(oldfd,newfd) - duplicate to a desired file descriptor
 fcntl(filedes,cmd,arg) - change properties of an open file
 ioctl(filedes,request,arg) - change the behaviour of an open file
The difference between fcntl anf ioctl is that the former is intended for any open file, while the latter is for device-
specific operations.

5. How do you change File Access Permissions?

Every file has following attributes:
 owner's user ID ( 16 bit integer )
 owner's group ID ( 16 bit integer )
 File access mode word
'r w x -r w x- r w x'
(user permission-group permission-others permission)
r-read, w-write, x-execute
To change the access mode, we use chmod(filename,mode).
Example 1:
To change mode of myfile to 'rw-rw-r--' (ie. read, write permission for user - read,write permission for
group - only read permission for others) we give the args as:
chmod(myfile,0664) .
Each operation is represented by discrete values
'r' is 4
'w' is 2
'x' is 1
Therefore, for 'rw' the value is 6(4+2).
Example 2:
To change mode of myfile to 'rwxr--r--' we give the args as:
chmod(myfile,0744).

6. What are links and symbolic links in UNIX file system?

A link is a second name (not a file) for a file. Links can be used to assign more than one name to a file,
but cannot be used to assign a directory more than one name or link filenames on different computers.
Symbolic link 'is' a file that only contains the name of another file.Operation on the symbolic link is
directed to the file pointed by the it.Both the limitations of links are eliminated in symbolic links.
Commands for linking files are:
Link ln filename1 filename2
Symbolic link ln -s filename1 filename2

7. What is a FIFO?
FIFO are otherwise called as 'named pipes'. FIFO (first-in-first-out) is a special file which is said to be

181
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

data transient. Once data is read from named pipe, it cannot be read again. Also, data can be read only in the order
written. It is used in interprocess communication where a process writes to one end of the pipe (producer) and the
other reads from the other end (consumer).

8. How do you create special files like named pipes and device files?
The system call mknod creates special files in the following sequence.
1. kernel assigns new inode,
2. sets the file type to indicate that the file is a pipe, directory or special file,
3. If it is a device file, it makes the other entries like major, minor device numbers.
For example:
If the device is a disk, major device number refers to the disk controller and minor device number is the
disk.

9. Discuss the mount and unmount system calls

The privileged mount system call is used to attach a file system to a directory of another file system; the
unmount system call detaches a file system. When you mount another file system on to your directory, you are
essentially splicing one directory tree onto a branch in another directory tree. The first argument to mount call is
the mount point, that is , a directory in the current file naming system. The second argument is the file system to
mount to that point. When you insert a cdrom to your unix system's drive, the file system in the cdrom
automatically mounts to /dev/cdrom in your system.

10. How does the inode map to data block of a file?

Inode has 13 block addresses. The first 10 are direct block addresses of the first 10 data blocks in the
file. The 11th address points to a one-level index block. The 12th address points to a two-level (double in-
direction) index block. The 13th address points to a three-level(triple in-direction)index block. This provides a
very large maximum file size with efficient access to large files, but also small files are accessed directly in one
disk read.

11. What is a shell?

A shell is an interactive user interface to an operating system services that allows an user to enter commands as
character strings or through a graphical user interface. The shell converts them to system calls to the OS or forks
off a process to execute the command. System call results and other information from the OS are presented to the
user through an interactive interface. Commonly used shells are sh,csh,ks etc.

SECTION - II
PROCESS MODEL and IPC

1. Brief about the initial process sequence while the system boots up.
While booting, special process called the 'swapper' or 'scheduler' is created with Process-ID 0. The
swapper manages memory allocation for processes and influences CPU allocation. The swapper inturn creates 3
children:
 the process dispatcher,
 vhand and
 dbflush
with IDs 1,2 and 3 respectively.
This is done by executing the file /etc/init. Process dispatcher gives birth to the shell. Unix keeps track of
all the processes in an internal data structure called the Process Table (listing command is ps -el).

2. What are various IDs associated with a process?

Unix identifies each process with a unique integer called ProcessID. The process that executes the
request for creation of a process is called the 'parent process' whose PID is 'Parent Process ID'. Every process is
associated with a particular user called the 'owner' who has privileges over the process. The identification for the
user is 'UserID'. Owner is the user who executes the process. Process also has 'Effective User ID' which determines
the access privileges for accessing resources like files.
getpid() -process id
getppid() -parent process id
getuid() -user id
geteuid() -effective user id

3. Explain fork() system call.

The `fork()' used to create a new process from an existing process. The new process is called the child
process, and the existing process is called the parent. We can tell which is which by checking the return value
from `fork()'. The parent gets the child's pid returned to him, but the child gets 0 returned to him.

4. Predict the output of the following program code

main()

182
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

{
fork();
printf("Hello World!");
}
Answer:
Hello World!Hello World!
Explanation:
The fork creates a child that is a duplicate of the parent process. The child begins from the fork().All the
statements after the call to fork() will be executed twice.(once by the parent process and other by child). The
statement before fork() is executed only by the parent process.

5. Predict the output of the following program code

main()
{
fork(); fork(); fork();
printf("Hello World!");
}
Answer:
"Hello World" will be printed 8 times.
Explanation:
2^n times where n is the number of calls to fork()

6. List the system calls used for process management:

System calls Description
fork() To create a new process
exec() To execute a new program in a process
wait() To wait until a created process completes its execution
exit() To exit from a process execution
getpid() To get a process identifier of the current process
getppid() To get parent process identifier
nice() To bias the existing priority of a process
brk() To increase/decrease the data segment size of a process

7. How can you get/set an environment variable from a program?

Getting the value of an environment variable is done by using `getenv()'.
Setting the value of an environment variable is done by using `putenv()'.

8. How can a parent and child process communicate?

A parent and child can communicate through any of the normal inter-process communication schemes
(pipes, sockets, message queues, shared memory), but also have some special ways to communicate that take
advantage of their relationship as a parent and child. One of the most obvious is that the parent can get the exit
status of the child.

9. What is a zombie?
When a program forks and the child finishes before the parent, the kernel still keeps some of its
information about the child in case the parent might need it - for example, the parent may need to check the child's
exit status. To be able to get this information, the parent calls `wait()'; In the interval between the child terminating
and the parent calling `wait()', the child is said to be a `zombie' (If you do `ps', the child will have a `Z' in its status
field to indicate this.)

10. What are the process states in Unix?

As a process executes it changes state according to its circumstances. Unix processes have the following
states:
Running : The process is either running or it is ready to run .
Waiting : The process is waiting for an event or for a resource.
Stopped : The process has been stopped, usually by receiving a signal.
Zombie : The process is dead but have not been removed from the process table.

11. What Happens when you execute a program?

When you execute a program on your UNIX system, the system creates a special environment for that
program. This environment contains everything needed for the system to run the program as if no other program
were running on the system. Each process has process context, which is everything that is unique about the state of
the program you are currently running. Every time you execute a program the UNIX system does a fork, which
performs a series of operations to create a process context and then execute your program in that context. The steps
include the following:
 Allocate a slot in the process table, a list of currently running programs kept by UNIX.
 Assign a unique process identifier (PID) to the process.

183
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

 iCopy the context of the parent, the process that requested the spawning of the new process.
 Return the new PID to the parent process. This enables the parent process to examine or control the process
directly.
After the fork is complete, UNIX runs your program.

12. What Happens when you execute a command?

When you enter 'ls' command to look at the contents of your current working directory, UNIX does a
series of things to create an environment for ls and the run it: The shell has UNIX perform a fork. This creates a
new process that the shell will use to run the ls program. The shell has UNIX perform an exec of the ls program.
This replaces the shell program and data with the program and data for ls and then starts running that new
program. The ls program is loaded into the new process context, replacing the text and data of the shell. The ls
program performs its task, listing the contents of the current directory.

13. What is a Daemon?

A daemon is a process that detaches itself from the terminal and runs, disconnected, in the background,
waiting for requests and responding to them. It can also be defined as the background process that does not belong
to a terminal session. Many system functions are commonly performed by daemons, including the sendmail
daemon, which handles mail, and the NNTP daemon, which handles USENET news. Many other daemons may
exist. Some of the most common daemons are:
 init: Takes over the basic running of the system when the kernel has finished the boot process.
 inetd: Responsible for starting network services that do not have their own stand-alone daemons. For
example, inetd usually takes care of incoming rlogin, telnet, and ftp connections.
 cron: Responsible for running repetitive tasks on a regular schedule.

14. What is 'ps' command for?

The ps command prints the process status for some or all of the running processes. The information
given are the process identification number (PID),the amount of time that the process has taken to execute so far
etc.

15. How would you kill a process?

The kill command takes the PID as one argument; this identifies which process to terminate. The PID of
a process can be got using 'ps' command.

16. What is an advantage of executing a process in background?

The most common reason to put a process in the background is to allow you to do something else
interactively without waiting for the process to complete. At the end of the command you add the special
background symbol, &. This symbol tells your shell to execute the given command in the background.
Example: cp *.* ../backup& (cp is for copy)

17. How do you execute one program from within another?

The system calls used for low-level process creation are execlp() and execvp(). The execlp call overlays
the existing program with the new one , runs that and exits. The original program gets back control only when an
error occurs.
execlp(path,file_name,arguments..); //last argument must be NULL
A variant of execlp called execvp is used when the number of arguments is not known in advance.
execvp(path,argument_array); //argument array should be terminated by NULL

18. What is IPC? What are the various schemes available?

The term IPC (Inter-Process Communication) describes various ways by which different process running
on some operating system communicate between each other. Various schemes available are as follows:
Pipes:
One-way communication scheme through which different process can communicate. The
problem is that the two processes should have a common ancestor (parent-child relationship). However
this problem was fixed with the introduction of named-pipes (FIFO).

Message Queues :
Message queues can be used between related and unrelated processes running on a machine.

Shared Memory:
This is the fastest of all IPC schemes. The memory to be shared is mapped into the address
space of the processes (that are sharing). The speed achieved is attributed to the fact that there is no
kernel involvement. But this scheme needs synchronization.

Various forms of synchronisation are mutexes, condition-variables, read-write locks, record-locks,

and semaphores.

SECTION - III

184
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

MEMORY MANAGEMENT

1. What is the difference between Swapping and Paging?

Swapping:
Whole process is moved from the swap device to the main memory for execution. Process size
must be less than or equal to the available main memory. It is easier to implementation and overhead to the system.
Swapping systems does not handle the memory more flexibly as compared to the paging systems.
Paging:
Only the required memory pages are moved to main memory from the swap device for
execution. Process size does not matter. Gives the concept of the virtual memory.
It provides greater flexibility in mapping the virtual address space into the physical memory of the
machine. Allows more number of processes to fit in the main memory simultaneously. Allows the greater process
size than the available physical memory. Demand paging systems handle the memory more flexibly.

2. What is major difference between the Historic Unix and the new BSD release of Unix System V in terms of
Memory Management?
Historic Unix uses Swapping – entire process is transferred to the main memory from the swap device,
whereas the Unix System V uses Demand Paging – only the part of the process is moved to the main memory.
Historic Unix uses one Swap Device and Unix System V allow multiple Swap Devices.

3. What is the main goal of the Memory Management?

 It decides which process should reside in the main memory,
 Manages the parts of the virtual address space of a process which is non-core resident,
 Monitors the available main memory and periodically write the processes into the swap device to provide
more processes fit in the main memory simultaneously.

4. What is a Map?
A Map is an Array, which contains the addresses of the free space in the swap device that are allocatable
resources, and the number of the resource units available there.

Address Units
1 10,000
This allows First-Fit allocation of contiguous blocks of a resource. Initially the Map contains one entry –
address (block offset from the starting of the swap area) and the total number of resources.
Kernel treats each unit of Map as a group of disk blocks. On the allocation and freeing of the resources
Kernel updates the Map for accurate information.

5. What scheme does the Kernel in Unix System V follow while choosing a swap device among the multiple
swap devices?
Kernel follows Round Robin scheme choosing a swap device among the multiple swap devices in Unix
System V.

6. What is a Region?
A Region is a continuous area of a process’s address space (such as text, data and stack). The kernel in a
‘Region Table’ that is local to the process maintains region. Regions are sharable among the process.

7. What are the events done by the Kernel after a process is being swapped out from the main memory?
When Kernel swaps the process out of the primary memory, it performs the following:
 Kernel decrements the Reference Count of each region of the process. If the reference count
becomes zero, swaps the region out of the main memory,
 Kernel allocates the space for the swapping process in the swap device,
 Kernel locks the other swapping process while the current swapping operation is going on,
 The Kernel saves the swap address of the region in the region table.

8. Is the Process before and after the swap are the same? Give reason.
Process before swapping is residing in the primary memory in its original form. The regions (text, data
and stack) may not be occupied fully by the process, there may be few empty slots in any of the regions and while
swapping Kernel do not bother about the empty slots while swapping the process out.
After swapping the process resides in the swap (secondary memory) device. The regions swapped out
will be present but only the occupied region slots but not the empty slots that were present before assigning.
While swapping the process once again into the main memory, the Kernel referring to the Process
Memory Map, it assigns the main memory accordingly taking care of the empty slots in the regions.

9. What do you mean by u-area (user area) or u-block?

185
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

This contains the private data that is manipulated only by the Kernel. This is local to the Process, i.e.
each process is allocated a u-area.

10. What are the entities that are swapped out of the main memory while swapping the process out of the
main memory?
All memory space occupied by the process, process’s u-area, and Kernel stack are swapped out,
theoretically.
Practically, if the process’s u-area contains the Address Translation Tables for the process then Kernel
implementations do not swap the u-area.

11. What is Fork swap?

fork() is a system call to create a child process. When the parent process calls fork() system call, the
child process is created and if there is short of memory then the child process is sent to the read-to-run state in the
swap device, and return to the user state without swapping the parent process. When the memory will be available
the child process will be swapped into the main memory.

12. What is Expansion swap?

At the time when any process requires more memory than it is currently allocated, the Kernel performs
Expansion swap. To do this Kernel reserves enough space in the swap device. Then the address translation
mapping is adjusted for the new virtual address space but the physical memory is not allocated. At last Kernel
swaps the process into the assigned space in the swap device. Later when the Kernel swaps the process into the
main memory this assigns memory according to the new address translation mapping.

13. How the Swapper works?

The swapper is the only process that swaps the processes. The Swapper operates only in the Kernel
mode and it does not uses System calls instead it uses internal Kernel functions for swapping. It is the archetype of
all kernel process.

14. What are the processes that are not bothered by the swapper? Give Reason.
 Zombie process: They do not take any up physical memory.
 Processes locked in memories that are updating the region of the process.
 Kernel swaps only the sleeping processes rather than the ‘ready-to-run’ processes, as they have the
higher probability of being scheduled than the Sleeping processes.

15. What are the requirements for a swapper to work?

The swapper works on the highest scheduling priority. Firstly it will look for any sleeping process, if not
found then it will look for the ready-to-run process for swapping. But the major requirement for the swapper to
work the ready-to-run process must be core-resident for at least 2 seconds before swapping out. And for swapping
in the process must have been resided in the swap device for at least 2 seconds. If the requirement is not satisfied
then the swapper will go into the wait state on that event and it is awaken once in a second by the Kernel.

16. What are the criteria for choosing a process for swapping into memory from the swap device?
The resident time of the processes in the swap device, the priority of the processes and the amount of
time the processes had been swapped out.

17. What are the criteria for choosing a process for swapping out of the memory to the swap device?
 The process’s memory resident time,
 Priority of the process and
 The nice value.

18. What do you mean by nice value?

Nice value is the value that controls {increments or decrements} the priority of the process. This value
that is returned by the nice () system call. The equation for using nice value is:
Priority = (“recent CPU usage”/constant) + (base- priority) + (nice value)
Only the administrator can supply the nice value. The nice () system call works for the running process
only. Nice value of one process cannot affect the nice value of the other process.

19. What are conditions on which deadlock can occur while swapping the processes?
 All processes in the main memory are asleep.
 All ‘ready-to-run’ processes are swapped out.
 There is no space in the swap device for the new incoming process that are swapped out of the main
memory.
 There is no space in the main memory for the new incoming process.

20. What are conditions for a machine to support Demand Paging?

 Memory architecture must based on Pages,

186
 Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

 The machine must support the ‘restartable’ instructions.

21. What is ‘the principle of locality’?

It’s the nature of the processes that they refer only to the small subset of the total data space of the
process. i.e. the process frequently calls the same subroutines or executes the loop instructions.

22. What is the working set of a process?

The set of pages that are referred by the process in the last ‘n’, references, where ‘n’ is called the window
of the working set of the process.

23. What is the window of the working set of a process?

The window of the working set of a process is the total number in which the process had referred the set
of pages in the working set of the process.

24. What is called a page fault?

Page fault is referred to the situation when the process addresses a page in the working set of the process
but the process fails to locate the page in the working set. And on a page fault the kernel updates the working set
by reading the page from the secondary device.

There are two types of page fault :

 Validity fault,
 Protection fault.

25. What are data structures that are used for Demand Paging?
Kernel contains 4 data structures for Demand paging. They are,
 Page table entries,
 Disk block descriptors,
 Page frame data table (pfdata),
 Swap-use table.

26. What are the bits that support the demand paging?
Valid, Reference, Modify, Copy on write, Age. These bits are the part of the page table entry, which
includes physical address of the page and protection bits.

Page address Age Copy on write Modify Reference Valid Protection

27. How the Kernel handles the fork() system call in traditional Unix and in the System V Unix, while
swapping?
Kernel in traditional Unix, makes the duplicate copy of the parent’s address space and attaches it to the
child’s process, while swapping. Kernel in System V Unix, manipulates the region tables, page table, and pfdata
table entries, by incrementing the reference count of the region table of shared regions.

28. Difference between the fork() and vfork() system call?

During the fork() system call the Kernel makes a copy of the parent process’s address space and attaches
it to the child process.
But the vfork() system call do not makes any copy of the parent’s address space, so it is faster than the
fork() system call. The child process as a result of the vfork() system call executes exec() system call. The child
process from vfork() system call executes in the parent’s address space (this can overwrite the parent’s data and
stack ) which suspends the parent process until the child process exits.

29. What is BSS(Block Started by Symbol)?

A data representation at the machine level, that has initial values when a program starts and tells about
how much space the kernel allocates for the un-initialized data. Kernel initializes it to zero at run-time.

30. What is Page-Stealer process?

This is the Kernel process that makes rooms for the incoming pages, by swapping the memory pages that
are not the part of the working set of a process. Page-Stealer is created by the Kernel at the system initialization
and invokes it throughout the lifetime of the system. Kernel locks a region when a process faults on a page in the
region, so that page stealer cannot steal the page, which is being faulted in.

31. Name two paging states for a page in memory?

The two paging states are:
 The page is aging and is not yet eligible for swapping,
 The page is eligible for swapping but not yet eligible for reassignment to other virtual address space.

187
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

32. What are the phases of swapping a page from the memory?
 Page stealer finds the page eligible for swapping and places the page number in the list of pages to
be swapped.
 Kernel copies the page to a swap device when necessary and clears the valid bit in the page table
entry, decrements the pfdata reference count, and places the pfdata table entry at the end of the free
list if its reference count is 0.

33. In what way the Fault Handlers and the Interrupt handlers are different?
Fault handlers are also an interrupt handler with an exception that the interrupt handlers cannot sleep.
Fault handlers sleep in the context of the process that caused the memory fault. The fault refers to the running
process and no arbitrary processes are put to sleep.

34. What is validity fault?

If a process referring a page in the main memory whose valid bit is not set, it results in validity fault.
The valid bit is not set for those pages:
 that are outside the virtual address space of a process,
 that are the part of the virtual address space of the process but no physical address is assigned to it.

35. What does the swapping system do if it identifies the illegal page for swapping?
If the disk block descriptor does not contain any record of the faulted page, then this causes the
attempted memory reference is invalid and the kernel sends a “Segmentation violation” signal to the offending
process. This happens when the swapping system identifies any invalid memory reference.

36. What are states that the page can be in, after causing a page fault?
 On a swap device and not in memory,
 On the free page list in the main memory,
 In an executable file,
 Marked “demand zero”,
 Marked “demand fill”.

37. In what way the validity fault handler concludes?

 It sets the valid bit of the page by clearing the modify bit.
 It recalculates the process priority.

38. At what mode the fault handler executes?

At the Kernel Mode.

39. What do you mean by the protection fault?

Protection fault refers to the process accessing the pages, which do not have the access permission. A
process also incur the protection fault when it attempts to write a page whose copy on write bit was set during the
fork() system call.

40. How the Kernel handles the copy on write bit of a page, when the bit is set?
In situations like, where the copy on write bit of a page is set and that page is shared by more than one
process, the Kernel allocates new page and copies the content to the new page and the other processes retain their
references to the old page. After copying the Kernel updates the page table entry with the new page number. Then
Kernel decrements the reference count of the old pfdata table entry.
In cases like, where the copy on write bit is set and no processes are sharing the page, the Kernel allows
the physical page to be reused by the processes. By doing so, it clears the copy on write bit and disassociates the
page from its disk copy (if one exists), because other process may share the disk copy. Then it removes the pfdata
table entry from the page-queue as the new copy of the virtual page is not on the swap device. It decrements the
swap-use count for the page and if count drops to 0, frees the swap space.

41. For which kind of fault the page is checked first?

The page is first checked for the validity fault, as soon as it is found that the page is invalid (valid bit is
clear), the validity fault handler returns immediately, and the process incur the validity page fault. Kernel handles
the validity fault and the process will incur the protection fault if any one is present.

42. In what way the protection fault handler concludes?

After finishing the execution of the fault handler, it sets the modify and protection bits and clears the
copy on write bit. It recalculates the process-priority and checks for signals.

43. How the Kernel handles both the page stealer and the fault handler?
The page stealer and the fault handler thrash because of the shortage of the memory. If the sum of the
working sets of all processes is greater that the physical memory then the fault handler will usually sleep because it

188
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

cannot allocate pages for a process. This results in the reduction of the system throughput because Kernel spends
too much time in overhead, rearranging the memory in the frantic pace.

45. How are devices represented in UNIX?

All devices are represented by files called special files that are located in/dev directory. Thus, device
files and other files are named and accessed in the same way. A 'regular file' is just an ordinary data file in the
disk. A 'block special file' represents a device with characteristics similar to a disk (data transfer in terms of
blocks).
A 'character special file' represents a device with characteristics similar to a keyboard (data transfer is
by stream of bits in sequential order).

3. Brief about the directory representation in UNIX

A Unix directory is a file containing a correspondence between filenames and inodes. A directory is a
special file that the kernel maintains. Only kernel modifies directories, but processes can read directories.
The contents of a directory are a list of filename and inode number pairs. When new directories are
created, kernel makes two entries named '.' (refers to the directory itself) and '..' (refers to parent directory).
System call for creating directory is mkdir (pathname, mode).

4. What are the Unix system calls for I/O?

> open(pathname,flag,mode) - open file
> creat(pathname,mode) - create file
> close(filedes) - close an open file
> read(filedes,buffer,bytes) - read data from an open file
> write(filedes,buffer,bytes) - write data to an open file
> lseek(filedes,offset,from) - position an open file
> dup(filedes) - duplicate an existing file descriptor
> dup2(oldfd,newfd) - duplicate to a desired file descriptor
> fcntl(filedes,cmd,arg) - change properties of an open file
> ioctl(filedes,request,arg) - change the behaviour of an open file
The difference between fcntl anf ioctl is that the former is intended for any open file, while the latter is for device-
specific operations.

5. How do you change File Access Permissions?

Every file has following attributes:
> owner's user ID ( 16 bit integer )
> owner's group ID ( 16 bit integer )
> File access mode word
'r w x -r w x- r w x'
(user permission-group permission-others permission)
r-read, w-write, x-execute
To change the access mode, we use chmod(filename,mode).

Example 1:
To change mode of myfile to 'rw-rw-r--' (ie. read, write permission for user - read,write permission for group -
only read permission for others) we give the args as:
chmod(myfile,0664) .
Each operation is represented by discrete values
'r' is 4
'w' is 2
'x' is 1
Therefore, for 'rw' the value is 6(4+2).

Example 2:
To change mode of myfile to 'rwxr--r--' we give the args as:
chmod(myfile,0744).

6. What are links and symbolic links in UNIX file system?

A link is a second name (not a file) for a file. Links can be used to assign more than one name to a file, but
cannot be used to assign a directory more than one name or link filenames on different computers.
Symbolic link 'is' a file that only contains the name of another file.Operation on the symbolic link is directed to the
file pointed by the it.Both the limitations of links are eliminated in symbolic links.
Commands for linking files are:
Link ln filename1 filename2
Symbolic link ln -s filename1 filename2

8. How do you create special files like named pipes and device files?
The system call mknod creates special files in the following sequence.

189
Technical Aptitude Questions- T.S.M

1. kernel assigns new inode,

2. sets the file type to indicate that the file is a pipe, directory or special file,
3. If it is a device file, it makes the other entries like major, minor device numbers.
For example:
If the device is a disk, major device number refers to the disk controller and minor device number is the disk.

9. Discuss the mount and unmount system calls

The privileged mount system call is used to attach a file system to a directory of another file system; the
unmount system call detaches a file system. When you mount another file system on to your directory, you are
essentially splicing one directory tree onto a branch in another directory tree.
The first argument to mount call is the mount point, that is , a directory in the current file naming
system. The second argument is the file system to mount to that point. When you insert a cdrom to your unix
system's drive, the file system in the cdrom automatically mounts to /dev/cdrom in your system.

10. How does the inode map to data block of a file?

Inode has 13 block addresses. The first 10 are direct block addresses of the first 10 data blocks in the
file. The 11th address points to a one-level index block. The 12th address points to a two-level (double in-
direction) index block. The 13th address points to a three-level(triple in-direction)index block.
This provides a very large maximum file size with efficient access to large files, but also small files are
accessed directly in one disk read.
11. What is a shell?
A shell is an interactive user interface to an operating system services that allows an user to enter
commands as character strings or through a graphical user interface.
The shell converts them to system calls to the OS or forks off a process to execute the command.
System call results and other information from the OS are presented to the user through an interactive interface.
Commonly used shells are sh,csh,ks etc.

190